Spanish Civil Code
Spanish Civil Code
-
Preliminary Title
Laws, their effect, and general rules for their application.
-
Article 1
Laws shall be binding in the Peninsula, the adjacent Islands, the Canaries, and African territory, subject to Peninsular legislation, twenty days after their promulgation, if it is not otherwise provided in them.
-
Article 2
Ignorance of the law does not excuse from compliance with the same.
-
Article 3
Laws shall not have a retroactive effect, unless the contrary is provided in them.
-
Article 4
Acts executed against provisions of law are null, except in the cases in which the same law orders their validity.
-
Article 5
Laws are abrogated only by other subsequent laws, and the disuse or any custom or practice to the contrary shall not prevail against their observance.
-
Article 6
Any tribunal which refuses to give sentence on the pretext of silence, obscurity, or insufficiency of the laws shall incur responsibility therefor.
-
Article 7
If, in the laws, months, days or nights are referred to, it will be understood that months have thirty days, days twenty four hours, and nights from the setting to the rising of the sun.
-
Article 8
Penal laws, police laws, and those of public security are binding on all those who reside in Spanish territory.
-
Article 9
Laws relating to family rights and obligations, or to the status, condition, and legal capacity of persons are binding on Spaniards, even when residing in a foreign country.
-
Article 10
Personal property is subject to the laws of the nation of the owner; real property to the laws of the country in which it is situated.
-
Nevertheless, legal and testamentary successions, in respect to the order of succeeding as well as to the amount of the successional rights and the intrinsic validity of their provisions shall be regulated by the laws of the nation of the person whose succession is considered, whatever may be the nature of the property and the country in which it may be found.
-
Biscayanes, although they may reside in towns, shall continue to submit, in respect to the property they possess in the level lands, to law 15, title 20 of the Fuero of Vizcaya.
-
-
Article 11
The forms and solemnities of contracts, wills, and other public instruments are governed by the laws of the country in which they are executed.
-
When such instruments are authorized by diplomatic or consular officials of Spain in a foreign land, the solemnities required for their execution by Spanish laws shall be observed.
-
Notwithstanding the provisions of this and the preceding article, prohibitive laws concerning persons, their acts or property, and those which have for their object the public order and good morals, shall ot become ineffective by laws or sentences dictated or by regulations or conventions agreed upon in a foreign country.
-
-
Article 12
Provisions under this title in as far as they determine the effects of the laws, statutes, and general rules for their application are binding in every province of the Kingdom. The provisions contained in title 4, book I, are similarly binding.
-
In all other matters, the provinces and territories, in which local law (derecho foral) is in force, shall preserve it, for the present, in its entirety without suffering any alteration in its existing juridical regime, whether written or customary, by the publication of this Code which shall be enforced only as supplementary law in default of that which may be considered as such supplementary law by their special laws.
-
-
Article 13
Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, this Code shall go into effect in Aragon and in the Balearic Islands at the same time as in the provinces, not under local law, in so far as it may not oppose those provisions, local or customary, which are actually in force.
-
Article 14
In accordance with the provision of art. 12, what is established in arts. 9. 10, and n, respecting persons, acts, and property of Spaniards in a foreign land, and that of foreigners in Spain, is applicable to persons, acts, and property of Spaniards in territories or provinces having different civil legislation.
-
Article 15
Family rights and obligations, those relating to the status, condition, and legal capacity of persons, and those of testamentary or intestate succession, declared in this Code, are applicable:
-
1
To persons born in common law (derecho comun) provinces or territories of parents subject to local law, if the latter, during the minority of the children, or the same children within the year following their majority or emancipation, declare it is their will to subject themselves to the Civil Code.
-
2
To the children of a father, and, if he does not exist or is unknown, of the mother belonging to provinces or territories subject to common law, even when born in provinces or territories where local law is in force.
-
3
To those who, proceeding from provinces or territories having local law, should have gained a residence in places subject to common law.
-
For the effects of this article, a residence will be gained; by a residence of ten years in provinces or territories subject to common law, unless the interested party, before the termination of this period, manifests his will to the contrary; or by a residence of two years, whenever the interested party manifests this to be his will.
-
Both manifestations should be made before a municipal judge for the corresponding inscription in the Civil Registry.
-
In every case, the wife shall follow the condition of the husband; and the children, not emancipated, that of their father, and, in his default, that of their mother.
-
The provisions of this article are of reciprocal application to Spanish provinces and territories having different civil legislation.
-
1
-
Article 16
In matters which are governed by special laws, the deficiency thereof shall be supplied by the provisions of this Code.
-
Article 1
-
Book First
Persons
-
Title I
Spaniards and Foreigners
-
Article 17
The following are Spaniards:
-
Article 18
Children, while they remain under the parental power (patria potestas), have the nationality of their parents.
-
In order that those born of foreign parents in Spanish territory may enjoy the benefits granted to them by no. I of art. 17, it shall be an indispensable requisite that the parents declare, in the manner and before the officials specified in art. 19, that they choose, in the name of their children, Spanish nationality, renouncing any other.
-
-
Article 19
Children of a foreigner, born in Spanish dominion, should declare, within the year following their majority or emancipation, if they desire to enjoy the quality of Spaniards which art. 17 concedes to them.
-
Those who are in the Kingdom shall make this declaration before the official in charge of the Civil Registry of the town in which they reside; those who reside in a foreign land, before one of the consular or diplomatic agents of the Spanish government; and those who are in a country in which the government has no agent shall address the Spanish Minister of State.
-
-
Article 20
The quality of a Spaniard is lost by acquiring naturalization in a foreign country, or by accepting employment from another government, or by entering the armed service of a foreign power without permission of the King.
-
Article 21
A Spaniard who loses this quality by acquiring naturalization in a foreign country can recover it, upon returning to the Kingdom, by declaring before an official in charge of the Civil Registry of the domicil which he elects that such is his will, in order that the official may make the corresponding inscription therein, and by renouncing the protection of the flag of such country.
-
Article 22
A married woman follows the condition and nationality of her husband.
-
Article 23
Any Spaniard, who loses this quality by accepting employment of any other government, or by entering the armed service of a foreign power without the King's permission, shall not recover Spanish nationality without previously obtaining the royal authorization.
-
Article 24
Any person, born in a foreign country of a Spanish father or mother, who may have lost Spanish nationality on account of the parents having lost it, may also recover it by complying with the conditions prescribed by art. 19.
-
Article 25
In order that foreigners who have obtained letters of naturalization or gained a residence in any place in the Monarchy may enjoy Spanish nationality, they have to previously renounce their former nationality, swear to the Constitution of the Monarchy, and inscribe themselves as Spaniards in the Civil Registry.
-
Article 26
Spaniards who change their domicil to a foreign country, where they may be considered as natives without other conditions than that of residence in it, in order to preserve their Spanish nationality, shall be required to manifest that such is their will before the Spanish diplomatic or consular agent who shall inscribe them in the Registry of Spanish residents, as well as their consorts, if they are married, and any children which they may have.
-
Article 27
Foreigners enjoy in Spain the rights which the civil laws concede to Spaniards with the exception of what is provided in art. 2 of the Constitution of the State or in international treaties.
-
Article 28
Corporations, institutions, and associations recognized by law and domiciled in Spain shall enjoy Spanish nationality, provided they possess the character of juridical persons in accordance with the provisions of the present Code.
-
Article 17
-
Title II
Birth and Extinction of Civil Personality
-
Chapter First
Natural Persons
-
Article 29
Birth determines personality; but the conceived child is considered as born for all the effects favorable to it, provided that it be born with the conditions which are expressed in the following article.
-
Article 30
For civil effects, the foetus shall only be considered as born when it may have a human figure and shall live twenty four hours entirely separated from the mother (seno materno).
-
Article 31
Priority of birth, in case of double parturition, gives to the first born the rights which the law recognizes in primogeniture.
-
Article 32
Civil personality is extinguished by the death of a person.
-
Minority, insanity or imbecility, state of being deaf and dumb, prodigality,
and civil interdiction are only restrictions upon juridical personality.
-
Those who are in any of these conditions are susceptible of rights and even obligations when such rights or obligations arise from the facts or the relations between the property of the incapacitated and a third person.
-
-
Article 33
If there is doubt, between two or more persons called to succeed
each other, which of them has died first, he, who alleges the prior death
of one or the other, shall be obliged to prove it; in default of proof,
it will be presumed that they both died at the same time, and the transmission
of rights from one to the other will not take place.
-
Article 34
In respect to the presumption of the death of an absent person and its effects, the provisions of title 8 of this book shall rule.
-
Article 29
-
Chapter Second
Juridical Persons
-
Article 35
The following are juridical persons:
-
Article 36
The associations, to which no. 2 of the previous article refers, shall be governed by the provisions relative to the contract of association, according to the nature of the same.
-
Article 37
The civil capacity of corporations shall be regulated by the laws which have created or recognized them, those of associations by their statutes; and those of institutions by the rules of their establishment, duly approved by administrative authority, when such requirement is necessary.
-
Article 38
Juridical persons can acquire and possess property of every class, as well as contract obligations and enforce civil and criminal actions, in conformity with the laws and rules of their constitution.
-
Article 39
When corporations, associations, and institutions have ceased to
act, because of the expiration of the periods during which they should legally
exist, or by having realized the ends for which they were constituted, or
because it has become impossible to apply to such ends the activity and the means at their disposal, their
property shall receive the application which the laws or their statutes
or the clauses of their foundation have assigned to them in anticipation
of such cases.
-
Article 35
-
Chapter First
Natural Persons
-
Title III
Domicil
-
Article 40
For the enforcement of the rights and the fulfillment of civil obligations, the domicil of natural persons is the place
of their usual residence; and, in certain cases, that determined by the Law of Civil Procedure.
-
Article 41
When neither the law which has created or recognized
them, nor the statutes or rules of their foundation shall fix the domicil
of juridical persons, it shall be understood that they have it at the place
where their legal representation is established or where they exercise the
principal functions for which they were established.
-
Article 40
-
Title IV
Marriage
-
Chapter First
General Provision
-
Section First
Forms of Marriage
-
Article 42
The law recognizes two forms of marriage, the canonical, which all who profess the Catholic religion should contract, and the civil, which shall be celebrated in the manner provided in this Code.
-
Article 42
-
Section Second
Provisions Common to Boths Forms of Marriage
-
Article 43
Future espousals do not cause obligation to contract marriage. No tribunal shall entertain a complaint in which their fulfillment is claimed.
-
Article 44
When the promise has been made in a public or private document by a person of age, or by a minor, assisted by the person whose consent is necessary in order to celebrate the marriage, or when the banns have been published, the one who refuses to marry, without just cause, shall be obliged to indemnify the other party for the expenses which he or she may have incurred by reason of the promised marriage.
-
Article 45
Marriage is forbidden:
-
1
To the minor who has not obtained consent and to a person of age who has not asked the advice of the persons to whom it pertains to authorize one or the other, in the cases provided for by law.
-
2
To the widow, during the three hundred and one days following the death of her husband, or before child birth if she should have been left pregnant, and to the woman whose marriage may have been declared null, under the same circumstances and limitations, to be counted from her legal separation.
-
3
To the guardian and his or her descendants with respect to persons whom such guardian may have or may have had under charge, until the guardianship has terminated and the accounts of the same have been approved, except in the cases where the father of the person, subject to guardianship, has authorized the marriage in a will or in a public instrument.
-
1
-
Article 46
The consent, referred to in no. 1 of the preceding article, ought to be granted to the legitimate children by the father; in his default, or where he is impeded, the power to grant it devolves, in this order; upon the mother, the paternal and maternal grandparents, and, in default of all of them, upon the family council.
-
Recognized natural children or children legitimated by royal concession should ask such consent of those who have recognized or legitimated them, of their ascendants, and of the family council, in the order stated in the preceding paragraph.
-
Adopted children shall ask such consent of the adopting father, and, in his default, of the persons of the natural family upon whom it may devolve.
-
Other illegitimate children should obtain the consent of their mother, when she is lawfully known, that of the maternal grandparents, in similar cases, and, in default of the above, that of the family council.
-
It pertains to the heads of foundling institutions to give consent for marriage to those educated therein.
-
-
Article 47
Children of age are obliged to ask the advice of the father, and, in his default, of the mother. If they should not have obtained it, or it should he unfavorable, the marriage cannot be celebrated until three months after the petition is made.
-
Article 48
The consent and the favorable advice for the celebration of a
marriage should be proven, upon the latter being asked, by a document
authorized by a civil or ecclesiastical Notary or the Municipal Judge
of the petitioner's domicil.
-
Article 49
None of those called to give their consent or advice
is obliged to make known the reasons for granting or denying it, nor is
there any remedy against such dissent.
-
Article 50
When, notwithstanding the prohibition of art. 45, the persons comprehended within it get married, their marriage shall be valid; but the contracting parties, without prejudice to the provisions of the Penal Code, shall remain subject to the following rules:
-
1
The marriage shall be understood as contracted with the absolute separation of property, and each consort shall retain the dominion and administration of that which belong to him or her, making as his or her own all the fruits, although with the obligation of proportionally contributing to the support of the marriage charges.
-
2
Neither one of the consorts shall receive from the other anything by donation or by will.
-
3
When one of the consorts is a minor, not emancipated, he shall not receive the administration of his property until he attains majority.
-
4
In the cases of no. 3 of art. 45, the guardian shall, besides, lose the administration of the property of the ward during her minority.
-
1
-
Article 51
Civil or canonical marriage shall produce no civil effects, when either one of the consorts is already lawfully married.
-
Article 52
Matrimony is dissolved by the death of one of the consorts.
-
Article 43
-
Section Third
Proof of Marriage
-
Article 53
Marriages celebrated before this Code went into effect shall be
proven in the manner established by the former laws. Those contracted
afterwards shall be proven only by the certification of the record of the Civil Registry, unless the books
thereof have not existed or have disappeared or a question is pending
before the courts, in which cases all kinds of proof are admissible.
-
Article 54
In the cases referred to in paragraph second of the
previous article, the constant possession of the status of the parents,
united to the certifications of the births of their children as legitimate
ones, shall be one of the means of proof of the marriage of the parents,
if it is not shown that one of the two was bound by another previous marriage.
-
Article 55
A marriage contracted in a foreign country, where such acts are not subject to a regular or authenticate registration, may be proven by any of the means of proof admitted by law.
-
Article 53
-
Section Fourth
Rights and Obligations Between Husband and Wife
-
Article 56
The consorts are obliged to live together, to be faithful to and mutually help each other.
-
Article 57
The husband is obliged to protect the wife and the latter to obey the husband.
-
Article 58
The wife is obliged to follow her husband wherever
he may establish his residence. The tribunals, nevertheless, may, with
just cause, exempt her from this obligation when the husband changes his
residence beyond the seas or to a foreign country.
-
Article 59
The husband is the administrator of the property of the conjugal
society, except when stipulated to the contrary, and that provided in
art. 1384.
-
When he is under eighteen years of age, he cannot administer without consent
of his father and, in his default, without that of the mother, and, in
default of both, without that of his guardian.
-
Neither can he appear in a suit in court without the assistance of said
persons.
-
In no case, until he has attained majority, can the husband, without the
consent of the persons, mentioned in the preceding paragraph, borrow money,
burden nor alienate the real property.
-
-
Article 60
The husband is the representative of his wife. She cannot, without his permission, appear in a suit by herself or through an attorney.
-
Article 61
Neither can the wife without the permission or power
of her husband acquire (property) by an onerous or lucrative title, alienate
her property or bind herself, except in the cases and with the limitation
established by law.
-
Article 62
Acts, executed by the wife, contrary to the provisions of the
preceding articles, are null and void, except when they involve things
which by their nature are destined for the ordinary consumption of the
family, in which case, purchases made by the wife shall be valid.
-
Article 63
The wife, without permission of the husband, can:
-
Article 64
The wife shall share the honors of the husband,
except those which may be strictly and exclusively personal, and shall
retain them as long as she does not contract a new marriage.
-
Article 65
Only the husband and his heirs can claim the nullity of the acts executed by the wife without competent permission or authorization.
-
Article 66
What is established in this section is understood
without prejudice to the provisions of the present Code, about absence,
incapacity, prodigality, and interdiction of the husband.
-
Article 56
-
Section Fifth
Effects of Nullity of Marriage and Divorce
-
Article 67
The civil effects of petitions and decrees about
the nullity of marriage and about divorce can only be obtained before
the ordinary tribunals.
-
Article 68
After the petitions, which are referred to in the
preceding article, are interposed and admitted, the following provisions
shall be adopted during the pendency of the suit:
-
1
To separate the consorts in every case.
-
2
To place the wife under protection in the cases and in the form provided
by the Law of Civil Procedure.
-
3
To place the children under the care of one or both of the consorts,
as may be proper.
-
4
To provide for the support of the wife and the children who do not
remain under the power of the father.
-
5
To decree the necessary measures to prevent the husband, who may have
given cause for the divorce, or against whom the petition for nullity
of the marriage has been instituted, from causing injury to the wife in
the administration of her property.
-
1
-
Article 69
Marriage contracted in good faith produces civil effects, although it may be declared null and void.
-
When good faith has existed on the part of one of the consorts alone,
it shall produce civil effects only as to this one and the children.
-
Good faith is presumed, if the contrary is not shown. When bad faith has
existed on the part of both consorts, the marriage shall only produce
civil effects in respect to the children.
-
-
Article 70
When the nullity of the marriage has been finally
decreed, the sons over three years of age shall remain under the care
of the father, and the daughters under the care of the mother, if there
should have been good faith on the part of both consorts.
-
When good faith may have existed on the part of only one of the consorts,
the children of both sexes shall remain under this one's power and care.
-
When both are guilty of bad faith, the court shall decide as to the disposition
of the children in the form provided for in paragraph second of no. 2
of art. 73.
-
The sons and daughters, under three years of age, shall remain under the
care of the mother, in every case, until they complete this age, unless
on account of special reasons the sentence has disposed otherwise.
-
-
Article 71
The provisions of the first and second paragraphs of
the preceding article shall not be effective, if the parents, by common
agreement, shall provide otherwise for the care of the children.
-
Article 72
The final decree of nullity shall produce, in respect to the property
of the marriage, the same effects as the dissolution by death; but the
consort who has acted in bad faith shall have no rights to the profits
of the conjugal society (gananciales).
-
Article 73
A decree of divorce shall produce the following effects:
-
1
The separation of the consorts.
-
2
The children to remain or be put under the power and protection of the innocent consort.
-
When both are guilty, a guardian shall be provided for the children in conformity with the provisions of this Code.
-
Nevertheless, when the decree has not provided otherwise, the mother, in every case, shall have in her care the children under three years of age.
-
Upon the death of the innocent consort, the guilty one shall recover the parental power and his or her rights, when the cause which gave origin for the divorce should have been adultery, violence to the person, or grave acts of contumely (injurias graves).
-
When the causes are different, a guardian shall be appointed for the children.
-
The deprivation of the parental power and of its rights shall not exempt the guilty consort from the fulfillment of the obligations which this Code imposes upon him or her in respect to the children.
-
-
3
The guilty consort shall lose all that may have been given or promised him or her by the innocent one or by any other person in consideration for such one; and the innocent consort shall keep all that he has received from the guilty one, being able, besides, to claim forthwith all that may have been promised by the guilty one.
-
4
The separation of the property of the conjugal society, and the loss of the administration of that of the wife, if the husband should possess it, and is the one who gave cause for the divorce.
-
1
-
Article 74
Reconciliation determines the suit for divorce and leaves, without subsequent effects, the decree dictated in respect thereto; but the consorts must give notice of it to the tribunal who has or may have cognizance of the suit.
-
The effects of the decree shall subsist in respect to the children, without
prejudice to the provision of the preceding article, when it is founded
on the attempt or connivance of the husband or of the wife to corrupt
the sons or to prostitute their daughters, in which case, if the sons
and daughters still continue under the parental power, the tribunals shall
adopt convenient measures in order to protect them from corruption or
prostitution.
-
-
Article 67
-
Section First
Forms of Marriage
-
Chapter Second
Canonical Marriage
-
Article 75
The requisites, form, and solemnities for the
celebration of canonical marriage shall be governed by the provisions of
the Catholic Church and of the Holy Council of Trent, accepted as laws of
the Kingdom.
-
Article 76
Canonical marriage shall produce all the civil effects in respect
to the persons and property of the consorts and their descendants.
-
Article 77
A municipal judge or other state official shall be present at the
act of celebration of the canonical marriage with the sole object of verifying
the immediate inscription of it in the Civil Registry.
-
For this object, the contracting parties are obliged to give notice in writing
to the respective Municipal Judge, twenty four hours, at least, before the
day, hour, and place where the marriage is to be celebrated, incurring, if they do not do so, a fine of
from five to eighty pesetas.
-
The Municipal Judge shall give a receipt for the notice from the contracting
parties. Should he decline to give it, he shall incur a fine, which shall
not be less than twenty nor exceed one hundred pesetas.
-
The celebration of the canonical marriage shall not be proceeded with without
the presentation of said receipt to the parochial priest.
-
If the marriage is celebrated without the presence of the Municipal Judge
or his representative , notwithstanding that the contracting parties may
have advised him of it, the transcription of the certificate of the canonical
marriage to the Civil Registry shall be done at his expense, besides he shall pay a fine which
shall not be less than twenty nor exceed one hundred pesetas. In this case,
the marriage shall produce all its civil effects from the moment of its
celebration.
-
If the contracting parties should be to blame for not having given notice
to the Municipal Judge, they can remedy the defect, asking for the inscription
of the marriage in the Civil Registry.
-
In this case, the marriage shall produce no civil effects, except from its
inscription.
-
-
Article 78
Those who contract canonical marriage in articulo
mortis shall give notice to the official in charge of the Civil Registry,
at any time whatever prior to its celebration, and prove, in any manner
whatever, that they have fulfilled this duty.
-
The penalties imposed upon contracting parties who omit this requisite shall
not be applicable to the case of marriage in articulo mortis when it is
shown that it was impossible to give timely notice.
-
In every case, in order that the marriage may produce civil effects from
the date of its celebration, the sacramental certificate shall be inscribed
in the Registry within ten days next following.
-
-
Article 79
The secret marriage of conscience, celebrated before the church, is not subject to any formality of the civil order, neither
shall it produce civil effects, except from the moment of its publication
by virtue of its inscription in the Registry. This marriage, shall, nevertheless,
produce civil effects from its celebration, if both contracting parties,
of common accord, shall ask the bishop who may have authorized it for a
copy of the entry made in the secret Registry of the bishopric, and shall
directly send it, with the proper secrecy to the Direccion General of the Civil Registry asking for its inscription.
-
For this purpose the Direccion General shall keep a special and secret Registry
with the necessary precautions that the contents of such inscriptions may
not be known, until the interested parties ask that they may be given publicity
by transferring the same to the Municipal Registry of their domicil.
-
-
Article 80
The cognizance of suits for nullity and divorce, in case of canonical marriages, belong to the ecclesiastical tribunals.
-
Article 81
When a suit for divorce or nullity of marriage is commenced before the ecclesiastical tribunal, it belongs to the civil tribunal to dictate, upon the petition of the party interested, the dispositions referred to in art. 68.
-
Article 82
A final decree for nullity or divorce of canonical
marriage shall be inscribed in the Civil Registry, and shall be presented
to the ordinary tribunal in order to ask for its execution as to the part
relating to civil effects.
-
Article 75
-
Chapter Third
Civil Marriage
-
Section First
Capacity of Contracting Parties
-
Article 83
The following cannot contract marriage:
-
1
Males, until they have attained the full age of fourteen, and females until they have attained the full age of twelve.
-
Marriage contracted by person under puberty, shall, nevertheless, be ipso facto validated, without the necessity of an express declaration, if a day after having arrived at the legal age of puberty, they should have lived together without having brought suit against its validity, or if the woman should have conceived before the legal age of puberty or before having established such suit.
-
-
2
Those who were not in the full exercise of their reason at the time of contracting marriage.
-
3
Those who suffered from physical, absolute or relative impotency for the purposes of generation, prior to the celebration of the marriage, in a patent, perpetual or incurable manner.
-
4
Those ordained in sacris and those professed in an approved religious canonical order, bound by a solemn pledge of chastity, except those who may have obtained the corresponding canonical dispensation.
-
5
Those that are already lawfully married.
-
1
-
Article 84
Neither can the following contract marriage between themselves:
-
1
The ascendants or descendants by legitimate or natural consanguinity or affinity.
-
2
Collaterals by legitimate consanguinity up to and including the fourth degree.
-
3
Collaterals by legitimate affinity up to and including the fourth degree.
-
4
Collaterals by natural consanguinity or affinity up to and including the second degree.
-
5
The adopting father and mother and the adopted; the latter and the surviving consort of the adopters, and the adopters and the surviving consort of the adopted.
-
6
The legitimate descendants of the adopter with the adopted, while the relation of adoption lasts.
-
7
Adulterers who have been condemned by a final sentence.
-
1
-
Article 85
The govennent, with just cause, can, on petition of a
party, dispense the inpediment included in no. 2 of art. 45; the third
and fourth degrees of collateral relationship by legitimate consanguinity;
the impediments growing out of legitimate or natural affinity between
collaterals, and those referring to the descendants of the adopter.
-
Article 83
-
Section Second
Celebration of Marriage
-
Article 86
Those who, in conformity with art. 42, desire to contract marriage in the manner detemined in this Code, shall present to the Municipal Judge of their domicil a declaration signed by both contracting parties, in which appears:
-
Article 87
Marriages shall be celebrated personally or by a
proxy to whom a special power has been granted; but the presence of the
contracting party who is domiciled or resides in the district of the Judge
who is to authorize the marriage shall always be necessary.
-
Article 88
When the Municipal Judge, selected for the celebration of the marriage, should not be at the time (of the district) of two declarations shall be presented, one contracting party, expressing which of the two Judges they have chosen for the celebrations of the marriage, and, in both courts, the proceedings which are established in the following articles shall be observed.
-
Article 89
After the petition has been ratified by both parties, the Municipal Judge shall order that edicts or proclamations shall be posted for fifteen days announcing the pretention with all the details, indicated in art. 86 and requiring those who have information of any impediment thereto to denounce it.
-
Similar edicts shall be sent to the Municipal Judges of the towns in which
the interested parties may have lived or been domiciled, during the last
two years, requiring that they be posted in the place of the holding of
their public court for the period of fifteen days, and that, after the
lapse of this time, they should be returned with a certification of said
requisite have been fulfilled and whether or not any impediment has been
denounced.
-
-
Article 90
Soldiers in active service who may intend to contract marriage
shall be dispensed from publishing such edicts outside of the place where
they reside, if they present certificates that they are unmarried, issued
by the commanding officer of the military body to which they belong.
-
Article 91
When the interested parties are foreigners, and have
not resided two years in Spain, they shall prove, by a certificate in
due form given by competent authority, that in the territory where they
have had their domicil or residence, during the last two years, publication
has been made of the marriage which they intend to contract with all the
solemnities which are required in said place.
-
Article 92
In all other cases, the government can dispense with the publication of the banns on account of serious causes, properly approved.
-
Article 93
Notwithstanding what is provided in the preceding articles, the Municipal Judge shall authorize the marriage of a person
who is in imminent danger of death, whether he is domiciled in the place
or is a transient.
-
Article 94
Paymasters of war vessels and captains of merchantmen shall authorize
marriages which are celebrated on board (ship) in imminent danger of death.
-
Article 95
The provision of the preceding article is applicable to the commanders
of military bodies in the field in default of a municipal judge, respecting
members of the same who intend to celebrated marriage, in articulo mortis.
-
Article 96
When the fifteen days, which are referred to in art. 89, have elapsed without any impediment having been denounced, and
the Municipal Judge. has no knowledge of any such, he shall proceed with
the celebration of the marriage in the manner and form prescribed in the
Code.
-
Article 97
When, before the celebration of the marriage, any
person should appear opposing it and alleging a lawful impediment, or
the Municipal Judge should have knownedge of any such, he shall suspend
the celebration of the marriage, until the truth or falseness of the impediment
is established in a final sentence.
-
Article 98
All those who have knowledge of a pretention of a marriage are obliged to denounce any impediment known to them.
-
Such denouncement having been made, it shall be transmitted to the Public
Attorney, who, if he finds any legal foundation therefor, shall establish
opposition to the marriage.
-
Only private parties who may have an interest in preventing the marriage
shall by themselves formalize the opposition and in both cases such opposition
shall be followed in conformity with the Law of Civil Procedure, giving
it the form of an incidental question (tramitacion de los incidences).
-
-
Article 99
When, by a final sentence, the alleged impediments are declared false, he, who taking them as a basis formalized in his name
the opposition to the marriage, remains obliged to make indemnity for
damages and injuries.
-
Article 100
The marriage shall be celebrated by the contracting parties appearing
before the Municipal Judge, or one of them and the person to whom the
absentee may have granted a special power to represent him, accompanied
by two witnesses of lawful age and without legal impediments.
-
Forthwith, the Municipal Judge, after reading arts. 56 and 57 of this
Code, shall ask each one of the contracting parties if they persist in
the resolution to celebrate the marriage, and if he must actually perform
it; and, if both reply affirmatively, he shall drawn up the act of marriage
with all the circumstances necessary to make it appear that the requirements,
provided in this section, have been complied with.
-
The act shall be signed by the Judge, the contracting parties, the witnesses
and the Secretary (clerk) of the Court.
-
Consuls and vice-consuls shall exercise the functions of municipal judges
in marriages of Spaniards, celebrated in foreign countries.
-
-
Article 86
-
Section Third
Nullity of Marriage
-
Article 101
The following marriages are null:
-
1
Those celebrated between persons to whom arts. 83 and 84 refer, except in cases of dispensation.
-
2
Those contracted by error as to the person, or by compulsion or serious fear which avoids the consent.
-
3
Those contracted by the abductor with the abducted, while the latter is in the former's power.
-
4
Those which are celebrated without the intervention of a competent municipal judge or of the person who must authorize it in his place, and without the presence of the witnesses, required by art. 100.
-
1
-
Article 102
The action to ask for the nullity of the marriage belongs to the consorts, to the Public Attorney, and to any persons whatever who may have interest in it.
-
The cases of abduction, error, force or fear are excepted, in which cases
only the consort, who may have suffered from it, can exercise it; and
that of impotency, in which the action belongs to one or the other consort
and to the persons who may have an interest in the nullity.
-
The action lapses, and the marriage shall be confirmed, in their respective
cases, when the consorts having lived together during six month after
the error has disappeared or after the force or the cause of the fear
has ceased, or if, after the abducted party having recovered liberty,
he or she should not have interposed a demand for nullity during said
term.
-
-
Article 103
The civil tribunals shall take cognizance of the suits
for nullity of marriages, celebrated in conformity with the provisions
of this chapter, shall adopt the measures, indicated in art. 68, and shall
give sentence definitely.
-
Article 101
-
Section Fourth
Divorce
-
Article 104
Divorce only produces the suspension of the life in common of the consorts.
-
Article 105
The legitimate causes for divorce are:
-
1
Adultery on the part of the wife, in every case, and on the part of the husband, when public scandal or disgrace of the wife results from it.
-
2
Personal violence actually inflicted or grave acts of contumely (injurias graves).
-
3
Violence exercised by the husband over the wife in order to oblige her to change her religion.
-
4
The proposal of the husband to prostitute his wife.
-
5
The atempts of the husband or wife to corrupt their sons or to prostitute their daughters, and the connivance in their corruption or prostitution.
-
6
The condemnation of a consort to cadena perpetua (1) or to reclusion perpetua (2).
-
1
-
Article 106
Only the innocent consort can petition for divorce.
-
Article 107
The provision of art. 103 shall be applicable to suits for divorce and their incidents.
-
Article 104
-
Section First
Capacity of Contracting Parties
-
Chapter First
General Provision
-
Title V
Paternity and Filiation
-
Chapter First
Legitimate Children
-
Article 108
Children, born after one hundred and eighty days next following the celebration of marriage and before three hundred
days next following its dissolution or the separation of the consorts, shall
be presumed legitimate children.
-
Article 109
A child shall be presumed to be legitimate, even
though the mother should have declared against its legitimacy, or should
have been condemned as an adulteress.
-
Article 110
The child, born within one hundred and eighty days
next following the celebration of a marriage, shall be presumed to be legitimate,
if any of the following circumstances exist:
-
Article 111
The husband or his heirs can disavow the legitimacy
of the child, born after the expiration of three hundred days next following
the dissolution of the marriage or the actual legal separation of the consorts;
but both the son and the mother shall also have a right to verify, in such
cases, the paternity of the husband.
-
Article 112
The heirs can contest the legitimacy of the child only in the following cases:
-
Article 113
The action to contest the legitimacy of the child
shall be instituted within two months next following the inscription of
the birth in the Registry, should the husband be in the same place, or,
in certain cases, (if) any one of his heirs (should be present).
-
Article 114
Legitimate children have the right:
-
Article 108
-
Chapter Second
Proofs of the Filiation of Legitimate Children
-
Article 115
The filiation of legitimate children is proven
by the record of the birth, inscribed in the Civil Registry, or by an authentic
instrument, or a final sentence in the cases to which arts. 110 to 113 of
the preceding chapter refer.
-
Article 116
In default of the documents, stated in the preceding
article, filiation shall be proven by the constant posession of the status
of a legitimate child.
-
Article 117
In default of the records of birth, authentic documents, a final sentence, or posession of status, legitimate filiation may be proven by any other means, provided there is a commencement of proof in writing coming from both parents, either conjointly or severally.
-
Article 118
The action to claim its legitimacy belongs to the child during all
his life and shall be transmitted to its heirs, should he die during minority
or be a lunatic. In such cases, the heirs shall have a term of five years
for instituting the action.
-
Article 115
-
Chapter Third
Legitimated Children
-
Article 119
Only natural children can be legitimated. Natural children are those born out of marriage of parents who, at the date of the conception of the child, could have married with or without dispensation.
-
Article 120
Legitimation may be obtained:
-
Article 121
Children can only be considered as legitimated by a
subsequent marriage, when they have been recognized by the parents before
or after the celebration of such marriage.
-
Article 122
Those legitimated by subsequent marriage shall enjoy the same rights as legitimate children.
-
Article 123
Legitimation shall produce its effects in any case from the date of the marriage.
-
Article 124
The legitimation of the children who have died before the celebration of the marriage shall benefit their descendants.
-
Article 125
For the legitimation by Royal Concession the following requirements are necessary:
-
1
That legitimation! by subsequent marriage may not be possible.
-
2
That it may be asked by the parents or by one of them.
-
3
That the father or mother asking for it has no legitimate children, nor children legitimated by subsequent marriage, nor descendants of the same.
-
4
That if the party asking for it is married, he has to obtain the consent of the other consort.
-
1
-
Article 126
Legitimation, by Royal Concession may also be
obtained by the child whose deceased father or mother has shown in his or
her will or in a public instrument a desire to legitimate it, provided the
condition stated in no. 3 of the preceding article is complied with.
-
Article 127
Legitimation by Royal Concession entitles the legitimated child.
-
Article 128
The legitimation may be contested by those believing that their rights may be injured when it may be granted to persons not having the legal status of natural children, or when the requirements set forth in this chapter do not exist.
-
Article 119
-
Chapter Fourth
Illegitimate Children
-
Section First
Recognition of Natural Children
-
Article 129
A natural child may be recognized by the father and mother conjointly
or by only one of them.
-
Article 130
In case the recognition is made by only one of the
parents, it shall be presumed that the child is a natural one, if the
party recognizing it had, at the time of the conception, legal capacity
to contract marriage.
-
Article 131
The recognition of a natural child shall be made in the record of birth, by will, or by any other public instrument.
-
Article 132
When the father or mother alone shall make the
recognition, he or she shall not reveal the name of the person, the other
parent of the child, nor express any circumstance by which it may be discovered.
Public officials shall not authorize any document infringing such a prescription. If notwithstanding this prohibition,
they should make it, they will incur a fine of 125 to 500 pesetas, and
besides the words containing such revelation shall be stricken out.
-
Article 133
A child of age cannot be recognized without his consent. When the recognition of the minor is not made in the record of
birth or in a will, the judicial approval, after a hearing of the Public Attorney, shall be required.
-
Article 134
The recognized natural child has rights:
-
Article 135
The father is obliged to recognize the natural child in the following cases:
-
In cases of violation, ravishing or rape, the provisions prescribed in the Penal Code shall be followed in what refers to the recognition of the issue."
-
Article 136
The mother shall be obliged to recognize the natural child:
-
Article 137
The actions for the recognitsion of natural children can be instituted only during the life of the presumed parents, except in the following cases:
-
1
If the father or mother have died during the minority of the child, in which case, it may commence the action before the expiration of the first four years after its majority.
-
2
If, after the death of the father or mother, some document, before unknown, should be discovered in which the child is expressly recognized.
-
1
-
Article 138
The recognition made in favor of a child which does not reunite the condition of the second paragraph of art. 119, or in which
the prescriptions of this section have not been complied with may be contested
by those to whom it may cause injury.
-
Article 129
-
Section Second
Other Illegitimate Children
-
Article 139
Illegitimate children not having the legal status of natural children
shall only have the right to claim support from their parents in accordance with art. 143.
-
Article 140
The right to support, referred to in the preceeding article, can only be claimed:
-
1
If the paternity or maternity is inferred from the final sentence rendered in a criminal or civil proceeding.
-
2
If the paternity or maternity is shown in an incontrovertible document, from the father or mother, in which the filiation is expressly recognized.
-
3
In reference to the mother, whenever the fact of the delivery and the identity of the child are fully proven.
-
1
-
Article 141
With exception of the cases expressed in nos. 1 and 2 of the preceding article, no complaint shall be admitted in court the
purpose of which may be to investigate either directly or indirectly the
paternity of illegitimate children who have not the legal status of natural
children.
-
Article 139
-
Section First
Recognition of Natural Children
-
Chapter First
Legitimate Children
-
Title VI
The Support of Relations
-
Article 142
It is understood by support all that is indispensable for maintenance,
residence, clothing and medical assistance, according to the social standing
of the family.
-
Article 143
The following are obliged to support each other reciprocally to the whole extent specified in the preceding article:
-
1
The consorts.
-
2
Legitimate ascendants and descendants.
-
3
Parents and children legitimated by Royal Concession and the legitimate descendants of the same.
-
4
Parents and the recognized natural children, and the legitimate descendants of such children.
-
Parents and illegitimate children not having the legal condition of natural
children, owe each other, as support, all the help required for their subsistence.
Parents, besides, are bound to bear the expenses of the elementary instruction
of the children and of teaching them a profession, art, or office.
-
Brothers also owe to legitimate brothers, even when only on the mother's
or father's side, the necessary help for living, when by a physical or moral
defect or for any other cause not chargeable to the recipient, he may not
be able to procure his maintenance. In this help is comprised, in proper cases,
the indispensable expenses for paying the elementary instruction and for the
learning of a profession, art, or office.
-
1
-
Article 144
The claim for support, when proper, and two or more are obliged to give it, shall be made in the following order:
-
Article 145
Whenever the obligation of giving support falls on two or more persons, the payment of the pension shall be divided among them
at a rate in proportion to their respective capitals.
-
However, in case of urgent necessity and in special circumstances, the Judge
may oblige only one of them to pay it provisionally, without prejudice to
his right to claim from the other obligated parties the shares that correspond
to them.
-
When two or more persons entitled to it claim support, at the same time, from
the same person legally bound to give it and such person has not sufficient
means to bear the expense of all, the order established in the preceding article
shall be observed, unless the persons claiming the support are the consort and a child
subject to the parental power, in which case, the latter shall be preferred
to the former.
-
-
Article 146
The amount of support, in the cases included in the four classes of art. 143, is to be proportioned to the capital or means of
the person giving it and to the necessities of the recipient.
-
Article 147
Support, in the cases to which the preceding article refers, shall be increased or reduced according to the increase or decrease
suffered by the necessities of the recipient and the fortune of the person
obliged to give it.
-
Article 148
The obligation to give support shall be binding from the moment that the person having right to claim it may require it for his
maintenance, but it shall be paid only from the date of the claim.
-
Article 149
The person obliged to give support may, at his option, satisfy it, either by paying the pension that may be fixed or by receiving
and maintaining in his own home the person having the right to the same.
-
Article 150
The obligation to support ceases with the death of the person obliged to give it, even if he pays it in compliance with a final
sentence.
-
Article 151
The right to support can not be renounced or transferred to a third
party. Neither can it be set off against what the recipient owes to the party
obliged to give it.
-
Article 152
The obligation to give support shall cease:
-
1
By the death of the recipient.
-
2
When the fortune of the person obliged to pay it is reduced to the state where he cannot pay it without disregarding his own necessities and those of his family.
-
3
When the recipient is able to exercise an office, profession or industry or has obtained employment or improved his fortune in such a manner that the pension for support may not be necessary for his maintenance.
-
4
When the recipient, be he a forced heir or not, commits any offence which may cause disinheritance.
-
5
When the recipient is a descendant of the person obliged to give support, and such necessity is caused by bad conduct or by want of attention to work, while such cause exists.
-
1
-
Article 153
The preceding dispositions are applicable to all other cases in which, by this Code, by testament or by stipulation, a right
to support may arise, with the exception of what is stipulated, ordered bi
the testator, or prescribed by law for the special case under consideration.
-
Article 142
-
Title VII
The Parental Power (Patria Potestad)
-
Chapter First
General Provision
-
Article 154
The father, and, in his default, the mother has power over their
legitimate children, not emancipated, and the children are bound to obey
the parents while they remain under such power and always pay them respect
and reverence.
-
Article 154
-
Chapter Second
Effects of Parental Power in Respect to the Persons of the Children
-
Article 155
The father, and, in his default, the mother has, in respect to their children, not emancipated:
-
Article 156
The father, and, in his default, the mother may ask for the help of the gubernative authorities which must be given to them
in support of their own authority over children, not emancipated, either
in the interior of the home or for the detention and even for the retention
of the same in establishments for instruction or in institutions legally
authorized to receive them.
-
They can also claim the interference of the Municipal Judge for imposing
on their children, up to one month of detention in an institution for correctional
purposes; the order of the father or mother with the vise of the judge shall
be sufficient for carrying into effect such detention.
-
The provisions of the two preceding paragraphs include children, either legitimate, legitimated, natural recognized or adopted.
-
-
Article 157
When the father or mother have contracted a second marriage, and the child has been begotten in a former marriage, they shall
be bound to state to the Judge the causes on which they base their decision
to punish him and the Judge shall hear the child in a personal appearance
and decree or deny the detention without any further remedy. The same thing
shall be observed when the child, not emancipated, exercises any charge
or office, even when the parents have not contracted a second marriage.
-
Article 158
The father, and, in his default, the mother shall pay for the maintenance of the detained child but they shall have no intervention
in the conduct of the institution where he is detained; they can only have
him released when they deem it proper.
-
Article 155
-
Chapter Third
Effect of Parental Power in Respect to Property of the Children
-
Article 159
The father, or, in his default, the mother is the legal administrator of the property of the children who are under their power.
-
Article 160
The property which the child, not emancipated,
has acquired, or may acquired by his work or industry or by any lucrative
title belongs to the child in ownership, and in usufruct to the father or
mother who has him in his or her power and company, but if the child with
the consent of the parents lives independently of them , he shall be considered as emancipated for
all effects in respect to said property and shall hold the domain, usufruct,
and administration of it.
-
Article 161
The ownership and usufruct of what the child acquires with the captial of his parents belong to the latter. But should the parents
expressly assign to him the whole or a part of the benefits which he may
obtain, such benefits shall not be chargeable to him as (a part of) the
inheritance.
-
Article 162
The property or rents donated or left by will to the child, not emancipated, for the expense of his education and instruction
belong to him in ownership and usufruct, but the father or the mother shall
have the administration thereof, if no other proviso has been made in the
donation or bequest in which case the will of the donors shall be strictly
complied with.
-
Article 163
The parents have, in respect to the property of the children, the usufruct or administration of which belongs to them, the obligations
of every usufructuary or administrator, and the special obligations established
by section third, title third of the Law of Mortgage.
-
Article 164
The father or the mother, in proper cases, shall not alienate the real property belonging to the child, the usufruct or administration
of which belongs to the parents, nor incumber the same, unless for justified
causes of utility or necessity and with previous authorization of the Judge
of the domicil, upon consultation with the Public Attorney, without prejudice to
the provisions which, in reference to the effects of transmission, are established
by the Law of Mortgage.
-
Article 165
Whenever, in any matter, the father or mother may have an interest in opposition to that of the children, not emancipated,
a next friend (defensor) shall be appointed for the children who is to represent
them in or out of court.
-
The Judge, on petition of the father or the mother or the minor himself,
or the Public Attorney, or of any other person capable of appearing in court,
shall appoint, as the next friend, the relative of the minor to whom the
legitimate guardianship should belong in such cases, and, in default of
the above, to another relative or any other person.
-
-
Article 166
The parents who recognize or adopt do not acquire the usufruct of the property of the children, recognized or adopted, neither
shall they have the administration of such property, unless they give bond
for security of it to the satisfaction of the Judge of the domicile of the
minor or of such persons who must concur in the adoption.
-
Article 159
-
Chapter Fourth
Means of Determining the Parental Power
-
Article 167
Parental Power is determined:
-
Article 168
The mother who contracts a second marriage, loses her parental power over her children, unless her deceased husband, father
of them, should have in his will expressly anticipated that his widow could
remarry and had ordered that, in such a case, she was to keep and exercise
the parental power over his children.
-
Article 169
The father, and, in similar cases, the mother loses the power over the children:
-
Article 170
The parental power is suspended by incapacity or
absence of the father or, in similar cases, of the mother, when such causes
are judicially declared, and also by civil interdiction.
-
Article 171
The court can deprive the parent of the parental
power or suspend the exercise of the same, when they treat their children
with excessive cruelty, or if they give them corrupting orders, advice,
or examples. In these cases they can also deprive the parents, either totally
or partially of the usufruct of the property of the child, or adopt such
measures as they may deem convenient for the interests of the same.
-
Article 172
If the widowed mother, who has remarried becomes
once more a widow, she will recover from that moment her power over all
the children, not emancipated.
-
Article 167
-
Chapter Fifth
Adoption
-
Article 173
Persons who are in the full exercise of their civil rights and over
forty five years of age can adopt. The adopter must be at least fifteen
years older than the adopted.
-
Article 174
Adoption is forbidden:
-
1
To clergmen.
-
2
To those having legitimate or legitimated descendants.
-
3
To the guardian respecting his ward, until his accounts have been finally approved.
-
4
To the consort without the consent of the other consort. Consorts may
adopt conjointly, and, with the exception of this case, nobody can be adopted
by more than one person.
-
1
-
Article 175
The adopted may bear together with the name of his family that of the adopter by so stating it in the deed of adoption.
-
Article 176
The adopter and the adopted owe support to each other. This obligation is understood without injury to the preference right of the recognized natural children and of the ascendants of the adopter to be supported by the same.
-
Article 177
The adopter acquires no right to inherit from the
adopted. Neither does the adopted acquire any right to inherit from the
adopter, unless by will, excepting when the adopter in the deed of adoption
has obliged himself to institute him as an heir. This obligation shall produce
no effect when the adopted dies before the adopter. The adopted retains all the rights belonging to
him in his original (natural) family excepting those referring to the parental
power.
-
Article 178
The adoption shall be made with judicial authorization and it must
necessarily state the consent of the adopted, when of age; when a minor,
that of the persons who must give consent to the minor's marriage, and,
when incapable, that of the guardian. The Public Attorney is to be heard about this matter and the Judge,
after taking the steps he may consider necessary, shall approve the adoption,
if according to law, and he believes it beneficial for the adopted.
-
Article 179
After the adoption is finally approved by the Judge, a deed is to be executed, and in it shall be stated the condition under
which it has been done, and it shall be inscribed in the corresponding Civil
Registry.
-
Article 180
The minor or the incapable, who has be en adopted may contest the adoption within four years next following his majority or
the date from which his incapacity has disappeared.
-
Article 173
-
Chapter First
General Provision
-
Title VIII
Absence
-
Chapter First
Provisional Measures in Case of Absence
-
Article 181
When a person has disappeared from his domicil and his whereabouts
is unknown and he has not left any attorney to manage his property, the
Judge, on petition of a lawful party or the Public Attorney, may appoint some person to represent
him in whatever may be necessary.
-
Article 182
After the appointment referred to in the preceding chapter has been made, the Judge shall take the necessary measures to secure
the rights and interests of the absentee and shall determine the powers,
duties, and remuneration of the appointee, regulating them, according to
circumstances, by the provisions established about guardians.
-
Article 183
The consort who absents himself shall be represented by the one present, whenever they are not legally separated.
-
Article 181
-
Chapter Second
Declaration of Absence
-
Article 184
When two years have elapsed without any news having been received about the absentee, or from the receipt of the last news, and five years, in case the absentee has left a person in charge of the administration of his property, then the absence may be declared.
-
Article 185
The declaration of absence may be demanded by:
-
Article 186
The judicial declaration of absence shall produce no effect until six months after its publication in the official papers.
-
Article 184
-
Chapter Third
Administration of Property of the Absentee
-
Article 187
The administration of the property of the absentee is to be granted, according to the order established in art. 220, to the persons specified therein.
-
Article 188
The wife of the absentee, if of age, can freely dispose of any property belonging to her; but she cannot alienate, barter or mortgage
the husband's own property, neither that of the conjugal society, unless
under judicial authorization.
-
Article 189
When the administration belongs to the children of the absentee and they are minors, a guardian shall be provided for them
who shall take charge of the property with legal formalities.
-
Article 190
The administration shall cease in any of the following cases:
-
Article 187
-
Chapter Fourth
Presumption of the Death of the Absentee
-
Article 191
After thirty years have elapsed from the disappearance of the absentee
or since the last news was received about him, or ninety years from his
birth, the Judge, on petition of an interested party, shall declare the presumption of his death.
-
Article 192
The sentence declaring the presumption of death of an absentee shall not go into effect until after six month, to be counted from its publication in the official papers.
-
Article 193
After the sentence of the presumption of death has been declared final, succession to the estate of the absentee shall be opened and its distribution shall be made with the formalities of testamentary or intestate proceedings, according to the case.
-
Article 194
Should the absentee appear, or, if without appearance, his existence be proven, then he shall recover his property in the condition in which it is found and the value of that sold, or that acquired with such value; but he can claim neither the fruits nor the rents.
-
Article 191
-
Chapter Fifth
Effects of Absence Upon the Eventual Rights of the Absentee
-
Article 195
The person claiming a right belonging to another person, whose existence
is not recognized, is bound to prove that such other person existed at the
time in which his existence was necessary to acquire such right.
-
Article 196
Notwithstanding what is prescribed in the preceding article, when a succession has been opened, and an absentee is called to
it, the share of the absentee shall accrue to his coheirs, unless there
is some person having rights of his own to claim it. - Both the former and
the latter in such cases must make an inventory of said property with the
intervention of the Public Attorney.
-
Article 197
The prescription of the preceding article is to be understood as not impairing the actions of petition of inheritance or other
rights belonging to the absentee, his representatives, and persons holding
rights under him. Such rights shall not be extinguished, except by the lapse
of time fixed for prescription. In the inscription to be made in the Registry
of real property, which may accrue to the co-heirs, it shall be expressly
stated that they are to remain subject to the provisions of this article.
-
Article 198
Those who have taken possession of the estate shall become owners of the fruits received by them in good faith, while the absentee
does not appear and his rights are not claimed by his representatives or
holders of rights under him.
-
Article 195
-
Chapter First
Provisional Measures in Case of Absence
-
Title IX
Guardianship
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Article 199
The object of guardianship is the custody of the person and property
or only the property of those who, not being under parental power , are
incapable of governing themselves.
-
Article 200
The following are subject to guardianship:
-
Article 201
Guardianship shall be exercised by a single guardian under the vigilance
of a protutor (vigilant guardian) and the family council.
-
Article 202
The charges of guardian and protutor can not to be renounced unless for a lawful cause duly shown.
-
Article 203
Municipal Judges of the places in which persons subject to guardianship reside shall provide for their custody and for their personal property until a guardian shall be appointed, when there is no other person charged with these duties under the law.
-
Article 204
Guardianship is conferred:
-
Article 205
The guardian shall not enter upon the discharge of his duties until
his appointment has been inscribed in the Registry of guardianships.
-
Article 199
-
Chapter Second
Testamentary Guardianship
-
Article 206
The father may appoint a guardian and a protutor for his minor children
or for those of age who are incapable, be they legitimate or recognized
as natural or for some of his illegitimate children whom he is obliged to
support, as provided in art. 139.
-
The mother has similar rights, but if she has contracted a second marriage,
the appointment made by her for the children of her first marriage shall
not be effective without the approval of the family council.
-
In any case it shall be necessary that the person appointed guardian m protutor
shall not be subject to the authority of any other person.
-
-
Article 207
A guardian may also be appointed for minors or incapables by the person leaving them an inheritance or an important legacy.
The appointment, however, shall produce no effect until the family council
has decided to accept the inheritance or legacy.
-
Article 208
The father as well as the mother may appoint a guardian for each of their children, and make different appointments in
order that the appointees may be substituted one for another.
-
Article 209
If different persons should have appointed a guardian for the same minor, the charge shall devolve upon:
-
Article 210
When the guardian is in the discharge of his duties and the one appointed by the father appears, the guardianship is to be immediately
transferred to the latter. If the guardian who appears is the one appointed
by a stranger, specified in nos. 2 and 3 of the preceding article, he will
limit himself to the administration of the property, which belonged to the
person who appointed him, until the incumbent guardian vacates.
-
Article 206
-
Chapter Third
Legitimate Guardianship
-
Section First
Guardianship of Minors
-
Article 211
Legitimate guardianship of minors, not emancipated, belongs solely:
-
1
To the paternal grandfather.
-
2
To the maternal and grandfather.
-
3
To the paternal and maternal grandmothers, in the same order, while they remain in widowhood.
-
4
To the eldest of the male brothers of full blood, and, in default of them, to the eldest of the brothers on the paternal or maternal side.
-
1
-
Article 212
Heads of foundling institutions are the guardians of those kept and educated therein. The representation in court of such officials as guardians shall be assumed by the Public Attorney.
-
Article 211
-
Section Second
Guardianship of the Insane and the Deaf and Dumb
-
Article 213
No guardians (curators) shall be appointed for insane, demented, and deaf and dumb persons, when of age, without a previous declaration having been made that they are incapable of managing their property.
-
Article 214
This declaration may be asked for by the consort and the relatives of the person presumed to be incapable who may have
rights to succeed him, in case of intestacy.
-
Article 215
The Public Attorney must demand it:
-
1
When the person is a raving maniac.
-
2
When none of the persons mentioned in the preceding article are in
existence, or when they do not make any use of the rights granted to them
by it.
-
3
When the consort and the heirs of the person presumed to be incapable are minors or have not the personality required to appear in court.
-
1
-
Article 216
The courts before declaring the incapacity shall hear the family council and shall personally examine the persons denounced
as incapable.
-
Article 217
The relatives who have solicited the declaration of incapacity shall not be able to give information to the court as members
of the family council, but they have the right to be heard by the council
when they demand it.
-
Article 218
The declaration of incapacity shall be made summarily. That which refers to the deaf and dumb shall fix the extent and limits of the guardianship, according to their degree of incapacity.
-
Article 219
Against the decrees, determining the proceedings for incapacity, the interested parties may interpose a suit in the ordinary
form. The next friend of the incapable shall, however, require for it
special authorization from the family council.
-
Article 220
Guardianship of the insane and the deaf and dumb belongs:
-
Article 213
-
Section Third
Guardianship of Prodigals (Spendthrifts)
-
Article 221
The declaration of prodigality must be made in a contradictory suit.
-
Article 222
The declaration, to which the preceding article refers, can be demanded only by the consort, and the forced heirs of the
prodigal, and exceptionally by the Public Attorney, either by himself
or on petition of some relative of the former, when they are minors or
incapables.
-
Article 223
When the defendant does not appear at the trial, he shall be represented by the Public Attorney, and, if the latter be a party
thereto, by a next friend (curator) appointed by the court, without impairing
what the Law of Civil Procedure prescribes in proceedings in contempt.
-
Article 224
The declaration of prodigality does not deprive the prodigal of the marital and parental power, nor does it give to the guardian
any power over the person of the prodigal.
-
Article 225
The guardian shall administer the property of the children whom a prodigal may have had from a previous marriage.
-
Article 226
The acts of a prodigal, previous to the petition for interdiction, cannot be contested on account of prodigality.
-
Article 227
The guardianship of the prodigal belongs:
-
Article 221
-
Section Fourth
Guardianship To Persons Suffering Interdiction
-
Article 228
When the sentence, in which the penalty of interdiction is interposed,
has become final, the Public Attorney shall demand that arts. 203 and 293 shall be complied with. If he fails
to do it, he shall be liable for the damages and injuries caused thereby.
-
Article 229
Such guardianship shall be limited to the administration of the
property and to the representation in court of the interdicted person.
-
The guardian (curator) of the interdicted person shall be obliged, furthermore,
to care for the person and property of the minors or the incapables, who
are under the power of the person subject to interdiction, until another
guardian is provided for them.
-
The wife of the interdicted person shall have parental power over their common children while the interdiction lasts.
-
If she is a minor she shall act under the direction of her father and,
in his default that of her mother, and in default of both, that of her
guardian.
-
-
Article 230
The guardianship of those suffering interdiction is granted in accordance with the order established in art. 220.
-
Article 228
-
Section First
Guardianship of Minors
-
Chapter Fourth
Guardianship by Appointment
-
Article 231
When there are neither testamentary guardian, nor persons called by law to the exercise of a vacant guardianship, it is the duty of the family council to elect the guardian in all the cases mentioned in art 200.
-
Article 232
A municipal judge, who may neglect calling a family council in any
case in which a guardian ought to be provided for minors or incapables, shall be liable for the damage or injury
caused by his negligence.
-
Article 231
-
Chapter Fifth
Protutors (Vigilant Guardians)
-
Article 233
The family council is entitled to appoint a protutor when he has not been appointed by those who have a right to elect a guardian for minors.
-
Article 234
The guardian can not begin to exercise guardianship, until a protutor has been appointed. If he fails to apply for this appointment,
he shall be removed from the guardianship and shall be liable for the damages
suffered by the minor.
-
Article 235
The appointment of a protutor shall not be given to a relative of the same line as the guardian.
-
Article 236
The protutor is obliged:
-
1
To supervise the inventory of the property of the minor and the constitution of the bond of the guardian, when it must be given.
-
2
To maintain the rights of the minor in and out of court whenever they are opposed to the interests of the guardian.
-
3
To call the attention of the family council to the management of the guardian, whenever he may consider it injurious to the person or interests of the minor.
-
4
To promote the meeting of the family council for the appointment of a new guardian when the guardianship may become vacant or abandoned.
-
5
To discharge all further duties provided by law.
-
1
-
Article 233
-
Chapter Sixth
Persons Unable to be Guardians and Protutors, and the Removal of the Same
-
Article 237
The following cannot be guardians or protutors:
-
1
Persons subject to guardianship.
-
2
Those who have been punished for the crimes of robbery, theft, fraud, forgery, corruption of minors, or public scandal.
-
3
Those condemned to any corporal punishment, until the sentence expires.
-
4
Those who have been legally removed from a former guardianship.
-
5
Persons of bad conduct, or having no visible means of support.
-
6
Bankrupts and insolvents, not discharged.
-
7
Women, with the exception of the cases in which they are expressly called by law.
-
8
Those who, at the time of taking charge of the guardianship, have a law suit pending with the minor in regard to his civil status.
-
9
Those in litigation with the minor in regard to the ownership of his property, unless the father and, in his default, the mother, being aware of it, have disposed otherwise.
-
10
Those indebted to the minor in large sums, unless they have been appointed by the father and, in his default, by the mother with knowledge of the debt.
-
11
The relatives mentioned in the second paragraph of art. 293, and the testamentary guardian when they have not complied with the duties imposed on them by said article.
-
12
Professed members of monastic orders.
-
13
Foreigners not residing in Spain.
-
1
-
Article 238
The following shall be removed from guardianship:
-
1
Those, who after having qualified, come under one of the classes of incapacity mentioned in nos. I, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 12, and 13, of the preceding article.
-
2
Those who have assumed the administration of the guardianship without
having the family council convened nor having asked for the appointment
of a protutor or without having given bonds, in cases in which they are
required to give them, and having omitted to inscribe the mortgage bond.
-
3
Those who have not made the inventory within the term and in the manner prescribed by law or have not made it faithfully.
-
4
Those who have not behaved properly in the discharge of the guardianship.
-
1
-
Article 239
The family council shall not declare the incapacity of guardians and protutors or resolve upon their removal,without summoning
and hearing them if they appear.
-
Article 240
After the incapacity has been declared or the removal has been agreed on by the family council, such decision shall be
considered final and the vacant guardianship shall be filled, if the guardian
does not present his claims before the court within fifteen days next following
the day on which the resolution has been communicated to him.
-
Article 241
When the guardian institutes a judicial contention, the council shall litigate it, at the expense of the minor; but the members thereof may be personally condemned to pay the costs, if they have acted with notorious malice.
-
Article 242
When the resolution of the family council is favorable to the guardian, and has been unanimously adopted, there shall be no remedy against it.
-
Article 243
If by causes of incapacity, the guardian does not enter upon the discharge of his duties, the family council shall attend
to the duties of the guardianship, until a final resolution is agreed upon
about the impediment.
-
When the guardian has already entered upon the discharge of his duties and
the family council has declared his incapacity and resolved to remove him,
the decision which they may take to provided for the care of the guardianship,
in case a law suit should be instituted, shall not be executed without a previous judicial approval.
-
-
Article 237
-
Chapter Seventh
Excuses For Not Accepting Guardianship and Protutorship
-
Article 244
The following may be excused from guardianship and protutorship.
-
1
Ministers of the crown.
-
2
Presidents of the Co- legislative Houses, of the Council of State, of
the Supreme Court, of the Supreme Council of War and Navy, and of the Court
of Accounts of the Kingdom.
-
3
Archbishops and bishops.
-
4
Magistrates, Judges and officials of the Public Attorney's office.
-
5
Those who exercise authority immediately depending on the government.
-
6
Those in active military service.
-
7
Clergymen with curate charges.
-
8
Those having under their power five legitimate children.
-
9
Those that are so poor that they cannot attend to the guardianship without impairing their livelihood.
-
10
Those who in consequence of continuous ill health or because of inability to read or write cannot well fulfill the duties of the charge.
-
11
Persons over sixty years of age.
-
12
Those who are already guardians or protutors of another person.
-
1
-
Article 245
Persons, not relatives of the minor or incapable, are not bound to accept the guardianship, if, within the territory of the court appointing the guardian, there are relatives within the sixth degree who may fulfill the charge.
-
Article 246
The person excused, on petition of the guardian or protutor, may be compelled to accept the guardianship as soon as the cause
of the exemption has ceased.
-
Article 247
An excuse, which has not been alleged before the family council in meeting held for the purpose of deciding upon the guardianship,
shall not be acceptable.
-
Article 248
If the causes of exemption are subsequent to the acceptance of the guardianship, the term for alleging them shall begin to
be counted from the day on which the guardian may have become aware of the
same.
-
Article 249
The resolution on which the family council rejects the excuse may be contested before the court within the term of fifteen days.
-
Article 250
During the suit on account of excuses, the one presenting them shall be bound to exercise the guardianship. If he does
not do so, the family council shall appoint some person to substitute him,
and the substituted shall be liable for the action of the former in case
the excuses are not sustained.
-
Article 251
The testamentary guardian who may excuse himself from the guardianship shall lose whatever may have been left to him by the
person who voluntarily appointed him.
-
Article 244
-
Chapter Eight
Bonds of Guardians
-
Article 252
The guardian before he assumes the guardianship shall give bond
as security for the performance of his duties.
-
Article 253
The bond must be secured either by mortgage or by pledge.
-
Article 254
The bond shall secure:
-
Article 255
The guardian may have recourse to the courts against any resolution of the family council fixing the amount or qualifying the bond, but he shall not enter upon the discharge of his duties without having given the bond required.
-
Article 256
Whilst the bond is being executed the protutor shall perform the acts of administration which the family council may consider indispensable for the safe keeping of the property and the collection of its proceeds.
-
Article 257
The mortgage bond shall be inscribed in the Registry of Property.
The pledge bond shall be made by the deposit of effects or values in one of the public institutions authorized for this purpose.
-
Article 258
The inscription or deposit shall be demanded:
-
Article 259
The bond maybe increased or reduced, during the exercise of the guardianship, according to the changes which may occur in
the capital of the minor or the incapable and in the values upon which the
bond is based.
-
Article 260
The following are exempted from giving bond for guardianship:
-
1
The father, the mother, and the grandparents, when called upon to be
the guardian of their descendants.
-
2
The testamentary guardian, released by the father or, in his default,
by the mother from such duty. This exception shall cease, when, subsequently
to his appointment, causes unknown to the testator may arise which render
the bond indispensable in the judgment of the family council.
-
3
The guardian, appointed without bonds, by strangers who may have instituted
the minor or incapable as his heir or left him a legacy for a large amount.
In this case the exemption shall be limited to the property or rents of
which the inheritance or legacy consists.
-
1
-
Article 252
-
Chapter Ninth
Exercise of the Guardianship
-
Article 261
The family council shall place the guardian and the protutor in possession.
-
Article 262
The guardian represents the minor or incapable in
all civil acts with the exception of those which the latter can execute
by himself alone by express provision of law.
-
Article 263
Minors and incapables, subject to guardianship, owe respect and obedience to the guardian. He may punish them moderately.
-
Article 264
The guardian is obliged:
-
1
To maintain and educate the minor or incapable in accordance with his
condition and in strict subjection to the dispositions of his parents or,
in default of these, with those adopted by the family council.
-
2
To endeavor that the insane, demented, or deaf or dumb may acquire or
recover their capacity, by whatever means their capital may furnish.
-
3
To make an inventory of the property which the guardianship may cover within the terms fixed for this purpose by the family council.
-
4
To administer the estate of the minor or incapable with all the diligence of a good father of a family.
-
5
To ask in due time the authorization of the family council for everything that he may not do without such authorization.
-
6
To solicit the intervention of the protutor in all the cases which the law may deem it necessary.
-
1
-
Article 265
The inventory shall be made with the intervention of the protutor and with the assistant ; of two witnesses chosen by the
family council. The council shall decide, considering the importance of
the capital, if the inventory is, in addition, to be authorized by a Notary.
-
Article 266
The jewelry, valuable furniture, publict effects, and merchantile and industrial values, which in the judgement of the family council are not to remain in possession of the guardian, shall be
deposited in an institution established for this purpose.
-
Article 267
The guardian, who having been summoned for this purpose through a Notary by the protutor or by the witnesses, should not
enter in the inventory the credits he holds against the minor, shall be
understood as renouncing them.
-
Article 268
When the will of the person who made the appointment of the guardian provides nothing about the alimentary pension to be allotted
to the minor or incapable, the family council, after inspecting the inventory,
shall decide the part of the rents or proceeds which shall be allotted for
such purpose.
-
Article 269
The guardian requires to be authorized by the family council:
-
1
To impose on the minor the punishment referred to in no. 2, art. 155, and in art. 156.
-
2
To give to the minor a profession or particular avocation when that has not been decided by the parents, and to modify any disposition that they had made in this respect.
-
3
To place the incapable in a sanitarium, unless the guardianship is exercised by the father, mother or a son.
-
4
To follow the commercial or industrial calling to which the incapable, or his ascendants or the ascendants of the minor had pursued.
-
5
To alienate or encumber any property constituting the capital of the minor or incapable or to make contracts or act subject to inscription.
-
6
To invest any balance of money remaining each year, after meeting the obligations of the guardianship.
-
7
To cause the distribution of the inheritance or of any other thing which the minor or incapable may hold in common.
-
8
To withdrawn from investment any sums producing interest.
-
9
To loan and borrow money.
-
10
To accept without the benefit inventory any inheritance or to repudiate such inheritance or donations.
-
11
To incur extraordinary expenses in connection with tenements, the administration of which is included under the guardianship.
-
12
To compromise and submit to arbitration the questions in which the minor or incapable may be interested.
-
13
To institute suits in the name of persons subject to guardianship, and to maintain the remedies of appeal and nullity (casacion) against the sentences in which they may have been condemned. Demands or remedies in verbal suits are excepted.
-
1
-
Article 270
The family council cannot empower the guardian to sell or encumber the property of the minor or incapable, unless it be
for causes of necessity or utility which the guardian has to duly prove.
-
Article 271
The family council before granting authorization to encumber real property or constitute real rights in favor of third persons,
may previously hear the opinion of experts about the conditions of the encumbrances
and possibilities of bettering them.
-
Article 272
In respect to real property, rights to be inscribed, jewelry or furniture, the value of which is over 4000 pesetas, any sale
thereof is to be made at public auction with the intervention of the guardian
or protutor.
-
Article 273
The guardian is liable for the legal interest on the capital of the minor, when by his omission or negligence, it shall remain
unproductive or without investment.
-
Article 274
The authorization to settle or compromise through arbitrators shall be requested in writing and therein the guardian shall
explain all the conditions and advantages of the settlement.
-
Article 275
Guardians are forbidden:
-
1
To donate or renounce things or rights belonging to minors or incapables. The donations made on account of marriage by minors, with the approval of the persons who are to give their consent to the marriage, shall be valid, provided they do not exceed the limits fixed by law.
-
2
To collect from the debtor of the minor or incapable, without the intervention of the protutor, sums over 5,000 pesetas, unless they are interests, rents, or fruits.
-
3
To pay themselves, without the intervention of the protutor, any sums due them.
-
4
To buy himself, or through another person, the property of the minor or incapable, unless he has been expressly authorized to do so by the family council."
-
1
-
Article 276
The guardian is entitled to compensation from the property of the minor or incapable:
-
When it has not been fixed by those who appointed the testamentary guardian;
or when the guardians are legitimate or appointed by court, the family council
shall fix it, taking in consideration the importance of the estate and the
work to be undertaken in its administration.
-
In no case shall the compensation be less than 4% nor more than 10% of the
net rents or proceeds of the estate.
-
The guardian may ask a remedy from the courts against the resolution fixing
his compensation.
-
-
Article 277
Should the family council maintain its resolution, the council shall then litigate at the expense of the minor or incapable.
-
Article 278
The guardianship is determined:
-
Article 261
-
Chapter Tenth
Accounts of the Guardianship
-
Article 279
Collateral relatives of the minor or incapable, and strangers, who have not obtained the charge of guardian, with the assignment
of proceeds for support, shall render to the family council yearly accounts
of their administration.
-
The accounts, after being examined by the protutor and audited by the council,
shall be deposited with the clerk of the court where the guardianship has
been registered.
-
In case the guardian does not agree to the resolution of the council, he
may apply to the courts before which the interests of the minor or incapable
shall be defended by the protutor.
-
-
Article 280
The guardian, who may be replaced by another, as well as his heirs, shall be obliged to render a general account of his guardianship
to the one taking his place; such account shall be examined and audited
in the form prescribed in the preceding article. The new guardian shall
be liable for the damages and injuries to the minor, if he does not claim
and examine the accounts of his predecessor.
-
Article 281
When the guardianship terminates, the guardian or his heirs are obliged to render account of his administration to the person
who has been under his guardianship or to his representatives or those holding
rights under him.
-
Article 282
The general accounts of the guardianship shall be audited and reported upon by the family council within a term not exceeding six months, (after the receipt of the same).
-
Article 283
The accounts are to be accompanied by their vouchers. The only expenses
which need not be vouched for are the petty expenses for which a diligent father of a family does not generally
ask a receipt.
-
Article 284
The expenses of rendering the accounts shall be borne by the minor or incapable.
-
Article 285
Until fifteen days after the rendering of the accounts with the
vouchers, the persons holding rights under the minor or the minor himself,
if of age, cannot enter into any agreement with the guardian which may have
relation to the administration of the guardianship.
-
Article 286
The balance shown by the general account, either in favor of or against the guardian, shall bear legal interest. In the first
case, from the time the minor is asked for the payment of the balance, after
the delivery of his property.
-
Article 287
The actions, reciprocally belonging to the guardian and the minor on account of the exercise of the guardianship, are extinguished
five years after the termination of the same.
-
Article 279
-
Chapter Eleventh
Registration of Guardianship
-
Article 288
There shall be in the courts of the First Instance one or several books in which entries shall be made of the guardianships,
constituted within the year, within their respective territories.
-
Article 289
These books shall be in the custody of a judicial clerk who shall make the entries free of cost.
-
Article 290
The registration of each guardianship shall contain:
-
1
The name, family name, age, and domicil of the minor or incapable, and
the extent and limit of the guardianship, when the incapacity has been judicially
declared.
-
2
The name, family name, profession, and domicil of the guardian, and the
statement of whether he is a testamentary or legitimate guardian or is appointed
by court.
-
3
The date on which the guardianship has been conferred, and the day on
which the bond, required from the guardian, has been constituted, stating,
in such cases, the kind of property on which it has been based.
-
4
The alimentary pension which has been assigned to the minor or incapable or the declaration of the compensation of proceeds for support.
-
1
-
Article 291
At the foot of each inscription, at the beginning of the judicial year, it shall be recorded whether the guardian has rendered
an account of his administration, if he is obliged to do so.
-
Article 292
The judges shall examine every year such registries and shall take the necessary steps in each case to defend the interests
of the person subject to guardianship.
-
Article 288
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Title X
The Family Council
-
Section First
Manner of Constituting
-
Article 293
If the Public Attorney or Municipal Judge should become informed that in the territory within their jurisdiction are
found any of the persons to which art. 200 refers, the first shall ask,
and the second shall order of his own motion, or upon the petition of the
Public Attorney, as the case may be, the constitution of a family council.
-
The following persons are obliged to notify the Municipal Judge of any fact
which give cause for a guardianship, as soon as they have knowledge of it:
the testamentary guardian, the relatives who are called to the legitimate
guardianship, and those that, according to law, are members of the council; and they are liable, should they not do so, to an indemnity for damages
and injuries (caused thereby).
-
The Municipal Judge shall summon the persons who should compose the family
council, stating to them the object of the meeting, and the day, hour, and
place in which it shall be held.
-
-
Article 294
The family council shall be composed of the persons whom the father, or, in proper cases, the mother may have appointed in the
testament, and, in default of them, of the male ascendants and descendants,
and the brothers and husbands of the living sisters of the minor or incapable,
whatever their number may be. If they are less than five, this number shall
be completed with the nearest male relatives of both the paternal and maternal
lines, and, in the event that they do not exist or that they are not bound
to form part of the council, the Municipal Judge shall appoint, instead,
honest persons, preferring the friends of the parents of the miner or incapable.
-
If there be no ascendants, descendants, brothers or husbands of living sisters,
the Municipal Judge shall constitute the council with the five nearest male
relatives of the minor or incapable, and, when there are no relatives in
part or at all, he will substitute them with honest persons, preferring always the friends of the
parents.
-
-
Article 295
In equal degrees, preference shall be given to the eldest relatives in forming the family council.
-
Article 296
The courts may remedy the nullity which may be caused by the non-observance of the preceding articles, if not due to fraud
nor causing damage to the person or property of the person subject to guardianship,
but taking care to amend the error committed in the formation of the council.
-
Article 297
The relatives of the minor or incapable, called by law, who do not reside within 30 kilometres of the court having jurisdiction
over the guardianship, shall not be obliged to form a part of the council
but they may be members of the council, if they willingly accept the charge,
for which purpose they shall be summoned by the Municipal Judge.
-
Article 298
The causes which excuse, disable, and give reason for the removal of guardians and protutors apply to the members of the family
council. Neither can persons excluded from this charge by the father or,
in his default, by the mother in their wills, be members of it.
-
Article 299
The guardian and protutor shall not be, at the same time, members of the family council.
-
Article 300
The meeting for the formation of the family council shall be presided over by the Municipal Judge. The parties summoned are
obliged to appear in person or by a special attorney who shall never represent
more than one person. If they do not appear, the Judge may impose on them
a fine not exceeding 50 pesetas.
-
Article 301
After the family council has been constituted by the Municipal Judge, it shall proceed to prescribe all the measures required
for the custody of the person and property of the minor or incapable and
to constitute the guardianship.
-
Article 302
The family council for natural children shall be constituted, under the same rules as that for legitimate children but members
thereof shall be appointed from the relatives of the father or mother who
have recognized them.
-
Article 303
The administration of every Institute of Beneficence shall have over the orphans, under its care, all the faculties belonging
to the guardian and to the family council.
-
Article 293
-
Section Second
Manner of Proceeding of the Family Council
-
Article 304
The member elected by the other members shall be president of the council:
-
To the president belongs:
-
1
To convoke the council, whenever he thinks it convenient or on petition
of the members, of the guardian, or of the protutor, and to preside over
its deliberations.
-
2
To draw up and to state the basis of the resolutions, giving therein
the opinion of each of the members who shall authorize the minutes by signing
the same.
-
3
To execute the resolutions.
-
1
-
-
Article 305
The family council shall not adopt resolutions about matters submitted to it, unless, at least, three members are present.
-
Article 306
The members of the family council are obliged to attend the meetings of the same for which they may be summoned. Should they
not attend, nor present any lawful excuse, the president of the council
shall give notice to the Municipal Judge who may impose on them a fine not
exceeding 50 pesetas.
-
Article 307
No member of the family council shall attend its meetings nor vote when it has to deal with a matter in which he, his ascendants,
descendants, or consort has any interest, but he may be heard, if the council
deems it proper.
-
Article 308
The guardian and the protutor are bound to attend the meetings of the family council, whenever convoked, but have no vote.
They may also attend whenever the council meets on their petition.
-
Article 309
The family council shall take cognizance of the affairs for which they are competent, in accordance with the provisions
of this Code.
-
Article 310
The members, who have dissented from the majority in voting on any resolution, may appeal to the Judge of the First Instance, as also may the guardian or protutor or any relative of the minor or other
party interested in the decision, with the exception of the case in art. 242.
-
Article 311
On the determination of the guardianship, and the consequent dissolution of the family council, the latter shall deliver the minutes of its sessions to the person who has been subject to guardianship or to the person who represents his rights.
-
Article 312
The members of the family council are liable for the damages which the person subject to guardianship may suffer on account of
their malice or culpable neglect.
-
Article 313
The family council shall be dissolved in the same cases in which the guardianship is extinguished.
-
Article 304
-
Section First
Manner of Constituting
-
Title XI
Emancipation and Majority
-
Chapter First
Emancipation
-
Article 314
Emancipation takes place:
-
Article 315
Marriage produces lawful emancipation with the limitations contained in art. 59 and in rule third of art. 50.
-
Article 316
Emancipation, referred to in no. 3 of art. 314, shall be granted by public deed or by appearance before the Municipal Judge which appearance is to be inscribed in the Civil Registry and, meanwhile, shall not produce any effect against third parties.
-
Article 317
Emancipation enables the minor to control his person and property, as if of age, but, until he attains his majority, he cannot
borrow money on loan, neither encumber nor sell real property without the
consent of the father, and, in his default, of the mother, and, in default
of both, without that of a guardian. Neither can he appear in court without
the assistance of said persons.
-
Article 318
In order that emancipation may take place by concession of the father or mother, it is required that the minor be over eighteen years of age and consent to it.
-
Article 319
Emancipation once granted cannot be revoked.
-
Article 314
-
Chapter Second
Majority
-
Article 320
Majority commences after attaining twenty three years of age. A person of age is qualified for all acts of civil life, with the exceptions established by this Code in special cases.
-
Article 321
Notwithstanding what is prescribed in the preceding article, unmarried daughters of age, but under twenty-five years, cannot
leave the parental home without permission of the father or mother in whose
company they live, unless on account of marriage or when the father or mother
have contracted another marriage.
-
Article 322
The minor, orphan of both parents, may obtain the benefit of majority by the consent of the family council, approved by the
President of the territorial Audiencia of the district, after the Public
Attorney has been heard.
-
Article 323
For (granting) the concession and approval stated in the preceding article, it is required:
-
Article 324
The provisions of art 317 apply to the minor who has obtained authorization of majority.
-
Article 320
-
Chapter First
Emancipation
-
Title XII
Registry of Civil Status
-
Article 325
Acts, relating to the civil status of persons, shall be inscribed in the registry designated for such purpose.
-
Article 326
The registry of civil status shall contain the inscriptions or entries of births , marriages , emancipations, recognitions,
and legitimations, deaths, naturalizations, and residences (vecindad) and
shall be under the charge of municipal judges or other officials of the civil
order in Spain, and, in foreign countries, of consular or diplomatic agents.
-
Article 327
The minutes of the registry shall be evidence of the civil status and any other evidence can be admitted only when such minutes
have never existed or the books of registry have disappeared or when a contention
arises in court.
-
Article 328
It is not necessary that a newly born child should be presented to the official in charge of the registry for inscription of
birth; the declaration of the person obliged to make it shall be sufficient.
-
Article 329
In canonical marriages, it shall be the duty of the contracting parties to furnish to the official representing the State, who
attends the celebration, all the data required for its inscription in the
Civil Registry.
-
Article 330
Naturalization shall have no legal effects, until it is inscribed in the Registry, whatever the evidence proving it and the date on which it has been granted may be.
-
Article 331
Municipal Judges and those of the First Instance, in proper cases, may punish the infractions of the provisions about the Civil Registry with a fine of 20 to 100 pesetas, when they do not constitute a crime or a misdemeanor.
-
Article 332
The law of June 17, 1870, shall continue in force in so far as it is not modified by the preceding articles.
-
Article 325
-
Title I
Spaniards and Foreigners
-
Book Second
Property, Ownership, and Its Modification
-
Title I
Classification of Property
-
Preliminary Provision
-
Article 333
All things which are or may be an object of appropriation are considered, either as personal or real property.
-
Article 333
-
Chapter First
Real Property
-
Article 334
Real property consists of:
-
1
Lands, buildings, roads, and constructions of every kind adherent to the soil.
-
2
Trees, and plants, and ungathered fruits, while they are not separated from the land and form an integral part of the real property.
-
3
All that is attached to real property, in a fixed manner, in such a way that it cannot be separated from it without breaking the matter or causing injury to the object.
-
4
Statues, reliefs, paintings or other objects of use or ornament placed in a building and on lands or tenements by the owner of the same in such a manner as to reveal the intent of attaching them in a permanent way to the tenement.
-
5
Machinery, vessels, instruments, or implements,
intended by the owner of the tenement for the industry or works that he
may carry on in a building or tenement and which directly tend to meet the
necessities of the same industry or works.
-
6
Vivaries for animals, pigeon-houses, beehives, fish-ponds or beds for
similar purposes, when the owner has placed or kept them with the intent
of maintaining the same attached to the tenement and forming a permanent
part thereof.
-
7
Manures intended for the cultivation of lands when they are on the place where they are to be employed.
-
8
Mines, quarries, and slag lands, while the matter forms part of the beds, and waters, either running or stagnant.
-
9
Docks, and constructions, which, though floating, are intended by their purposes and conditions to remain at a fixed place in a river, lake or on a coast.
-
10
Administrative concessions for public works, and easements, and other real rights attached to real property.
-
1
-
Article 334
-
Chapter Second
Personal Property
-
Article 335
Personal property is considered anything susceptible of appropriation
and not contained in the preceding chapter, and, in general, any thing which
can be carried from place to place without impairing the real property to
which it may be attached.
-
Article 336
As personal property are also considered; rents or pensions, either for life or hereditary, in favor of a person or family,
provided they do not encumber real property with a real charge, also purchased
public offices, contracts for public services, and bonds and certificates
representing mortgage loans.
-
Article 337
Personal property is either consumable (fungibles) or non-consumable (no fungibles).
-
Article 335
-
Chapter Third
Property in Respect to Ownership
-
Article 338
Things pertain to public domain or to private ownership.
-
Article 339
To public domain belong:
-
1
Those intended for public use, as roads, canals, rivers, torrents, ports,
and bridges, constructed by the State, and banks, shores, road steads, and
others of a similar character.
-
2
Those belonging exclusively to the State, not for common use, and which
are designed for some public service, or the development of the national
wealth, as walls, fortresses, and other works for the defence of the territory,
and mines, whilst their concession has not yet been granted.
-
1
-
Article 340
All other property belonging to the State which has not the conditions, stated in the preceding article, is considered as private
property.
-
Article 341
Property of the public domain, when it is no longer dedicated to general uses or to the necessities of the defence of the territory,
shall become a part of the property of the State.
-
Article 342
Property of the Royal Patrimony is governed by its special law, and in all matters, not prescribed there in for it, by the
general provisions established by this Code about private property.
-
Article 343
The property of provinces and of towns is divided into property of public use and patrimonial property.
-
Article 344
Property for public use in provinces, and towns, comprises the provincial and town roads, the squares, streets, fountains,
and public waters, the walks, and public works for general service, paid
for by the same towns or provinces.
-
Article 345
Besides the patrimonial property of the State, of the provinces, and of the towns, cohich belonging to private parties, either individually or collectively, is property of private ownership.
-
Article 338
-
Provisions Common to the Three Preceding Chapters
-
Article 346
Whenever by provision of the laws or by an individual declaration,
the expression "real things or real property" is used, or "personal things
or personal property" it shall be understood as comprised in them, respectively,
those enumerated in chapter first and in chapter second.
-
Whenever the word personal (muebles), alone, is used, then, it shall not
be understood as including: money, credits, commercial effects, values,
jewels, scientific or artistic collections, books, medals, arms, clothing,
riding beasts, or carriages and their harnesses, breadstuffs, liquids (caldos)
and merchandise or other tings, the principal employment of which is to furnish or ornament rooms,
with the exception of the cases in which, by the contexture of the law or
of the individual disposition, the contrary clearly appears.
-
-
Article 347
Whenever, in a sale, legacy or donation or any other disposition in which reference is made to personal or real things, their possession or ownership is transferred with every thing they may contain, there shall not be understood as comprised in the transfer; money values, credits, and actions, the titles to which are contained in the thing transferred, unless the intention is clearly shown of including such values and rights in the transfer.
-
Article 346
-
Preliminary Provision
-
Title II
Ownership
-
Chapter First
Ownership in General
-
Article 348
Ownership is the right to enjoy and dispose of a thing, without
further limitations than those established by the laws.
-
Article 349
No one shall be deprived of his property, unless it be by competent authority and with justified cause for public utility, and
never until he has previously been properly indemnified.
-
Article 350
The owner of a parcel of ground is owner of its surface and everything
under it, and he can make thereon any works, plantations, and excavations
which may be convenient for him, without injury to the easements and subject
to what is prescribed by the laws about mines and waters and by Police Regulations.
-
Article 351
Hidden treasures belong to the owner of the land on which they are found.
-
However, when the discovery is made on property belonging to a stranger
or to the State and by chance, one half of it shall be adjudged to the finder.
-
If the thing discovered is of interest to the sciences or arts, the State
can acquire it at its just value which shall be distributed in accordance
with what has been prescribed.
-
-
Article 352
By treasure is understood, in its legal effects, hidden or unknown deposits of money, jewelry, or other precious objects, the lawful ownership of which is not proven.
-
Article 348
-
Chapter Second
Right of Accession
-
General Provision
-
Article 353
Ownership of property gives a right by accession to everything which is produced by it or which is either naturally or artificially united to or incorporated with it.
-
Article 353
-
Section First
Right of Accession in Respect to What is Produced by Property
-
Article 354
To the owner belong:
-
Article 355
Naturally fruits are the spontaneous products of the soil, and the brood, and all other produce of animals.
-
Article 356
The receiver of fruits is obliged to pay the expenses incurred by a third party in their production, gathering, and preservation.
-
Article 357
Only those which are in sight or appearing are considered as natural or industrial fruits.
-
Article 354
-
Section Second
Right of Accession in Respect to Real Property
-
Article 358
Whatever is built, planted or sown on another's land, and the
improvements or repairs made on it belong to the owner of the land, subject to what is prescribed in the
following articles.
-
Article 359
All works, sown grounds, and plantings are presumed to be made
by the owner, and, at his expense, unless the contrary is proven.
-
Article 360
The owner of the land who shall make on it, by himself or through another person, plantings, constructions or works,
with material belonging to another person, is bound to pay for their value;
and should he have acted in bad faith, he shall also be obliged to indemnify
said person for damages and injuries caused thereby. The owner of the
materials shall have a right to remove them, only in case he can do it
without injury to the work constructed, and, when by doing it, the plantings,
constructions, and work done, shall not be destroyed.
-
Article 361
The owner of the land on which somebody has built, sown, or planted, in good faith, is entitled to appropriate, as his own,
the work, sowing or planting by previously paying the indemnity specified
in arts. 453 and 454 or to oblige the person who has built or planted
the same to pay to him the value of the land and to oblige him, who sowed,
to pay the corresponding rents.
-
Article 362
He, who builds, plants, or sows, in bad faith, on another's land, loses what he has built, planted, or sown without right to any indemnity.
-
Article 363
The owner of the land on which any one has built, planted, or sown, in bad faith, may exact the demolition of the work or
the removal of the planting or sowing, and the replacing of everything
in its former condition, at the expense of him who built, planted or sowed.
-
Article 364
When there has been bad faith, not only on the part of him who built, sowed or planted on another's land, but also on the
part of the owner of such land, the right of both shall be the same as
though both had acted in good faith.
-
Article 365
If the materials, plants or seed belong to a third party, who has not acted in bad faith, the owner of the land shall be
liable subsidiarily for their value, but only in the event that the person
who used them has no means to pay for the same.
-
Article 366
The augmentation which the banks of a river gradually receive from the effects of currents of waters, belongs to the
owner of the land adjacent to such banks.
-
Article 367
The owners of tenements, adjacent to ponds or lakes, do not acquire the land left dry by the natural decrease of waters,
nor lose those inundated by them in extraordinary floods.
-
Article 368
When the current of a river, rivulet or torrent cuts off from the tenement on its bank a known portion of land and transfers
it to another tenement, the owner of the tenement to which the cut off
part belong retaines the ownership of the same.
-
Article 369
Trees, uprooted and carried away by currents of waters, belong to the owner of the land upon which they are carried, if
the former owners do not claimed them within the term of a month.
-
Article 370
The beds of rivers, which remain abandoned because the course of the water has naturally changed, belong to the owners of
the riparian lands, throughout their respective extents. If the abandoned
bed has divided tenements belonging to different owners, the new dividing
line shall be run at equal distance therefrom.
-
Article 371
Islands formed in the sea, adjacent to the coast of Spain, and in navigable or floatable rivers belong to the State.
-
Article 372
When in a navigable and floatable river, which changes its course by natural causes, a new bed is opened through a private
tenement , this bed shall become public domain. The owner of the tenement
shall recover it, in the event of the waters leaving it again dry, naturally
or through work legally authorized for this purpose.
-
Article 373
Islands which, through successive accumulations of descending alluviums, are slowly formed in rivers, belong to the owners
of the banks or shores nearest to each of them or to those of both shores,
if the island is in the middle of the river, and then shall be divided
longitudinally in halves. If only one island thus formed be more distant
from one bank than from the other, then the owner of the nearest bank
shall be the sole owner of it.
-
Article 374
When the current of a river divides itself into branches, leaving a tenement or a part of it isolated, the owner of the
same retains his property. He also retains it, if a portion of the land
is rendered isolated by the current.
-
Article 358
-
Section Third
Rights of Accession in Respect to Personal Property
-
Article 375
When two personal things, belonging to different owners, are united in such a way that they become a unit without bad faith on the part of either owner, the owner of the principal thing acquires the accessory one upon indemnifying its former owner for its value.
-
Article 376
When two things are incorporated, the principal shall be considered the one to which the other had been united as an ornament or for its use and perfection.
-
Article 377
When it is not possible by following the rules of the preceding article to determine which of the two incorporated things
is the principal one, the thing of the greater value shall be considered
as such, and between two things of equal valuer that of the greater volume.
-
Article 378
When things united can be separated without injury, their respective
owners may claim their separation.
-
Article 379
When the owner of the accessory thing has made the incorporation,
in bad faith, he shall lose the thing incorporated and shall be obliged to indemnify the owner of the principal
thing for the damages he may have suffered.
-
When the one acting in bad faith is the owner of the principal thing,
the owner of the accessory shall have the right to choose between being
paid by the first for the value for the thing or to have the thing, belonging
to him, separated, though it may be necessary for such purpose to destroy
the principal one, and besides, in both cases, an indemnity for damages
and injury may be recovered.
-
If any of the owners have made the incorporation in the presence, with
the knowledge and forbearance and without opposition from the other, their
respective rights shall be determined in the manner provided for such
cases where both had acted in good faith.
-
-
Article 380
Whenever the owner of materials, used without his consent, has a right to an indemnity, he may exact that such indemnity
consist in the delivery to him, either of a thing equal in quality and
value and in all respects to the one employed or in its price, according
to appraisement by experts.
-
Article 381
When by the will of their owners, two things of equal or different kinds are mixed, or if the mixture is made by chance,
and, in this last case, are not separable without injury, each owner shall
acquire a right proportional to the part belonging to him with consideration
as to the values of the things mixed or confounded.
-
Article 382
When by the will of only one of the owners, but, in good faith, two things of equal or different kinds are mixed or confounded,
the rights of the owners shall be determined by the provisions of the
preceding article.
-
Article 383
He who, in good faith, wholly or partially used material belonging to another party in making a work of a new kind, may
make the work his own upon indemnifying the owner of the material for
the value of the same.
-
When this (material) is more precious than the work on which it was used
or superior in value, the owner of it may at his option become owner of
the new thing by paying the price of the labor or claiming an indemnity
for the material.
-
When in the making of the new work, there has been bad faith, the owner
of the material has the right, either to keep the work without paying
any thing to the author or claiming from him an indemnity for the value
of the material and the damages he may have suffered.
-
-
Article 375
-
General Provision
-
Chapter Third
Fixing Boundaries and Placing Land Marks
-
Article 384
Every owner has the right to fix the boundaries of his property by giving notice thereof to the owners of adjoining tenements.
-
Article 385
The demarkation shall be made in accordance with the titles of each owner, and, when in default of sufficient title, from what may appear from the possession held by the contiguous owners.
-
Article 386
When the titles do not specify the boundary or area belonging to each owner, and the question cannot be determined by the possession
or by other means of proof, the demarkation shall be made by dividing the
land in dispute in equal shares.
-
Article 387
When the titles of the contiguous owners show an area, larger or smaller than that comprised in the total of said land, the increase or decrease shall be distributed in proportion.
-
Article 384
-
Chapter Fourth
Right of Enclosing Agricultural Lands
-
Article 388
Every owner may close or fence his tenements with walls, ditches, live or dead hedges or in any other manner without injury to the easements existing thereon.
-
Article 388
- Chapter Fourth Right of Enclosing Agricultural Lands
-
Chapter Fifth
Unstable Buildings and Trees About to Fall
-
Article 389
When a building, wall, column or any other construction is in danger of falling, the owner is obliged to demolish it or to do whatever is necessary to prevent its falling. Should the owner of the ruinous work not do it, the authorities may have it demolished at the expense of the owner.
-
Article 390
When a large tree threatens to fall in such a way as to cause damage to another person's tenement or to persons passing through
a public or private way, the owner of the tree shall be obliged to pull
it down and take it away; should he not do so, it shall be done at his expense
by order of the authorities.
-
Article 391
In the cases of the two preceding articles, should the tree or building fall, the provisions of arts. 1907 and 1908 shall be enforced.
-
Article 389
-
Chapter First
Ownership in General
-
Title III
Community of Property
-
Article 392
There is community of property when the ownership of a thing or of
a right belongs to different persons undividedly.
-
Article 393
The share of the participants in the benefits, as well as in the charges, shall be proportionate to their respective interests.
-
Article 394
Every participant may use the things, held in common, provided he uses them in accordance with their office and in such
a way as not to injure the interests of the community nor prevent the co-participants
from utilizing them according to their rights.
-
Article 395
Every participant shall have a right to oblige a co-participant to contribute to the expenses of keeping the thing or right
held in common; only the party renouncing the share belonging to him in the
ownership can exempt himself from this obligation.
-
Article 396
When the different stories of a house belong to different owners, if the titles do not specify the conditions under which
they must contribute to the necessary expenses thereof, and there is no stipulation
about it, the following provisions shall be observed:
-
1
The main and party walls, the roof, and other things of use in common shall
be preserved at the expense of all the owners in proportion to the value of
their stories.
-
2
Every owner shall pay the cost of maintaining the floor of his story. The
floor of the porch, front door, common yard, and hygienic works, common to
all, shall be paid pro rata by all the owners.
-
3
The stairs from the porch to the first story shall be paid for pro rata
by all the owners, with the exception of the owner of the ground floor; the
stairs from the first to the second story shall be paid for by all, excepting
the owners of the ground floor and first story, and successively so on.
-
1
-
Article 397
None of the owners shall, without consent of the others, make any change in the common property though benefits for all may
accrue thereby.
-
Article 398
The resolution of the majority of the part-owners as to the management
and better enjoyment of the thing held in common shall be binding (on all).
-
There shall be no majority, unless the resolution has been made by the part-owners
representing a majority of the interests which constitutes the object of the
community.
-
If there is no majority or the resolution of the same is seriously injurious
to the parties interested in the thing held in common, the Judge, on petition
of any part-owner, shall decree what may be proper including the appointment
of an administrator.
-
When a part of the things privately belong to one or to some of the part-owners
and the remainder in common, the preceding prescription shall only apply to
the latter.
-
-
Article 399
Each one of the part-owners shall have absolute ownership of his part and in the fruits and benefits belonging to it, and
he, therefore, may sell, assign, or mortgage it, and even substitute another
person in its enjoyment, unless personal rights are involved. But the effect
of the sale or mortgage, in what refers to the part-owner, shall be limited
to the share which may be allotted to him in the distribution on the determination
of the community.
-
Article 400
No part-owner shall be obliged to remain a party to the community. Each of them may ask, at any time, the division of the thing
held in common.
-
Article 401
Notwithstanding what is provided in the preceding article, the part-owners cannot compel a division of the thing held in common
to be made when by so doing they may render it unserviceable for the use for
which it was intended.
-
Article 402
The division of a thing held in common may be made by the parties in interest or by arbitrators or compromisers appointed at the will of the part-owners.
-
Article 403
The creditors or assignees of the part-owners may concur in the division of the property, held in common, and object to any
division made without their concurrence. But they cannot object to the division
already made, except in the cases of fraud or when they have made it, notwithstanding
the opposition formally interposed in order to prevent it, but they shall always
leave the rights of the debtor or assignee intact to maintain its validity.
-
Article 404
When the thing is essentially indivisible and the part-owners cannot agree that it be adjudged to one of them who shall indemnify
the others, then it shall be sold and the proceeds be distributed.
-
Article 405
The division of property held in common shall not cause injury to a third party who shall retain the rights of mortgage, easements,
or any other real rights belonging to him before the division was made. The
personal rights belonging to a third party against the community shall also
remain in force notwithstanding the division.
-
Article 406
The rules, relating to the division of estates, shall apply to the divisions among the part-owners.
-
Article 392
-
Title IV
Some Special Properties
-
Chapter First
Waters
-
Section First
Ownership of Waters
-
Article 407
To the public domain belong:
-
1
Rivers and their natural beds.
-
2
Continuous or intermittent waters from sources or brooks running in their natural beds and the beds themselves.
-
3
Waters rising continuously or intermittently in lands en the same public domain.
-
4
Lakes and ponds formed by nature on public lands, and also their beds.
-
5
Rain water running through ravines or sandy beaches with their beds also belong to the public domain.
-
6
Subterranean waters existing on public lands.
-
7
Waters found within the zone of operation of public works, even when they are made by a grantee.
-
8
Waters flowing continuously or intermittently from tenements belonging to private parties, to the State, to the provinces or to towns from the moment they leave such tenements.
-
9
The waste waters of fountains, sewers, and public institutions.
-
1
-
Article 408
To private dominion belong:
-
1
Waters, either continuous or intermittent, rising on private tenements as far as they run through them.
-
2
Lakes and ponds and their beds , when formed by nature on said tenements.
-
3
Subterranean waters found on the same.
-
4
Rain waters falling on private tenements as long as they remain within boundaries of the same.
-
5
The beds of flowing waters, continuous or intermittent, formed by rain
water, and those of brooks crossing tenements which do not belong to the
public domain. In every drain or acqueduct the water, the bed, the sloping
bank, and the side-ways are considered as an integral part of the tenement
or building for which the waters are intended. The owners of tenements,
through which or along the boundaries of which the acqueduct passes, can
allege no ownership over it, nor any right to profit by their beds or
side-ways, unless they base their claim on title deeds, specifying the
right or the ownership claimed by them.
-
1
-
Article 407
-
Section Second
Profitable Use of Public Waters
-
Article 409
The use of public waters is acquired:
-
Article 410
Every concession of use of waters is understood to be without injury to third parties.
-
Article 411
The right to make use of public waters is extinguished by the forfeiture of the concession, and by the non-usage during twenty
years.
-
Article 409
-
Section Third
The Use of Waters of Private Ownership
-
Article 412
The owner of a tenement which contains the source from which a
brook rises, be it continuous or intermittent, may use its waters as far
as they run through the tenement; after it leaves the tenement, it becomes public and its use
is governed by the special law of waters.
-
Article 413
The owner of a tenement which contains the source from which a
brook rises, be it continuous or intermittent, may use its waters as far
as they run through the tenement; after it leaves the tenement, it becomes public and its use
is governed by the special law of waters.
-
Article 414
No one may enter private property in search of waters or make use of them without permission from its owner.
-
Article 415
The dominion which the proprietor of a tenement has over waters rising on his land cannot be exercised so as to interfere
with the rights which the owner of an inferior tenement may have legally
acquired to its use.
-
Article 416
Every owner of a tenement has a right to construct on his property receptacles for rain water, provided he does no damage thereby to the public or a third party.
-
Article 412
-
Section Fourth
Subterranean Waters
-
Article 417
Only the owner of a tenement or another person, with his permission,
may search for subterranean waters thereon.
-
Article 418
Artesian waters, according to the special law of waters, belong to the persons who discovers the same.
-
Article 419
When the owner of artesian wells abandons the same to their natural course, they become public domain.
-
Article 417
-
Section Fifth
General Provisions
-
Article 420
The owner of a tenement on which there are defensive works to
check waters or on which, by the variation of their course, it may be
necessary to reconstruct them, is bound, at his option, to make the necessary repairs or constructions
or to permit that, without damage to him, the owners of the tenements,
who suffer or are clearly exposed to suffer damages, should make such
works.
-
Article 421
The provisions of the preceding article apply to the cases in which it may be necessary to clear a tenement from the material,
the accumulation or fall of which may obstruct the course of waters with
injury or danger to a third party.
-
Article 422
All the proprietors who participate in the benefits arising from the works, to which the preceding articles refer, shall be
bound to contribute to the expenses of their construction in proportion
to their interests. Those, who by their own fault may have caused the
damages, shall be responsible for such expenses.
-
Article 423
The ownership and use of waters belonging to corporations or private parties are subject to the law of expropriation
for causes of public utility.
-
Article 424
The provisions of this title shall not cause injury to rights previously acquired nor to the private ownership which the proprietor of waters, drains, fountains or sources have to use, sell or to barter, as private property.
-
Article 425
Anything not expressly determined by the provisions of this chapter shall be governed by the special law of waters.
-
Article 420
-
Section First
Ownership of Waters
-
Chapter Second
Mineral Ores
-
Article 426
Any Spaniard or foreigner may freely make prospect pits or excavations, not exceeding ten metres in length or depth, for the purpose of discovering ores on land belonging to the public domain; but they must previously give notice thereof to the local authorities. On land belonging to private parties no prospect pits can be sunk unless the permission of the owner or the party representing him has been previously obtained.
-
Article 427
The limits of the rights mentioned in the preceding article, the previous formalities, and the conditions for their exercise,
the designation of the matters which are to be considered as ores, and the
determination of the rights belonging to the owner of the land and to the
discoverer of the ores, in case of grants, shall be governed by the special
law of mines.
-
Article 426
-
Chapter Third
Intellectual Property
-
Article 428
The author of any literary, scientific or artistic work has the right to profit by it and dispose of it at his will.
-
Article 429
The law of intellectual property determines the persons to whom such right belongs, the manner of exercising it, and the period of its duration. In cases not provided for nor determined by such special law, the general rules about ownership, established by this Code, shall govern.
-
Article 428
-
Chapter First
Waters
-
Title V
Possession
-
Chapter First
Possession and Its Kinds
-
Article 430
Natural possession is the holding of a thing or the enjoyment of a right by some person. Civil possession is the same holding or enjoyment joined to the intent of having the thing or right as his own.
-
Article 431
Possession of things or rights is exercised, either by the same person who holds and enjoys them or by another in his behalf.
-
Article 432
Possession in things and rights may be held in one of two different ways, either as that of the owner or as that of the holder
of the things or rights to keep and enjoy them when the ownership belongs
to another person.
-
Article 433
Any person who is not aware that there is in his title or in the manner of acquiring it any flaw, invalidating the same,
shall be considered a possessor in good faith.
-
Article 434
Good faith is always presumed and any person averring bad faith on the part of the possessor is bound to prove it.
-
Article 435
Possession, when acquired in good faith, does not lose such character, except in the cases and from the moment in which some
act exists proving that the possessor is aware that he possesses the thing
unlawfully.
-
Article 436
It is presumed that the enjoyment of the possession is continued under the same understanding with which it was acquired, until
the contrary is proven.
-
Article 437
Only things and rights susceptible of being appropriated can be the objects of possession.
-
Article 430
-
Chapter Second
Acquisition of Possession
-
Article 438
Possession is acquired, either by the material occupation of the thing or right possessed, or by the fact that the same remains subject to the action of our will, or by the proper act and legal formalities established for acquiring such a right.
-
Article 439
Possession may be acquired by the same person who is to enjoy it, by his legal representative, by his attorney or by a
third person, without any power therefor, but, in this last case, possession
shall not be considered as acquired, until the person, in whose name the
act of possession has been executed, has ratified the same.
-
Article 440
He who repudiates an inheritance in a valid manner is understood
as not having possessed it for a single moment.
-
Article 441
In no case can possession be forcebly acquired while there is a possessor contesting it. The person, believing that he
has a right or action to deprive any other of the holding of a thing, should
ask help of competent authority, whenever the holder refuses to deliver
it up.
-
Article 442
The successor, by an hereditary title, shall not suffer the consequences
of a faulty possession of his testator, unless it is proven that he was
informed of the flaws affecting it; however, the effects of the possession
in good faith shall not benefit him, but from the death of the testator.
-
Article 443
Minors and incapables can acquire the possession of things, but they shall require the assistance of their lawful representatives to make use of the rights in their favor arising from the possession.
-
Article 444
Acts merely tolerated and those clandestinely executed, and without knowledge of the possessor of a thing or with violence,
do not affect the possession.
-
Article 445
Possession, as a fact, cannot be recognized in two different personalities, unless in cases of indivision. Should a question
arise about the fact of the possession, the actual possessor shall be preferred,
the oldest, when two appear; if the date of the possession is the same,
the one presenting a title; and when all these conditions are equal, the
thing shall be placed in deposit or judicial keeping, until a decision is
rendered through proper proceedings about the possession or the ownership thereof.
-
Article 438
-
Chapter Third
Effect of Possession
-
Article 446
Every possessor has the right to be respected in his possession, and should he be disturbed in it, he shall be protected or possession be restored to him by the means established in the laws of procedure.
-
Article 447
Only the possession acquired and enjoyed in the belief of being owner can serve as a title to acquire ownership.
-
Article 448
The possessor who believes himself owner has in his favor the legal presumption that he possesses under a just title and he shall not the obliged to show it.
-
Article 449
The possession of a real tenement is also a presumption of possession of the furniture and objects within it, as long as it is not show or proven that they ought to be excluded.
-
Article 450
Each one of the participants, in a thing held in common, is considered as having exclusively possessed the part which may
be allotted to him on the distribution, during all the time that the indivision
lasted.
-
Article 451
The fruits collected in good faith by the possessor become his own
while the possession has not been lawfully interrupted.
-
Article 452
If, at the date on which good faith ceases, some natural or industrial fruits are ungathered, the possessor shall have a right to recover the expenses incurred by him for their production and besides to a part of the net proceeds of the crop in proportion to the time of his possession.
-
The charges shall be distributed pro rata, in the same manner, between both the possessors.
-
The owner of a thing may, if he desires, grant to the possessor, in good faith, the right of finishing the cultivation and collecting the pending fruits as an indemnity for the parts of the expenses of cultivation and net proceeds belonging to him; the possessor m good faith, who, for any reason, may not desire to accept such a concession, shall lose the right to be indemnified in any other manner."
-
-
Article 453
Necessary expenses are refunded to every possessor; but only those in good faith may retain the thing until they are repaid.
-
Useful expenses are refunded to the possessor in good faith under the same
right of retention and he who has defeated him in his possession has the
option, either of refunding the amount of the expenses, or paying him the
increase of value which the thing has acquired in consequence of such expenses.
-
-
Article 454
The expenses purely for ostentation or mere pleasure are not to
be refunded to the possessor in good faith, but he may carry away the ornaments
with which he has embellished the principal thing, if it suffers no injury
and if the successor in the possession does not prefer to refund the amount expended thereon.
-
Article 455
A possessor in bad faith shall refund the fruits collected, and those which the lawful possessor could have received, and
shall only have a right to be reimbursed for the necessary expenses made
for the maintenance of the thing. The expenses incurred in improvements
for ostentation and pleasure shall not be refunded to the possessor in bad
faith, but he can take away the object for which such expenses have been
incurred, provided the (principal) thing suffers no injury and the lawful
possessor does not prefer to retain them, paying the value they have at
the moment of his entering into possession.
-
Article 456
The improvements caused by nature or time always pass to the benefit of the one who has won in the possession.
-
Article 457
The possessor in good faith is not liable for the impairments or loss of the thing possessed, excepting the cases in which
it may be proved that he has acted with deceit (dolo). The possessor in
bad faith is liable for the impairment or loss in any case, even in those caused by main force, when he maliciously has delayed
the delivery of the thing to its lawful possessor.
-
Article 458
The person obtaining possession is not bound to pay for improvements which have ceased to exist, at the time of acquiring
the thing.
-
Article 459
The actual possessor who shows his possession, during a prior time, is presumed to have had possession also during the intermediate period, until the contrary is proven.
-
Article 460
The possessor may lose his possession:
-
1
By the abandonment of the thing.
-
2
By assignment made to another party under an onerous or gratuitous title.
-
3
By the destruction or total loss of the thing or by the thing becoming not (lawfully) marketable.
-
4
By the possession of another, even against the will of a former possessor, if the new possession has lasted over a year.
-
1
-
Article 461
The possession of personal property is not considered as lost while it is under the control of the possessor, though he may accidentally not know its whereabouts.
-
Article 462
The possession of real property and real rights is not considered as lost, nor transmitted for the effects of prescription
to the injury of a third party, except with submission to the provisions
of the Law of Mortgage.
-
Article 463
The acts relating to possession, either executed or consented to by the person possessing another person's thing as a mere
holder for enjoying or retaining it for any cause, neither bind nor cause
injury to the owner, unless he should have granted to the holder express
powers to execute them or he ratifies them afterwards.
-
Article 464
The possession of personal property, acquired in good faith, is equivalent to a title thereto. However, the person, who has
lost the personal thing or has been unlawfully deprived of it, may recover
it from whoever possesses it.
-
If the possessor of a personal thing, lost or stolen, has acquired it in
good faith at a public auction, the owner cannot recover it, unless by reimbursing
(the possessor) the price paid for it.
-
Neither can the owner of a thing pledged in the loan offices (Mantes de Piedad], established under authority of the government,
obtain the recovery thereof, whoever the person may be who has pledged them,
without previously refunding to the institution the amount of the pledge
and the interest due.
-
Things acquired on the exchange, at marts or markets or from a merchant
lawfully established and habitually employed in a traffic of analagous objects,
shall be governed by the provisions of the Code of Commerce.
-
-
Article 465
Wild animals are only possessed while they are under ones control; those domesticated or tamed are considered as tame or
domestic as long as they retain the habit of returning to the home of their
possessor.
-
Article 466
A person who lawfully recovers the possession, unduly lost, is considered as having enjoyed it without interruption for
all the effects that may be beneficial to him.
-
Article 446
-
Chapter First
Possession and Its Kinds
-
Title VI
Usufruct, Use and Habitation
-
Chapter First
Usufruct
-
Section First
Usufruct in General
-
Article 467
Usufruct gives a right to enjoy another's property under the
obligation of maintaining its form and substance, unless the title constituting
it or the law allows otherwise.
-
Article 468
Usufruct is constituted by law, by wish of private persons specified in acts, inter vivos, by last will, and by prescription.
-
Article 469
Usufruct can be constituted on the whole or on a part of the fruits
of a thing, in favor of one or more persons, simultaneously or successively, and in any case from and up to a certain
date, purely or under conditions. It can also be constituted on a right,
provided the same is not absolutely personal or unassignable.
-
Article 470
The rights and duties of the usufructuaries shall be those specified in the title constituting the usufruct; in default
of this or if it is not sufficient, the provisions contained in the two
following sections shall be observed.
-
Article 467
-
Section Second
Right of the Usufructuary
-
Article 471
The usufructuary is entitled to receive all the natural, industrial, and civil fruits of the property in usufruct.
As to the treasures which may be found on the tenement, he shall be considered
as a stranger.
-
Article 472
Natural or industrial fruits, ungathered at the time of the beginning
of the usufruct, belong to the usufructuary.
-
Those, pending at the time the usufruct expires, belong to the owner.
-
In the preceding cases, the usufructuary, at the beginning of the usufruct,
is not bound to pay to the owner any of the expenses incurred; but, at
the expiration of the usufruct, the owner is bound to pay from the proceeds
of the pending fruits, the ordinary expenses of cultivation, for the seed,
and other similar ones incurred by the usufructuary.
-
The provisions of this article shall not injure rights of a third party,
acquired at the beginning or the determination of the usufruct.
-
-
Article 473
If the usufructuary has leased the lands or tenements given in usufruct, and this should be determined before the lease, he or his heirs shall only receive their proportional parts of the rent, which are to be paid by the lessee.
-
Article 474
The civil fruits are understood to be paid, day by day, and belong to the usufructuary in proportion to the time that the
usufruct may last.
-
Article 475
When a usufruct is constituted on the right to collect a rent or a periodical pension, consisting either of money or
of fruits, or in interest on obligations, or certificates to the bearer,
each payment due shall be considered as proceeds or fruits of said right.
-
When it consists in the enjoyments of the benefits, produced by an interest
in any industrial or commercial enterprise, the distribution of which
has not a fixed date, such benefits shall have the same consideration.
-
In either case, they shall be distributed as civil fruits and shall be
applied in the manner provided in the preceding article.
-
-
Article 476
The usufructuary of a tenement, on which mines are found, is not entitled to the proceeds of the mines denounced, granted,
or on which there are workings, at the beginning of the usufruct, unless
they are expressly granted to him by the title constituting the usufruct
or in case such usufruct is universal.
-
Article 477
Notwithstanding what is provided in the preceding article, the usufructuary, in the legal usufruct, may work the mines denounced,
granted or being worked on the tenement, taking, as his own, one hald
of the profits which may be obtained, after deducting the expenses which
shall be equally shared by him and the owner.
-
Article 478
The status of usufructuary does not deprive the person possessing it to the rights granted to every one, by the Law of Mines, to dencunce and obtain the grant of mines existing on the tenement in usufruct, in the form and under the conditions established by said law.
-
Article 479
The usufructuary shall have a right to enjoy the increase, which the thing in usufruct may receive by accession, of the
easements existing in its favor, and in general of all the benefits inherent
in the same.
-
Article 480
The usufructuary may personally enjoy the thing in usufruct, may lease it to another person, or may alienate his rights to the usufruct, even under a gratuitous title; but all the contracts into which he may enter, as such usufructuary, shall terminate, at the expiration of the usufruct, except that of lease of rural tenements which shall be considered as subsisting during the agricultural year.
-
Article 481
When the usufruct embraces things, which without being destroyed , are slowly deteriorated by usage , the usufructuary
shall have the right to make use of them in a proper way, and shall not
be bound to return them at the determination of the usufruct, except in
the condition in which they may be found ; but he shall be obliged to
indemnify the owner for the wear they may have received on account of
his malice or neglect.
-
Article 482
When the usufruct embraces things which cannot be used without
being destroyed, the usufructuary shall have a right to use them, under the obligation of paying the appraised
value on the determination of the usufruct, if they were appraised when
given to him. When they have not been appraised, he shall have the right
to return them by giving the same amount and quality or paying their market
price at the time of the determination of the usufruct.
-
Article 483
The usufructuary of vineyards, olive orchards, and other trees or shrubs may use for his benefit the dead trunks and even
those cut or torn off by accident, under the obligation of replacing them
with others.
-
Article 484
When in consequence of an act of God, or by an extraordinary event, the vines, olive trees, or other trees or shrubs
are destroyed, in such a considerable number that the replanting of them
should not be practicable, or be too onerous, the usufructuary may leave
the dead, fallen, or broken trunks at the disposal of the owner and oblige him to remove them and
leave the land clear.
-
Article 485
The usufructuary of wood land may enjoy all the profits which it may produce according to its nature.
-
If the wood land is a copse or of timber for building, the usufructuary may cut trees on it or make ordinary felling such as the owner was in the habit of doing, and, in default of this, he shall make them in accordance with the usage of the place as to manner, amount, and season.
-
In any case, he shall make the cutting or felling of trees in such a manner that it will not damage the preservation of the tenement.
-
In the nurseries of trees, the usufructuary may make the thinnings required in order that the remaining trees may properly developed.
-
Besides what is provided in the preceding paragraphs, the usufructuary shall not cut the lower part of the trunk of any trees, unless it be for replacing or improving some of the things held in usufruct, and, in this case, he must give previous notice to the owner about the necessity of the work."
-
-
Article 486
The usufructuary of an action to recover a tenement or a real right, or personal property has a right to enforce it, and to oblige the owner of the action to assign him for this purpose, his proper power and to provide him with any elements of evidence which he may have. When, in consequence of the enforcement of such action, he acquires the thing claimed, the usufruct shall be limited to the fruits only and the ownership shall go to the proprietor.
-
Article 487
The usufructuary may make on the property held in usufruct any improvements, either useful or for recreation, which he
may deem proper, provided he does not change the form or substance of
the same; but he shall have no right to be indemnified for it. He may,
however, remove said improvements, if it is possible to do so without
damage to the property.
-
Article 488
The usufructuary can set off any damages to the property with the improvements he may have made thereon.
-
Article 489
The owner of property, the usufruct of which is held by another, may alienate it, but cannot change its form or substance nor
do anything to the injure of the usufructuary.
-
Article 490
The usufructuary of a part of a thing, held in common, shall exercise
all the rights belonging to the owner of it in respect to the administration
and collection of fruits and interests. Should the community cease on
account of the division of the thing held in common, the usufruct of the
part allotted to the owner or part-owner shall belong to the usufructuary.
-
Article 471
-
Section Third
Obligation of the Usufructuary
-
Article 491
The usufructuary, before entering upon the enjoyment of the property, shall be obliged:
-
Article 492
The provision of paragraph 2, of the preceding article, is not
to be applied to the vendor or donor, who has reserved to himself the
usufruct of a thing sold or donated, neither to the parent who enjoyed
the usufruct of the property of their children, nor to the surviving consort
as to the hereditary share granted to him or her by arts. 834, 836, and 837, except in the cases
in which the parents or consort contract a second marriage.
-
Article 493
The usufructuary, whatever the title for his usufruct be, may be excused from the obligation of making an inventory or of giving bond when no one will be injured thereby.
-
Article 494
When the usufructuary has not given bond, in the cases in which he ought to have given it, the owner may require that the
real property be placed under administration, the personal property sold,
that public effects, and bonds, notes, stocks, etc. (valores), either to
order or to bearer, be converted into certificates or be deposited in
a bank or public institution, and any capital or sums in cash and money
received from sales of personal property, be invested in safe securities.
-
Interest on money received from the sale of personal property, interest on public effects, and bonds, notes, stocks, shares,
etc. (valores), and the proceeds of property, placed under administration,
belong to the usufructuary.
-
Furthermore, the owner may, if he so prefers, while the usufructuary gives
no bond or is released from it, retain in his possession the property
of the usufruct, as administrator under the obligation of delivering the
net proceeds to the usufructuary, after deducting the sums which may be agreed upon or may be judicially
fixed for his services during such administration.
-
-
Article 495
When the usufructuary, who has not given bond, claims, under security given by oath (cancion juratoria), the delivery
of furniture required for his use, also a dwelling be given to him and
his family in a house comprised in the usufruct, the Judge may assent
to his petition, after due consideration of the facts in the case.
-
The same shall be understood about the instruments, implements, and other personal property, required for the industry in
which it is employed.
-
When the owner should not wish that some pieces of furniture be sold,
either on account of their artistic merit or because they have a special
value in his eyes (precio de afeccion), he may require their delivery
to him upon giving security for the payment of the legal interest on their
appraised value.
-
-
Article 496
After the bonds are given by the usufructuary, he shall have a right to all the proceeds from the date on which he ought
to have begun to receive them, in accordance with the title constituting
the usufruct.
-
Article 497
The usufructuary is bound to take care of the property given in usufruct as any good father of a family would do.
-
Article 498
The usufructuary, who alienates or leases his right to the usufruct, shall be liable for the damages suffered by the property
in usufruct by the fault or neglect of the person who substitutes him.
-
Article 499
Should the usufruct be constituted over a flock or herd of cattle, the usufructuary shall be bound to replace, with the young
thereof, the animal dying annually or ordinarily and those carried away
by the rapacity of preying animals.
-
Should the herd on which the usufruct is constituted wholly perish without
fault of the usufructuary, in consequence of contagious diseases or any
other uncommon event, the usufructuary shall fulfill his duty by delivering
to the owner the remains saved from this misfortune.
-
Should the herd partially perish, also by accident and without the fault
of the usufructuary, the usufruct shall continue in respect to the part
saved. Should the usufruct be of a sterile herd, it shall be considered
for all its effects as constituted over things perishable (fungibles).
-
-
Article 500
The usufructuary is bound to make the ordinary repairs, required by the things given in usufruct. Ordinary repairs shall
be considered those required by the wear and tear produced by the natural
use of things, and which are indispensable for their preservation. Should
he not make them, after receiving an intimation from the owner, the latter
may make them at the expense of the usufructuary.
-
Article 501
Extraordinary repairs shall be made on the account of the owner. The usufructuary is bound to notify him, when the necessity of making them is urgent.
-
Article 502
When the owner makes extraordinary repairs, he shall be entitled to reclaim from the usufructuary the legal interest
on the sum invested in them, during the existence of the usufruct.
-
Should he not make repairs when they are indispensable for the preservation
of the thing, the usufructuary may make them; but he shall have a right
to claim from the owner, on the determination of the usufruct, the increase
in value which the tenement may have acquired on that account.
-
Should the owner refuse to refund such amounts, the usufructuary is entitled to retain the thing, until he reimburses himself
from the proceeds thereof.
-
-
Article 503
The owner may make works and improvements which may be appropriate
for the tenement in usufruct, and new plantations on it, if it is rural property, provided the value of
the usufruct is not diminished by such acts, nor the rights of the usufructuary
impaired.
-
Article 504
The payment of charges and annual taxes and of those considered as a lien on the fruits, shall be at the expense (de
cuenta) of the usufructuary, during all the time that the usufruct lasts.
-
Article 505
The taxes which may be imposed directly upon the capital, during the usufruct, shall be paid by the owner.
-
Article 506
Should the usufruct be constituted upon the whole of a patrimony, and if, at the time of its constitution, the owner has
debts, the provisions of arts. 642 and 643 about donations shall be applied
to the maintenance of the usufruct as well as for the obligations of the
usufructuary to pay such debts.
-
Article 507
The usufructuary may personally claim the credits due which form apart of the usufruct, if he has given or gives the appropriate
bond.. If he has been released from giving bond or if he cannot give it,
or if the one given is not sufficient, he shall require the authorization
of the owner or, in his default, of the Judge to collect said credits.
-
The usufructuary under bond can invest the capital in any manner he may
deem fit. The usufructuary without bond must invest said capital at interest,
upon agreement with the owner, in default of such an agreement, under
judicial authorization, and, in every case, with security sufficient to
preserve the integrity of the capital in usufruct.
-
-
Article 508
The universal usufructuary shall pay in full the legacy of life annuities or the pension for support.
-
The usufructuary of an aliquot part of the estate shall pay it in proportion
to his share.
-
In neither of the two cases shall the owner be bound to make any reimbursements.
The usufructuary of one or more specified things shall pay the legacy
only when the rent or pension is expressly constituted upon them.
-
-
Article 509
The usufructuary of a mortgaged tenement shall not be obliged the pay the debt for the security of which the mortgage was
given.
-
Article 510
When the usufruct be for the whole or for an aliquot pare of an inheritance, the usufructuary may advance the sums which may
belong to the property in usufruct for the payment of the debts of the
estate and shall be entitled to claim from the owner its restoration,
without interest, on the expiration of the usufruct.
-
Article 511
The usufructuary is obliged to notify the owner of any act of a third party, coming to his knowledge, which may injure the
rights of ownership, and shall be liable, should he not do so, for the
damages and injuries as if they were caused by his own fault.
-
Article 512
The expenses, costs, and condemnations of the suits, maintained about the usufruct, shall be charged to the usufructuary.
-
Article 491
-
Section Fourth
Manner of Extinguishing the Usufruct
-
Article 513
The usufruct is extinguished:
-
1
By the death of the usufructuary.
-
2
By the expiration of the term for which it was constituted or by the
fulfillment of the resolutory condition stated in the constituting title.
-
3
By the merger of usufruct and ownership in the same person.
-
4
By renunciation of the usufructuary.
-
5
By total loss of the property in usufruct.
-
6
By determination of the right of the constituent.
-
7
By prescription.
-
1
-
Article 514
If the thing given in usufruct should suffer a partial loss, the right shall continue as to the remaining part.
-
Article 515
The usufruct cannot be constituted for over thirty years in favor of a town, a corporation or a society. Should it have been
so constituted, and, before that time, the town becomes deserted or the
corporation or society be dissolved, the usufruct shall be extinguished
by such facts.
-
Article 516
The usufruct granted for such a time, until a third party becomes of certain age, shall subsist during the number of years
specified, even if the third party dies before, unless the usufruct has
been expressaly granted only because of the existence of such person.
-
Article 517
When the usufruct is constituted on a tenement of which a building may form a part, and the building should be destroyed,
in any manner whatever, the usufructuary shall have a right to enjoy the
use of the land and materials.
-
The same thing shall happen when the usufruct is constituted only upon the building and it should be destroyed. But, in
such a case, if the owner wants to construct another building, he shall
have a right to the use of the ground and of the materials, under the
obligation of paying to the usufructuary, during the time the usufruct
lasts, the interest upon the sum equivalent to the value of the ground
and of the materials.
-
-
Article 518
When the owner joined with the usufructuary in the insurance of the tenement, given in usufruct, he shall continue, in
the case of loss, in the enjoyment of the new building, if constructed,
or shall receive the interest on the amount insured, if rebuilding is
not convenient to the owner.
-
When the owner has refused to contribute towards the insurance of the tenement and the usufructuary alone is the insurer, the
latter shall acquire the right, in case of loss, to collect in full the
amount of the insurance, but under the obligation of investing it in rebuilding
the tenement.
-
Should the usufructuary refuse to contribute to the insurance and the owner be the sole insurer, the latter shall receive,
in case of loss, the full amount of insurance, but the usufructuary shall
always have the right granted to him in the preceding article.
-
-
Article 519
When the thing in usufruct should be condemned for causes of public
utility, the owner shall be obliged, either to replace it with another
of the same value, and having similar conditions, or to pay to the usufructuary
the legal interest on the amount of the indemnity, during all the time
the usufruct is to last. If the owner chooses the second manner, he is bound to give
security for the payment of the interest.
-
Article 520
The usufruct is not extinguished by the bad use of the thing in usufruct; but if such abuse causes considerable damage to
the owner, the latter may ask that the thing be delivered to him, binding
himself to pay annually to the usufructuary the net proceeds of the same,
after deducting the expenses and the compensation which may be allowed
to him for the administration thereof.
-
Article 521
The usufruct constituted in favor of several persons in existence, at the time of its constitution, shall not be extinguished
until the death of the last survivor of them.
-
Article 522
Upon the determination thereof, the thing held in usufruct shall be delivered to the owner, unless the right of retention
belonging to the usufructuary or to his heirs, for expenses which they
should recover, is enforced. After the delivery is made, the bond or the
mortgage shall be cancelled.
-
Article 513
-
Section First
Usufruct in General
-
Chapter Second
Use and Habitation
-
Article 523
The rights and duties of the persons enjoying the use and of him who has the right of habitation shall be regulated by
the title constituting such rights, and, in default thereof, by the following
provisions.
-
Article 524
Use gives a right to receive, out of the fruits of another person's property, whatever may be needed to provide for the
necessities of the person, enjoying the use, and his family, even when such
family increases.
-
Article 525
The rights of use and habitation cannot be leased, nor transferred to another person by any title whatever.
-
Article 526
He, who has the use of a flock or a herd of cattle, may profit of the young, milk, and wool thereof, in so far as it may be
necessary for the consumption of himself and family, as well as of the dung
required for manuring the land cultivated by him.
-
Article 527
When the person enjoying the use, consumes alt the fruits of another person's property, or when he, who has the right
of habitation, occupies the whole house, he will be bound to pay all the
expenses of cultivation, of ordinary repairs for the preservation thereof, as well as the taxes, in the same manner as
the usufructuary.
-
Article 528
The provisions established for usufruct apply to the rights of use and habitation, in so far as they do not conflict with what
is provided in this chapter.
-
Article 529
The rights of use and habitation are extinguished by the same causes as that of usufruct, and besides by serious abuse of the
thing or dwelling.
-
Article 523
-
Chapter First
Usufruct
-
Title VII
Easements or Servitudes
-
Chapter First
Easements in General
-
Section First
Different Classes of Easements Which may be Established on Tenements
-
Article 530
An easement is a charge imposed upon real property or a tenement for the benefit of another tenement belonging to
a different owner.
-
Article 531
Easements can also be established for the benefit of one or more persons or for a community to whom the encumbered tenement
does not belong.
-
Article 532
Easements may be continuous or discontinuous, apparent or not apparent.
-
Continuous are those the use of which is or may be incessant without the
intervention of any human act.
-
Discontinuous are those used at short or long intervals and which depend
upon human acts.
-
Apparent are those which are well known and are continually in sight by external signs, revealing their use and benefit.
-
Not apparent are those which present no external show of their existence.
-
-
Article 533
Easements are also either positive or negative.
-
A positive easement is one which imposes upon the owner of the servient
tenement the obligation of allowing something to be done or doing it himself,
and a negative easement is one which forbids the owner of the servient
tenement doing some thing which should be licit for him to do, if the
easement did not exist.
-
-
Article 534
Easements are inseparable from the tenement to which they actively or passively belong.
-
Article 535
Easements' are indivisible. When the servient tenement is divided among two or more persons, the easement is not modified
and each of them has to suffer the part corresponding to it.
-
Article 536
Easements are established either by law or by the will of the owners. The former are called legal and the latter voluntary
easements.
-
Article 530
-
Section Second
Manner of Acquiring Easements
-
Article 537
Continuous and apparent easements are acquired, either by a title or by prescription of twenty years.
-
Article 538
In order to acquire by prescription , easements, referred to in the preceding article, the time of the possession shall
be counted, in positive easements, from the day on which the owner of
the dominant tenement or the one who has made use of the easement, has
commenced to exert it over the servient tenement; and in negative easements,
from the date on which the owner of the dominant tenement has, in a formal
manner, forbidden the owner of the servient one, the execution of the
act which might have been licit, had the easement not existed.
-
Article 539
Continuous and not apparent easements and discontinuous ones, either apparent or not, can only be acquired under a title.
-
Article 540
The want of constitutive title of easements, which cannot be acquired by prescription, can only be remedied by deed of acknowledgment
executed by the owner of the servient tenement or by a final sentence.
-
Article 541
The existence of apparent sign of an easement, between two tenements, established by the owner of both of them, shall
be considered, should one be sold, as a title for the purpose that the
easement should continue actively and passively, unless, at the time of
the division of the ownership of both tenements, the contrary should be
expressed in the deed of conveyance of either of them, or if such sign
is taken away before the execution of such deed.
-
Article 542
Whenever an easement is established, all the rights required for its use are considered as granted.
-
Article 537
-
Section Third
Rights and Obligations of Owners of Dominant and Servient Tenements
-
Article 543
The owner of the dominant tenement may make, at his own expense
on the servient tenement, all the works necessary for its use and maintenance
of the easement but without changing it or rendering it more grievous.
-
Article 544
When there are several dominant tenements, the owners of all of them are bound to contribute to the expenses, referred
to in the preceding article, in proportion to the benefit, which each
may obtain from the work. He, who does not wish to contribute, may exempt
himself by renouncing his interest in the easement for the benefit of
the others.
-
Article 545
The owner of the servient tenement shall not impair, in any manner,
the use of a constituted easement.
-
However, if by reason of the place originally assigned or by the form
established for the use of the easement, this should become too troublesome
to the owner of the servient tenement or should prevent him from making
works, repairs, or important improvements, it may be changed, at his expense;
provided, he offers another place or manner equally convenient, or a way
that may not cause any injury to the owner of the dominant tenement or
to those who have a right to the use of the easement.
-
-
Article 543
-
Section Fourth
Manner in Which Easements are Extinguished
-
Article 546
Easement are extinguished:
-
1
By merger in the same person of the ownership of the servient and dominant
tenements.
-
2
By non-use during twenty years. In discontinuous easements, this term
shall commence to be counted from the day on which it has ceased to be
used; and, in respect to continuous ones, from the date on which an act in opposition
to the easement may have taken place.
-
3
When the tenements become in such condition that the easement cannot be used, but this shall revive, if later on, the condition
of the tenements permits it to be used, unless, when the use becomes possible,
sufficient time has elapsed for the prescription in accordance with the
provisions of the preceding article.
-
4
When the day matures, or when the condition is complied with, in case
the easement is temporal or conditional.
-
5
By the renunciation of the owner of the dominant tenement.
-
6
By redemption agreed to between the owners of the dominant and servient tenements.
-
1
-
Article 547
The form of using the easement may be prescribed just in the same manner as the easement.
-
Article 548
When the dominant tenement belongs to several persons in common, the use of the easement made by one of them, prevents the prescription in regard to the others.
-
Article 546
-
Section First
Different Classes of Easements Which may be Established on Tenements
-
Chapter Second
Legal Easements
-
Section First
General Provisions
-
Article 549
The object of the easements, established by law, is either public utility or private interest.
-
Article 550
Anything concerning easements, established for public or for common
utility, shall be governed by the special laws and regulations controlling them, and, in default thereof, by the
provisions of the present title.
-
Article 551
Easements, established by law for the interests of private persons or for causes of private utility, shall be controlled
by the provisions of the present title, without conflicting with what
is established by the general laws, by rules and ordinances or local ones
about city or rural police.
-
Article 549
-
Section Second
Easements Relating to Waters
-
Article 552
Inferior tenements are obliged to receive the waters, which naturally
and without the intervention of man, come down from the superior tenements,
as well as the stone or earth which they may drag along in their course.
-
Article 553
The banks of the rivers, even when they are of private ownership,
are subject in all their extent and margins, within a zone of three metres, to the easement of public use for the general
interest of navigation, floatation, fishing, and salvage.
-
Tenements, adjacent to the banks of navigable or floatable rivers, are,
besides, subject to the easement of a tow-path for the exclusive service
of fluvial navigation and floatation.
-
Should it be necessary to occupy, for such purpose, lands of private ownership,
the corresponding indemnity shall previously be paid.
-
-
Article 554
Whenever for the diversion or taking of waters from a river or brook, or for the use of other continuous or discontinuous currents, it should be necessary to construct a dam, and the person who is to do it, is not the owner of the bank or of the land required as a support for it, he may establish the easement for abutment of the dam, by previously paying the proper indemnity (to the owner).
-
Article 555
Forced easements for taking water and for drinking troughs for animals (abrevadero) can be imposed only for causes of public
utility in favor of some town or village, indemnity having been previously
paid.
-
Article 556
The easements for taking water and for watering animals carry
with them the obligation on the servient tenements of giving passage for
the persons and animals up to the place where they can be utilized, and
the indemnity must embrace this service.
-
Article 557
Whoever wishes to make use of waters, of which he can dispose for the use of a tenement belonging to him, has the right
of causing it to pass through intermediate tenements, but he is obliged
to indemnify the owners, and also those of the inferior tenements, upon
which the waters may filter or fall.
-
Article 558
A person desiring to make use of the rights granted in the preceding
article is obliged:
-
1
To prove that he is entitled to dispose of the water, and that such
water is sufficient for the use intended.
-
2
To show that the passage way which he asks is the most convenient and less onerous to a third party.
-
3
To indemnify the owner of the servient tenement in the form provided by the laws and regulations.
-
1
-
Article 559
The easement of an aqueduct for purposes of private interest cannot be imposed upon buildings nor their yards or dependencies,
nor over gardens or orchards already in existence.
-
Article 560
The easement of an aqueduct does not prevent the owner of the servient tenement from closing and fencing it, nor from building over the acqueduct, in such a manner, that it may suffer no damage nor render impossible the necessary cleanings and repairs.
-
Article 561
The easement of aqueduct for its legal effects shall be considered as continuous and apparent, even when the passage of the water
is not continuous or its use depends on the necessities of the dominant
tenement, or, in turn, established by days or hours.
-
Article 562
He, who for irrigating his tenement or improving it, has need to construct a stop-lock or a sluice-gate in a mill race, through which it is to receive water, may exact that the owners of the banks allow the construction of the same, upon his previously paying all damages and injuries, including those caused by the new easement to the said owners and to all other persons who irrigate.
-
Article 563
The establishment, extent, form, and conditions of the easements of waters, to which this section refers, shall be governed by the special law on the matter in all that is not provided in this Code.
-
Article 552
-
Section Third
Easement of Ways
-
Article 564
The owner of a tenement or property enclosed by others, belonging
to several owners, and having no ingress or egress to public roads, is
entitled to exact a way or passage through the adjacent tenements, by
previously paying the proper indemnity.
-
If this easement is constituted in such a manner that its use may be continuous
for all the necessities of the dominant tenement, establishing a permanent
way, then the indemnity shall comprise the value of the land occupied
by it, and the amount of damage caused to the servient tenement.
-
When it is limited to the way required for the cultivation of the tenement,
enclosed by others, and for the transportation of its crops through the
servient tenement, without a permanent way, the indemnity shall consist
in the payment of the injury caused by such burden.
-
-
Article 565
The easement of way is to be located in the place where it shall cause the least damage to the servient tenement, in so far as consistent with this rule, through the place where the distance from the dominant tenement to the public road may be the shortest.
-
Article 566
The width of the easement of way shall be that which may be sufficient for the necessities of the dominant tenement.
-
Article 567
When a tenement , acquired by sale, barter or partition, remains enclosed by other tenements of the vendor, barterer or co-owner, he shall be obliged to grant to it the right of way, without indemnity, unless there is an agreement to the contrary.
-
Article 568
If the way granted to an enclosed tenement ceases to be necessary
because the owner has joined it to another, adjacent to the public road, the owner of the servient tenement may demand the extinguishment of the easement, returning what he has received as an indemnity therefor.
-
Article 569
When it is indispensable for the construction or repair of some
building to carry the materials over another's tenement, or place scaffolding or other things on it for the work, the
owner of such tenement is obliged to consent to it, receiving an indemnity
in proportion to the injury it may have caused him.
-
Article 570
Existing easements for the passage of animals, known under the
name of sheep-walk (canada), way, foot-path, or any others, and those of watering, and resting places, and sheep-cot
shall be governed by the ordinances and regulations on the matter and,
in default thereof, by the uses and customs of the place.
-
In any case a walk shall not exceed in width seventy five metres, a way,
thirty seven metres, fifty centimetres, and a path twenty metres, except
when they cause damages to rights lawfully acquired.
-
When it may be necessary to establish a forcible easement of way or that
of a drinking trough for cattle, the provisions of this section and of
arts. 555 and 556 shall be followed. In this case the width shall not
exceed ten metres.
-
-
Article 564
-
Section Fourth
Easements of Party-Walls and Fences
-
Article 571
The easements of party-walls and fences shall be governed by the provisions of this title, and by local ordinances and uses, in so far as they are not in conflict with them and no provisions exist in regard to the same.
-
Article 572
The easement of party-walls and fences is presumed, whilst there is no title or exterior mark or proof to the contrary:
-
Article 573
It is understood that there are exterior signs, contrary to the easement of party- wall, and fences:
-
1
When, in dividing walls of buildings, there are windows or openings.
-
2
When the dividing wall is, on one side, straight and vertical in all
its facemeut and is also similar in the upper part of the other side,
but in the lower part thereof it is tapering or has steps.
-
3
When the wall appears built entirely on the land of one of the tenements,
and not half and half between the contiguous tenements.
-
4
When it bears the burden of the binding beams, floors, and roof frame
of one of the houses and not of the contiguous one.
-
5
When the dividing walls between yards, gardens, and rural tenements
is so constructed that the coping sheds the waters towards one of the
tenements.
-
6
When the dividing wall, being constructed of stones, shows stepping
stones, which, from distance to distance, jut out of the surface only
on one side and not on the other.
-
7
When rural tenements, contiguous to others, included by fences or live
hedges, are not closed. In all these cases, the ownership of the walls,
enclosures, or hedges shall be understood to belong exclusively to the
owner of the property or tenement who has in his favor the presumption
based on any one of the above mentioned signs.
-
1
-
Article 574
Ditches or drains, opened between tenements, are also considered, as common, when there is no title or sign showing the contrary.
-
Article 575
The repairs and construction of party- walls and maintenance of enclosures, live-hedges, ditches, and drains, in common,
shall be borne by all the owners of the tenements, who are interested
in the same, in proportion to the rights of each one of them.
-
Article 576
hen the owner of a building, which is supported by a party-wall, desires to demolish it, he may also renounce the part-ownership
but he shall also pay for all repairs and works required for preventing,
only on such occasion, damages which the demolition may cause to the party-wall.
-
Article 577
Every owner may construct a party-wall by raising it, at his own expense, and indemnifying (persons) against any damage
which may be caused by the work, even when such damage is temporary.
-
He shall also have to pay for the expenses of maintaining the wall or
the part newly raised or for the deepening of its foundations, compared
with what they were before, and besides the indemnity for the further
expenses which may be required to be incurred to maintain the party-wall
by reason of the greater height or depth which has been added to it.
-
If the party-wall cannot bear the greater height, the owner desiring
to raise it, shall be obliged to rebuild, at his own expense, and, if
it is necessary to make it thicker, he shall give the extra space for
it from his own land.
-
-
Article 578
The other owners, who have not contributed in giving greater height, depth or thickness to the wall, may, however, acquire in it the right of party ownership by paying proportionally for the amount of the work and one half of the value of the land appropriated in giving it greater thickness.
-
Article 579
Each owner of a party-wall may use it in proportion to the right he has in the part-ownership ; he may, therefore build, supporting
his construction on the party- wall, or introduce joists up to one-half
of the thickness thereof, but without impeding the common and respective
uses of the other part-owners.
-
Article 571
-
Section Fifth
Easement of Light and Views
-
Article 580
No part-owner, can, without the consent of the other, make in the party-wall a window or an opening of any kind.
-
Article 581
The owner of a wall which is not a party-wall, contiguous to the tenement of another person, may make in it windows or
openings to receive light, at the height of the ceiling joists or near
the ceiling, of the dimensions of 30 centimetres square, and, in any event,
with an iron grate imbedded in the wall and a wire netting.
-
However, the owner of the house or tenement, contiguous to the wall where
the openings are made, may close them, if he acquires the part ownership
of the wall and if the contrary has not been agreed upon.
-
He may also obstruct them by building on his land or raising a wall, adjacent to that having such opening or window.
-
-
Article 582
It is forbidden to open windows with direct views or balconies or any similar openings jutting out over the property of
the neighbor, if there is not a distance of, at least, two metres from
the wall on which they are constructed to said property.
-
Article 583
The distances, to which the preceding article refers, are to be measured where there are direct views, from the exterior line of the wall when the openings do not jut out, and from the line of these openings when they exist, and for slanting views from the dividing line of both tenements.
-
Article 584
The provisions of art. 582 do not apply to buildings separated by a public way.
-
Article 585
When, under any title, right has been acquired to have direct views, balconies, or belvederes over contiguous property,
the owner of the servient tenement shall not build thereon, at a distance
less than three metres, to be measured as stated in art. 583.
-
Article 580
-
Section Sixth
Drainage of Buildings
-
Article 586
The owner of a building is obliged to construct his roofs or covers in such a manner that rain water may fall on his own land or on the street or a public place, and not on the land of his neighbor. Even if it falls on his own land, the owner is obliged to collect it, in such a way, that it will not cause damage to the neighboring tenement.
-
Article 587
The owner or the tenement suffering the easement of receiving water, discharged from roofs, may so build as to receive the
waters upon his own roof or give them another diversion, in accordance
with local ordinances or customs, in such a manner as not to cause any
burden or damage whatever to the dominant tenement.
-
Article 588
When the yard or court of a house is enclosed between others,
and it is not possible to give an outlet through the same house to the rain water collected in it, the establishment of
an easement of outlet may be claimed to give passage to the waters through
the place of the contiguous tenement, where the egress is the easiest,
and to establish a conduit for the egress, in such a way, as to cause
the least damage to the servient tenement, upon the payment of a proper indemnity.
-
Article 586
-
Section Seventh
Distances and Intermediate Works For Certain Constructions and Plantations
-
Article 589
It is forbidden to construct buildings or to make plantations near fortified cities or fortresses, without submitting to the prescriptions of the laws, ordinances, and regulations, peculiar to this matter.
-
Article 590
No one shall construct, near a wall belonging to a third party or a party-wall, wells, sewers, aqueducts, furnaces, forges,
chinneys, stables, deposits of corrosive matters, factories driven by
steam, or factories which by themselves or by their products are dangerous or noxious, without observing the distances prescribed
by the regulations and uses of the place, and without making the necessary
protective works, with subjection, as to form, to the conditions prescribed
by said regulations.
-
Article 591
No trees shall be planted near another man's tenement, unless
it is at the distances authorized by the ordinances or customs of the
place, and, in default of these, it shall be at a distance of two metres
from the dividing line of the tenements, if the planting is made of tall
trees, and at fifty centimetres, if the planting is made of shrubs or
small trees.
-
Article 592
Should the branches of any tree extend over a neighboring tenement, gardens or yards, the owner of the latter shall
have a right to claim that they be cut, in so far as they extend over
his property; and should the roots of the neighboring trees extend through
the land of another person, the owner of the land which is penetrated
may himself cut them, in so far as they are within his tenement.
-
Article 593
Trees existing in a party live-hedge shall also be considered
as party-trees, and any one of the owners has a right to exact that they
be felled. Trees serving as land- marks are excepted, and they may only be uprooted by mutual agreement amongst the adjoining owners.
-
Article 589
-
Section First
General Provisions
-
Chapter Third
Voluntary Easements
-
Article 594
Every owner of a tenement has a right to burden it with all the
easements he may deem fit, and in the manner and form that he may like best, provided he does not violate either
the laws or the public order.
-
Article 595
The owner of a tenement, the usufruct of which belongs to another person, may impose upon it, without the consent of the
usufructuary, any easements which may not damage the rights of usufruct.
-
Article 596
When the direct dominion of a tenement belongs to one person and the beneficial dominion to another, no perpetual voluntary easement can be established upon it, without the consent of both owners.
-
Article 597
The consent of every part-owner shall be required in order to impose an easement over an undivided tenement.
-
The concession, made by some of them, shall remain in suspension until every
one of the joint or common owners agrees to it.
-
But the concession, made by one of the part-owners severally, shall bind the grantors and his successors, even if they hold
under a particular title, not to prevent the exercise of the right granted.
-
-
Article 598
The title, and in some cases, the possession of an easement acquired by prescription, determines the right of the dominant
tenement and the obligation of the servient tenement. In default of them,
the easement shall be governed by the provisions of the present title which
may apply to it.
-
Article 599
When the owner of the servient tenement has bound himself, at the time of constituting the easement, to pay for the works
required for the use and maintenance of the same, he may free himself from
this charge, by abandoning his tenement to the owner of the dominant tenement.
-
Article 600
Pasturage in common shall only be established, in the future, by express concession of the owners, to be proven by a contract
or a last will, and shall not be made in favor of a universality of persons
or a universality of property, but in favor of specified persons and over
tenements also specified and determined.
-
Article 601
Pasturage in common in public land, whether it belongs to the municipalities or to the State, shall be governed by the
administrative laws.
-
Article 602
When pasturage in common, exists amongst the residents of one or more villages, the owner, who encloses a tenement with
a fence or a hedge, shall free the same from the pasturage in common. However,
the other easements established over the same, shall remain subsistent.
-
Article 603
The owner of land, burdened with the easement of pasturage, may
redeem this charge by paying its value to the persons having the rights
to the easement.
-
Article 604
The provision of the preceding article applies to easements established for the use of fuel and other products of wood which
belong to private property.
-
Article 594
-
Chapter First
Easements in General
-
Title VIII
Registry of Property
-
Sole Chapter
-
Article 605
The registry of property has for its object the inscription or annotation of the acts and contracts relating to domain and other real rights pertaining to real property.
-
Article 606
The titles of dominion or of other real rights, relating to real property which are not duly inscribed or annotated in the Registry of Property, work no injury to third parties.
-
Article 607
The Registry of Property shall be public for those who have a known
interest in investigating the condition of real property or real rights annotated or inscribed therein.
-
Article 608
The provisions of the Law of Mortage shall control the determination of titles, subject to inscription or annotation, the form,
effect, and extinction of the same, and the manner of keeping the Registry
and value of the entries in the books thereof.
-
Article 605
-
Sole Chapter
-
Title I
Classification of Property
-
Book Third
Different Ways of Acquiring Ownership
-
Preliminary Provision
-
Article 609
Ownership is acquired by occupancy. Ownership and other rights over
property are acquired and transmitted by law, by donation, by succession,
either testate or intestate, and by tradition in consequence of certain contracts.
-
Article 609
-
Title I
Occupancy
-
Article 610
By occupancy are acquired things appropriable, on account of their nature, which have no owners, as the animals which are
objects of hunting and fishing, hidden treasures, and abandoned personal property.
-
Article 611
The right to hunt and fish is governed by special laws.
-
Article 612
The owner of a swarm of bees shall have a right to pursue the same on another person's tenement, indemnifying its possessor
for the damage caused thereby. Should the tenement be enclosed, he shall need
the consent of the owner to enter it.
-
If the owner has not pursued, or abandons the pursuit of the swarm for two
successive days, the possessor of the tenement may occupy or retain the swarm.
-
The owner of tamed animals may also claim them during the twenty days following
their occupation by another. After this term has elapsed, they shall belong
to him who has caught and kept them.
-
-
Article 613
Pigeons, rabbits, and fish, which from their respective breeding places, should pass to another, belonging to a different owner, shall become the property of the latter, unless they have been enticed away through some trickery or fraud.
-
Article 614
He, who by chance, finds a treasure, hidden on another man's property, shall have the right granted to him by art. 351 of
this Code.
-
Article 615
He who finds any personal property, not a treasure, must return it
to its former possessor. Should the possessor be not known, he must deliver
it immediately to the mayor of the town where the finding has been made.
-
The mayor shall publish (notice of it) in the usual form, for two successive
Sundays.
-
If the personal property found cannot be kept without injury or without causing
expenses which may greatly reduce its value, it shall be sold at public auction,
after eight days have elapsed from the second advertisement, without the owner
having appeared, and the proceeds shall be deposited.
-
After two years have elapsed from the date of the second publication, without
the owner having appeared, the thing found or its value shall be adjudged
to the finder of it.
-
He, or the owner as the case may be, shall be obliged to pay the expenses
caused.
-
-
Article 616
Should the owner appear, in due time, he shall be obliged to pay, as a reward to the person who found the thing, a tenth part
of the sum or of the value of the article found. When the value of article
exceeds 2,000 pesetas, the reward shall be reduced to one twentieth part thereof
in respect to any excess over that amount.
-
Article 617
Rights in respects to flotsam and jetsam, whatever their nature be, or in plants or herbs, grown on sea shore, are regulated by special laws.
-
Article 610
-
Title II
Donations
-
Chapter First
Nature of Donations
-
Article 618
Donation is an act of liberality by which any person disposes gratuitously of a thing in favor of another who accepts it.
-
Article 619
What is given to a person, on account of his merits or for services rendered to the donor, is also a donation, provided it does
not constitute a recoverable debt, and a donation is also what imposes upon
the donee a burden inferior to the amount donated.
-
Article 620
Donations which are to become effective upon the death of the donor partake of the nature of dispositions by last will and
shall be governed by the laws on testamentary succession.
-
Article 621
Donations which are to produce effects inter vivos shall be governed by the general provisions of contracts and obligations,
in whatever is not prescribed in this title.
-
Article 622
Donations having onerous causes, shall be regulated by the laws of contracts, and remunerative ones, by the provisions of the
present title, in respect to the part exceeding the value of the burden
imposed.
-
Article 623
A donation is perfected upon the donor having knowledge of its acceptance by the donee.
-
Article 618
-
Chapter Second
Persons Who Can Make or Receive Donations
-
Article 624
All persons who can contract and dispose of their property may make donations.
-
Article 625
All persons, who are not especially incapacitated from it by law, may accept donations.
-
Article 626
Persons, who cannot contract, cannot accept conditional or onerous donations, without the intervention of their lawful representative.
-
Article 627
Donations made to persons, conceived but yet unborn, may be accepted
by the persons who should lawfully represent them, were they already born.
-
Article 628
Donations made to incapable persons are null and void, though made in a concealed way, under the appearance of another contract,
by intermediate persons.
-
Article 629
A donation does not bind the donor nor produce any effect until it is accepted.
-
Article 630
The donee shall accept the donation personally or by a person authorized by a special power for such purpose or having a general
and sufficient power of attorney, otherwise it shall be null.
-
Article 631
Persons accepting a donation, in behalf of others who cannot accept it personally, are obliged to obtain the notification
and annotation to which art. 633 refers.
-
Article 632
Donations of personal property may be made verbally or in writing. Verbal donations require the simultaneous delivery of the
thing donated. In default of this requirement, the donation shall produce
no effect, unless made in writing and the acceptance is shown in the same
form.
-
Article 633
In order that the donation of real property may be valid, it shall be made in a public deed and have expressed therein, severally,
the property donated, and the amount of the encumbrances which the donee
is obliged to satisfy.
-
The acceptance may be made in the same deed of donation or in a distinct
one; but it shall produce no effects, unless made during the life of the
donor.
-
When made in a distinct deed, notice of the acceptance shall be given to
the donor, in an authentic manner, and this step shall be annotated in both
deeds.
-
-
Article 624
-
Chapter Third
Effects and Limitations of Donations
-
Article 634
A donation may comprise all the actual property of the donor or
a part of it, provided he reserves in fee- simple or in usufruct, what is required for his support in a condition
con spending to his circumstances.
-
Article 635
A donation cannot embrace future property. As future property is considered that which the donor cannot dispose of at the time of the donation.
-
Article 636
Notwithstanding, what is provided in art. 634, no person can give or receive, by donation, more than what he can give or receive
by testament.
-
Article 637
When a donation has been made to several persons conjointly, it shall be understood as in equal shares; and there shall be
among them no right of accretion, unless the donor has otherwise ordered.
-
Article 638
The donee is subrogated to all the rights and actions which, in case of eviction, should belong to the donor. The latter
on his part shall not be bound to warrant the things donated, unless the
donation is onerous, in which case, the donor shall be liable for the eviction
to the amount of the encumbrance.
-
Article 639
The donor can reserve to himself the right to dispose of some of the property donated or of some amount as a lien over it; but
should he die without making use of this right, the property or the sum,
which the donor reserved, shall belong to the donee.
-
Article 640
The ownership of a thing can also be donated to a person, and its usufruct to another or others, under the limitations established
by art., 781 of this Code.
-
Article 641
The reversion in favor of the donor only, in any case and under any circumstances , can also be validly established, but
not in favor of other persons, except in the same cases and under equal
limitations, as provided for in this Code for testamentary substitutions.
-
Article 642
When the donation has been made/ imposing on the donee the duty of paying the debts of the donor, if the clause contained no further declaration, it shall be understood that the donee is only bound to pay those contracted before the donation.
-
Article 643
When there is no stipulation about the payment of debts, the donee
shall be liable for them only in case that the donation has been made in
fraud of the creditors.
-
Article 634
-
Chapter Fourth
Revocation and Reduction of Donations
-
Article 644
Every donation inter vivos made by a person having no legitimate
children nor descendants nor legitimated by subsequent marriage, becomes
revoked by the mere fact of the occurrence of any of the following cases:
-
Article 645
When the donation is rescinded by the supervention of children, the things donated shall be returned to the donor, or the value
thereof, if the donee has sold them.
-
Article 646
The action of revocation by supervention of children shall be prescribed upon the lapse of five years, to be counted from the
birth of the last child or from the legitimation or recognition, or from
the time news was received of the existence of the child believed dead.
-
Article 647
The donation shall be revoked on petition of the donor, when the donee has not complied with some of the conditions imposed
upon him by the donor.
-
Article 648
Donations may also be revoked, on petition of the donor, for causes of ingratitude in the following cases:
-
1
When the donee commits any crime against the person the honor, or the
property, of the donor.
-
2
When the donee charges the donor with any of the crimes which give cause to official proceedings or public accusation, even
if he proves it; unless the crime has been committed against the donee himself,
his wife, or the children under his authority.
-
3
When the donee unduly refuses him support.
-
1
-
Article 649
When a donation is revoked for causes of ingratitude, the transfers
or mortgages, executed before the annotation of the complaint for revocation
in the Registry of Property, shall, however, remain valid.
-
Article 650
In the cases, to which the first paragraph of the preceding article refers, the donor shall have a right to exact from the
donee the value of the things sold, which he cannot recover from third parties,
or the sum for which they have been mortgaged.
-
Article 651
When the donation is revoked by any of the causes, stated in art. 644 or for ingratitude, or when it shall be reduced on account
of being inofficious, the donee shall not return the fruits, except from
the date of the presentation of the complaint.
-
Article 652
The action granted to the donor for causes of ingratitude cannot be renounced in advance. This action is prescribed, after
the lapse of one year to be counted from the time the donor has knowledge
of the fact and has been able to enforce the action.
-
Article 653
This action shall not be transmitted to the heirs of the donor,
if he did not enforce it when he could have done so.
-
Article 654
Donations which, in accordance with the provisions of art. 636, are found to be inofficious, after computing the net value
of the property of the donor, at the time of his death, shall be reduced
as to the excess, but this reduction shall not prevent them from being effectual
during the life of the donor, nor the donee from appropriating fruits to
his own use.
-
Article 655
The reduction of donations can be claimed only by the persons who
are entitled to legitime or an aliquot part of the estate, and their heirs,
or persons holding rights under them.
-
Persons comprised in the preceding article cannot renounce this right during
the life of the donor, neither by express declaration nor by giving their
consent to the donation.
-
The donees, the legatees who are not to receive an aliquot part, and the
creditors of the decedent, cannot ask for this reduction or be benefited
by it.
-
-
Article 656
When there are two or more donations, and all cannot be covered by the free part of the estate, those of later date shall either be cancelled or reduced as to the excessive part.
-
Article 644
-
Chapter First
Nature of Donations
-
Title III
Successions
-
General Provisions
-
Article 657
The rights to the succession of a person are transmitted from the moment of his death.
-
Article 658
Succession is bestowed, either by the will of a man as expressed in his testament or, in its default, by disposition of law.
-
Article 659
Inheritance embraces all the property, rights, and obligations of a person, which are not extinguished by his death.
-
Article 660
An heir is a person inheriting under an universal title; and a legatee, one inheriting under a special title.
-
Article 661
Heirs succeed the decedent in all his rights and obligations by the mere fact of his death.
-
Article 657
-
Chapter First
Testaments
-
Section First
Capacity to Dispose by Testament
-
Article 662
All persons who are not expressly forbidden by law may make a testament.
-
Article 663
The following are incapable of making testaments:
-
Article 664
A testament made before mental alienation is valid.
-
Article 665
Whenever a lunatic pretends to make a testament, during a lucid interval, the Notary shall appoint two physicians who shall examine him previously, and he shall not execute the testament unless they assume the responsibility for the capacity of the testator, and they shall testify to their opinion in the testament, which shall be subscribed by the physicians besides the witnesses.
-
Article 666
For the appreciation of the capacity of the testator, attention shall be exclusively given to his condition at the time of the
execution of the testament.
-
Article 662
-
Section Second
Testaments in General
-
Article 667
The act by which a person disposes of all his property or of a part of it, to take effect after his death, is called a testament (or will).
-
Article 668
The testator can dispose of his property, either under title of inheritance or under that of legacy.
-
Article 669
Two or more persons cannot make a testament conjointly or, in the same instrument, either for their reciprocal benefit
or for the benefit of a third party.
-
Article 670
A testament is absolutely a personal act, the making of it, either wholly or partially, cannot be left to the discretion of
a third party nor can it be made by a trustee or attorney.
-
Article 671
The testator may commit to a third party the distribution of the sums which he may leave in general to specified classes,
such as relatives, the poor, or beneficent institutions, and also the
election of the persons or institutions to which such sums are applied.
-
Article 672
Any disposition about the institution of heir, bequest, or legacy, made by the testator, referring to memoranda or private
papers which after his death may appear in his domicil or out of it, shall
be null and void, if such memoranda or papers do not contain all the requirements
provided by law for holographic testaments.
-
Article 673
A testament executed under duress, deceit or fraud shall be null and void.
-
Article 674
He, who by deceit, fraud, or violence prevents a person, of whom he is the intestate heir, from freely executing his last
will, shall be deprived of his rights to the inheritance and shall besides
be criminally liable for such acts.
-
Article 675
Every testamentary disposition shall be understood in the literal sense of its words, unless it clearly appears that the
will of the testator was otherwise. In case of doubt, that which appears
nearest in accordance with the intent of the testator, according to the
tenor of the same testament, shall be observed.
-
Article 667
-
Section Third
Form of Testaments
-
Article 676
Testaments are either ordinary or special.
-
Article 677
Military and maritime testaments and testaments executed in foreign countries are considered as special.
-
Article 678
A testament is called holographic when the testator writes it in his own hand in the form and with the requisites specified in art. 688.
-
Article 679
A testament is called open whenever the testator expresses his last will in the presence of the persons who must authorize
the act, and when they become informed of its dispositions.
-
Article 680
A testament is called secret (cerrado) when the testator, without revealing his last will, declares that it is contained in the writing which he presents to the persons who are to authorize the act.
-
Article 681
The following cannot be witnesses to testaments:
-
1
Women, with the exception of what is provided in art. 701.
-
2
Males, under age, with the same exception.
-
3
Persons who are not residents or domiciled in the place of the execution
thereof, unless in the cases excepted by law.
-
4
Blind persons and those totally deaf and dumb.
-
5
Persons who do not understand the language of the testator.
-
6
Persons of unsound mind.
-
7
Persons who have been condemned for the crimes of forgery of public
or private documents, for perjury, and those suffering the penality of
civil interdiction.
-
8
Clerks, amanuenses, servants, or relatives within the fourth degree
of consanguinity or within the second of affinity of the Notary who authorized
the testament.
-
1
-
Article 682
Neither can be witnesses to an open testament, the heirs and legatees instituted in it, nor the relatives of the same, within
the fourth degree of consanguinity or second of affinity.
-
Article 683
In order that a witness may be declared disqualified, it is necessary that the cause of his incapacity should have existed at the time of the execution of the testament.
-
Article 684
The presence of two interpreters, chosen by the testator to translate his disposition into Spanish, is required for making
a testament in a foreign language. Such testament must be written in the
two languages.
-
Article 685
The Notary and two of the witnesses who authorized the testament must personally know the testator, and should they not know him, such person shall be identified by two witnesses
who know him and are known to the Notary and to the instrumental witnesses.
The Notary and the witnesses shall also assure themselves that in their
opinion the testator has the legal capacity required to make a testament.
-
Article 686
When it is not possible to identify the person of the testator, in the manner provided by the preceding article, this circumstance
shall be stated by the Notary or, in default thereof, by the witnesses
who shall state any details about the documents which the testator may
present for such purpose, and give a personal description of the testator.
-
Article 687
Any testament, in the execution of which, the formalities, respectively established in this chapter, have not been observed,
shall be null and void.
-
Article 676
-
Section Fourth
Holographic Testaments
-
Article 688
Holographic testaments can only be executed by persons of lawful age.
-
In order that this testament should be valid, it shall be drawn on stamped
paper, corresponding to the year of its execution, and be written all
over and signed by the testator with specification of the year, month,
and day of its execution.
-
When it contains words erased, corrected, or between lines, the testator
must correct them under his own hand.
-
Foreigners may execute holographic testaments in their own language.
-
-
Article 689
Holographic testaments shall be protocolled by presenting them for this purpose to the Judge of First Instance of the
last domicil of the testator, or of the place where he died, within five
years to be counted from the day of his death. They shall not be valid
without this requisite.
-
Article 690
The person, in whose hands such testament has been deposited, shall present it to the court, as soon as he receives
notice of the death of the testator, and should he not do it within ten
days next following, he shall be liable for the damages and injury which
may be caused by his delay.
-
Article 691
After the holographic testament has been presented and the death of the testator has been proven, the Judge shall open it,
if within a closed cover, and shall rubricate, together with the Notary,
all the leaves and shall prove its identity by three witnesses who know
the hand-writing and subscription of the testator, and who depose that
they have no reasonable doubt whatever that the testament is written and
subscribed by the testator's own hand.
-
Article 692
For the carrying out of the proceedings, stated in the preceding article, and, as soon as possible, shall be summoned: the
surviving consort, if any, the legitimate ascendants and descendants of
the testator, and, in default of all of these, his brothers.
-
When these persons do not reside within the district, or their existence
is unknown, or if they are minor or incapables, without legitimate representations,
the Public Attorney shall be summoned.
-
Persons summoned may be present at the carrying out of such proceedings
and verbally may make, at the time, the proper observations about the
genuineness of the testament.
-
-
Article 693
When the Judge considers that the identity of the testament has been proven, he shall order that it be protocolled, together
with the proceedings taken, in the Registry of the corresponding Notary, who shall give to the interested parties the copies or authenticated
copies which may be proper. In all other cases he shall refuse to protocol
it.
-
Article 688
-
Section Fifth
Open Testaments
-
Article 694
Open testaments shall be executed before a Notary, qualified to act in the place of its execution, and three competent
witnesses who can see and understand the testator and of whom one of which,
at least, knows how and is able to write.
-
Article 695
The testator shall state his last wishes to the Notary and to the witnesses. After the testament is drawn up in accordance
with them, specifying the place, year, month, day, and hour of its execution,
it shall be read aloud in order that the testator may declare, if it agrees
with his will. If so, it shall be subscribed to immediately by the testator
and the witnesses who are able to do so.
-
Should the testator declare that he does not know how or cannot subscribe
it, one of the instrumental witnesses or any other person shall do it
for him at his request, and the Notary shall certify to it. The same thing
shall be done when any one of the witnesses is not able to sign.
-
The Notary shall always state that in his judgment the testator has the
legal capacity required for executing the testament.
-
-
Article 696
When the testator, who intends to make an open testament, presents his testamentary dispositions in writing, the Notary
shall draw up the testament in accordance with them, and shall read it
aloud in the presence of the witnesses, so that the testator may declare
if its contents are the expression of his last will.
-
Article 697
A person, who is absolutely deaf, shall read his testament himself; if he does not know how or cannot, he shall appoint
two persons, who shall read it in his name always in the presence of the
witnesses and of the Notary.
-
Article 698
When the testator is blind, the testament shall be read twice, once by the Notary, as provided by art. 695, and the other
time in the same manner by one of the witnesses or any other person appointed
by the testator.
-
Article 699
All the formalities, provided in this section, shall be made in
a single act, and no interruption shall be allowed, except such a one
as may be caused by a momentary incident.
-
Article 700
When the testator is in imminent danger of death, the testament may be executed before five competent witnesses without
the necessity of a Notary.
-
Article 701
In case of epidemics, the testament shall also be executed, without intervention of a Notary , before three witnesses, over
sixteen years of age, either male or female.
-
Article 702
In the cases of the two preceding articles, the testament shall be written when possible; when not possible, the testament
shall be valid, although the witnesses do not know how to write.
-
Article 703
The testaments, executed in accordance with the provisions of the three preceding articles, shall become void, if two
months have elapsed after the testator is out of danger of death or the
epidemic has ceased.
-
Article 704
Testaments, executed without the authorization of a Notary, shall be void, if they are not afterwards reduced to a public
deed and protocolled in the form prescribed by the Law of Civil Procedure.
-
Article 705
When an open testament is declared void for causes of non-compliance with the solemnities established for each case, the
Notary authorizing it shall be responsible for the damages and injuries
which may arise, if the fault is a result of his bad faith or by inexcusable
negligence or ignorance.
-
Article 694
-
Section Sixth
Secret Testaments
-
Article 706
A secret testament may be written by the testator or by any other
person, at his request, on common paper, stating the place, day, month, and year in which it has been written.
-
When the testator writes it in his own hand, he shall rubricate every
sheet and set his signature at the end, after specifying all the words
corrected, scratched or written between lines.
-
Should any other person write it, at his request, the testator shall put
his full subscription on every sheet and at the end of the testament.
-
When the testator does not know how, or cannot subscribe his name, another
person, at his request, shall do it for him, and shall also countersign
every sheet, stating the cause of the testator's inability.
-
-
Article 707
In the execution of the secret testament, the following solemnities shall be observed:
-
1
The paper on which the testament is drawn shall be placed within a closed and sealed cover in such a manner that the former cannot be taken out without tearing the latter.
-
2
The testator shall appear with\" the testament closed and sealed, or shall close and seal it at the time in the presence of the Notary, who is to authorize it, and of five competent witnesses, of whom three, at least, shall be able to sign.
-
3
The testator shall declare, in the presence of the Notary and the witnesses, that the cover which he presents contains his testament, stating if it is written, subscribed, and signed by him, or if written in another's hand, and subscribed by him at the end and on all of the leaves,or if, because he does not know how or cannot subscribe it, another person has done it for him, at his request.
-
4
On the cover of the testament, the Notary shall write the appropriate minutes of its execution, specifying the number and marks of the seals with which it is closed, and shall certify to the compliance with the above mentioned solemnities, to his knowledge of the testator or of the identification of his person, in the manner provided by arts. 685, and 686, and to the testator having, in his judgment, the legal capacity required for executing a testament.
-
5
After the minutes have been drawn up and read, they shall be subscribed by the testator and the witnesses who know how to sign, and the Notary shall authorize them with his mark and subscription.
-
6
This circumstance shall also be expressed in the minutes, besides the place, hour, day, month, and year of its execution."
-
1
-
Article 708
Blind persons, and those who do not know how or cannot read shall not make a secret testament.
-
Article 709
Deaf and dumb persons and those who cannot speak, but who are able to write, may execute a secret testament, if the
following conditions are observed:
-
1
The testament shall be wholly written and subscribed by the testator,
and the place, day, month, and year stated.
-
2
On presenting it, the testator shall write on the upper part of the
cover, in the presence of the Notary and five witnesses, that such envelope
contains his testament and that it is written and subscribed by him.
-
3
After what is written by the testator, the minutes of execution shall
be noted and the Notary shall certify to the compliance with the provisions
of the preceding number, and of all other provisions of art. 707, in so
far as they may apply to the case.
-
1
-
Article 710
After the secret testament is certified to, the Notary shall deliver it to the testator, after filing in the secret protocol a certified copy of the execution.
-
Article 711
The testator may keep the secret testament in his possession or entrust it to the custody of a person in whom he may have
confidence or deposit it in the hands of the authorizing Notary for safe
keeping in his archives.
-
In this last case, the Notary shall give a receipt to the testator, and
shall note in his secret protocol, on the margin or at the foot of the
minutes of the execution, that the testament remains in his hands. Should
the testator afterwards receive it back, he shall sign a receipt at the
foot of such a note.
-
-
Article 712
The Notary or a person having in his possession a secret testament shall present it to a competent judge as soon as he learns
of the death of the testator.
-
Article 713
He, who, with malice, fails to present the secret testament, which is in his keeping, within the term fixed by the second
paragraph of the preceding article, besides the responsibility stated
in it, shall lose all right to the inheritance, should he have it as intestate
heir, or as heir or legatee by the testament.
-
The same penalty shall be incurred by those who maliciously abstract the
secret testament from the residence of the testator or from that of the
person who keeps it in custody or deposit or by him who conceals, tears
or renders it useless, in any other way, without being relieved from the proper criminal responsibility.
-
-
Article 714
For the opening and protocolling of a secret testament, the provisions of the Law of Civil Procedure shall be observed.
-
Article 715
The secret testament, in the execution of which, the formalities prescribed in this section have not been observed shall
be null and void, and the Notary who authorizes it shall be responsible
for the damages and injuries which may be caused, if it is proven that
the fault originated in malice, negligence or in inexcusable ignorance
on his part. It shall be valid, however, as an holographic will, if it
is written and subscribed all over by the testator and has the other conditions
required in such testaments.
-
Article 706
-
Section Seventh
Military Testaments
-
Article 716
In times of war, soldiers in the field, volunteers, hostages, prisoners, and other persons, employed in the army or following the same, may execute their testaments before any officer, having, at least, the rank of captain.
-
This provision applies to members of an army who are in a foreign country.
-
Should the testator be sick or wounded, he may execute it before the chaplain or physician attending him.
-
If he is with a detachment, before the person commanding, even if he be a non-commissioned officer.
-
In all the cases specified in this article, the presence of two competent witnesses shall always be necessary.
-
-
Article 717
All the persons, mentioned in the preceding articles, may also execute a secret testament before a staff officer (comisario dc guerra), who shall exercise in such cases the functions of a Notary, and then the provisions of art. 706 and the subsequent ones shall be observed.
-
Article 718
Testaments, executed in accordance with the two preceding articles, shall be forwarded, as soon as possible, to the general headquarters and by the latter to the Secretary of War.
-
If the testator has died, such Secretary shall forward the testament to
the Judge of the last domicil of the decedent, and, if unknown to him,
to the Senior Judge of Madrid, in order that he may officially summon
the heirs and other persons interested in the succession.
-
These latter shall request that it be reduced to a public deed, and be
protocolled in the form provided by the Code of Civil Procedure.
-
If the will is a secret one, the Judge shall officially proceed to open
it, in the manner provided by said law, after summoning and with the intervention
of the Public Attorney, and, after opening it, shall give notice of its
contents to the heirs and other persons concerned.
-
-
Article 719
Testaments, mentioned in art. 716, shall become null and void four months after the testator has ceased to be in a campaign.
-
Article 720
During a battle, assault, engagement, and, generally, in every approximate danger of an action of war, a military testament can be made by word of mouth before two witnesses.
-
But this testament shall become void, if the testator is saved from the danger in view of which it was made.
-
Even if he does not escape, the testament shall become void, if not formalized by the witnesses before the Auditor of War or a judicial official following the army, and then it shall be acted upon in the form provided in art. 718."
-
-
Article 721
When a military testament is secret, the provisions of arts. 706 and 707 shall be observed; but it shall be executed before
the officer and two witnesses, required by art. 716 for an open testament,
and all of them shall subscribe the minutes of the execution, as well
as the testator, if he is able to do so.
-
Article 716
-
Section Eighth
Maritime Testaments
-
Article 722
Testaments, either open or secret, of persons on board a ship
during a sea voyage, shall be executed, as follows:
-
When the vessel is a man-of-war, before the Paymaster or he who exercises
his functions, in the presence of two competent witnesses, who can see
and understand the testator. The Captain of the ship or the person occupying
his place shall besides vise it.
-
On merchant vessels, the Captain or his representative shall authorize
the testament with the assistance of two competent witnesses.
-
In both the first and second cases, the witnesses shall be selected from
the passengers, if any; but one of them, at least must be able to sign,
and he shall sign it in his own name and in the name of the testator,
if the latter does not know how or cannot do it.
-
When the testament is an open one, what is provided by art. 695 shall
besides be observed; and, if a secret one what is ordered by section sixth
of this chapter, excluding what refers to the number of witnesses, and
the intervention of the Notary.
-
-
Article 723
The testament of the Paymaster of a man-of-war and of the Captain of a merchant vessel, shall be authorized by those
who are to substitute them in their duties, and what is prescribed in
the preceding article shall, furthermore, be observed.
-
Article 724
Open testaments made on the high seas shall be kept in the custody of the Commander or the Captain and they shall be noted in the log-book.
-
Article 725
Should a ship arrive at a foreign port, where there is a diplomatic
or consular agent of Spain, the Commander of the man-of-war or the Captain
of the merchant vessel, shall deliver to said agent a copy of the open
testament or of the minutes of the execution of the secret one and of
the notes entered in the log-book.
-
The copy of the testament or of the minutes must bear the same signatures
as the original, if the persons who signed them are alive and on board;
in other cases, they shall be authorized by the Paymaster or Captain who
received the testament or the one acting in his place, and those remaining on board who took part
in the testament shall also sign it.
-
The diplomatic or consular Agent shall have the proceedings of the delivery
put in writing, and having closed and sealed the copy of the testament
or of the minutes of its execution, if secret, he shall forward them with
a copy of the entry in the log-book, in the proper way, to the Secretary of the Navy who shall deposit
them in the archives of his office.
-
The Commander or Captain, who shall deliver them, shall obtain from the
diplomatic or consular Agent a certificate of having done so, and shall
enter it in the log-book.
-
-
Article 726
When the vessel, either a merchantman or a man-of-war, arrives
at the first port of the Kingdom, the Commander or Captain shall deliver
the original testament, closed and sealed, to the local naval authority,
with a copy of the entry made in the log-book, and, if the testator has
died, in addition, a certificate proving it.
-
Article 727
When the testator has died and the testament is open, the Secretary of the Navy shall act, as provided by art. 718.
-
Article 728
When the testament has been executed by a foreigner, on board of a Spanish vessel, the Secretary of the Navy shall forward the testament to the Secretary of State in order that
it may be forwarded, in the proper way, through diplomatic channels.
-
Article 729
When the testament is holographic and the testator dies during the voyage, the Commander or Captain shall take possession
of the testament for the purpose of keeping it in custody, entering this
fact in the log-book, and shall deliver the same to the local naval authority,
in the form and for the effects provided in the preceding article, when
the vessel arrives at the first port of the Kingdom.
-
Article 730
Open and secret testaments, executed in accordance with the provisions of this section, shall be void after the lapse of
four months from the day on which the testator landed at a place where
he could make a testament in ordinary form.
-
Article 731
When in danger of shipwreck, the provisions of art. 720 shall apply to the crews and passengers of war or merchant vessels.
-
Article 722
-
Section Ninth
Testaments Made in Foreign Countries
-
Article 732
Spaniards may make testaments out of the national territory, submitting themselves to the forms established by
the laws of the country in which they may be.
-
They may also make testaments on the high seas, during their passage
on a foreign vessel, in accordance with the laws of the country to which
the ship belongs.
-
They may also make an holographic testament in accordance with art. 688,
omitting the requirement of stamped paper, even in countries where the
laws do not recognize such testaments.
-
-
Article 733
Joint testaments, forbidden by art. 669, shall not be valid in Spain when executed by Spaniards in a foreign country, even when
the laws of the country, where they have been executed, authorized them.
-
Article 734
Spaniards who are in foreign countries may also execute their testaments, either open or secret, before the diplomatic
or consular Agent of Spain, residing at the place of their execution.
-
Article 735
The diplomatic or consular Agent shall forward a copy of the open testament, or of the act of execution of the secret testament, authorized under his hand and seal, to the Department of State to be deposited in its archives.
-
Article 736
The diplomatic or consular Agent, in whose hands a Spaniard may have deposited his holographic or secret testament, shall
forward it to the Department of State as soon as the testator dies together
with the certificate of the death.
-
Article 732
-
Section Tenth
Revocation and Inefficiency of Testaments
-
Article 737
All testamentary dispositions are essentially revocable, even when the testator states in the testament that his wish
or resolution shall not be revoked.
-
Article 738
A testament cannot be revoked, wholly or in part, unless the same solemnities required for making it are observed in respect
thereto.
-
Article 739
A former testament becomes, revoked by law by a later and perfect one, unless the testator states in the latter his wish
of leaving the former subsisting in whole or in part.
-
Article 740
The revocation shall be effective, even when the second testament becomes null by the incapacity of the heir or of the
legatees appointed in it, or by the renunciation of the former or the
latter.
-
Article 741
The recognition of an illegitimate child does not lose its force, even when the testament in which it was made is revoked.
-
Article 742
A secret testament, found in the domicil of the testator with
the cover torn or the seals broken or the signatures authorizing it effaced,
erased or corrected is presumed revoked.
-
This testament, however, shall be valid when it may be proven that such
damage has been caused without the wish or knowledge of the testator,
or when he was in an insane condition, but, if the cover is found torn
and the seals broken, it shall be necessary besides to prove the genuineness
of the testament in order that it may be valid.
-
When the testament is found in the hands of another person, it shall be
understood that any impairment was caused by such person, and the testament
shall not be valid, unless its authenticity is proven, if the cover is
torn or the seals broken; and if the former and latter are found intact,
but the signatures effaced, erased or corrected, then the testament shall
be valid, unless it is proven that it has been delivered in this condition
by the testator himself.
-
-
Article 743
Testaments shall become void or testamentary provisions ineffective, in whole or in part, only in the cases expressly
provided for in this Code.
-
Article 737
-
Section First
Capacity to Dispose by Testament
-
Chapter Second
Inheritances
-
Section First
Capacity For Succession Under or Without a Testament
-
Article 744
All persons not incapacitated by law may succeed under or without a testament.
-
Article 745
The following are incapable of succeeding:
-
Article 746
Church and church chapters, provincial diputations, provinces, city councils, municipalities, institutions for the sick, for
beneficence or for public instruction, associations authorized or recognized
by law, and all other juridical persons can acquire by testament in accordance
with what is provided in art. 38.
-
Article 747
When the testator disposes of the whole or part of his property
for sufferages and pious works for the benefit of his soul and does it
in an indeterminate manner and without specifying how it shall be applied,
the executors shall sell the property and distribute the proceeds, giving one half of it to the Diocesan to be employed
for such sufferages and the care and necessities of the church, and the
other half to the corresponding civil governor for the beneficent institutions of the domicil of the decedent, and, in default
of such, for those of the province.
-
Article 748
A designation made in favor of a public institution, under condition or imposing a lien upon it, shall be valid only when approved
by the government.
-
Article 749
Dispositions made in favor of the poor, in general, without designating
persons or towns, shall be limited to those of the domicil of the testator
at the time of his death, if it is not clearly shown that his will was
otherwise.
-
The classification (calificacion) of the poor and distribution of the
property shall be made by the person appointed by the testator, in default
of such person, by the executors, and if there are none, by the curate,
the Mayor, and the Municipal Judge, who shall decide by a majority of
votes any doubts which may arise.
-
The same shall be done when the testator has disposed of his property
in favor of the poor of a certain parish or town.
-
-
Article 750
Every disposition in favor of an uncertain person shall be null and void, unless by some event the person may become certain.
-
Article 751
A disposition made generically in favor of the relatives of the testator is understood to be made in favor of those who
stand in the nearest degree.
-
Article 752
Testamentary dispositions made by the testator, during his last illness in favor of the priest who confessed him during
it, of the relatives of the latter within the fourth degree, or of his
church, chapter community or institute shall not be valid.
-
Article 753
Neither shall be valid the testamentary dispositions of the ward in favor of his guardian, made before the final accounts of
the guardian have been approved, even when the testator dies after such
approval.
-
Article 754
The testator cannot dispose of the whole or a part of his estate in favor of the Notary who authorizes his testament, or
of the latter's wife and relatives by consanguinity or affinity within
the fourth degree, with the exception stated in art. 682.
-
Article 755
A testamentary disposition in favor of an incapable person, though concealed under the form of an onerous contract or made
in favor of an intermediate person, shall be null and void.
-
Article 756
The following are incapable of succeeding on account of unworthiness:
-
1
Parents who have abandoned their children, or prostituted their daughters, or made attempts against their virtue.
-
2
Persons condemned in a trial for having made attempts against the life of the testator, his consort, and his descendants or ascendants.
When the offender is a forced heir, he shall lose his ligitime.
-
3
He who has accused the testator of a crime for which the law imposes an afflictive penalty, when the accusation is declared as calumnious.
-
4
The heir of full age, who knowing of the violent death of the testator, has not denounced it to the courts within a month, unless p'roper judicial proceedings have already been taken ex officio. This prohibition shall cease in cases in which, according to law, there is no obligation to make an accusation.
-
5
A person condemned at a trial for adultery with the wife of the testator.
-
6
He, who by menaces, fraud or violence forces the testator to make a testament or to alter it.
-
7
He, who by the same means, prevents another from making a testament or from revoking one already made, or who forges, conceals or alters a later one."
-
1
-
Article 757
The causes of indignity shall produce no effect, when the testator knew them at the time of making the testament or, if after
having been informed of them, has pardoned the same by a public instrument.
-
Article 758
For determining the capacity of the heir or legatee, the time of the death of the person whose succession is questioned shall
be taken into consideration.
-
In cases nos. 2, 3, and 5 of art. 756, it shall be necessary to wait until
the final sentence is rendered, and in no. 4, until the month fixed for
the accusation has elapsed.
-
When the institution or legacy is conditional, the time for the fulfillment
of the condition shall, besides, be taken into consideration.
-
-
Article 759
The heir or legatee who dies before the condition is complied with, though he may survive the testator, transmits no rights
whatever to his heirs.
-
Article 760
Any person, incapable of succeeding, who, contrary to the prohibition of the preceding article, has entered into possession
of the hereditary property, shall be obliged to return it together with
its accessions and with all the rents and fruits he may have collected.
-
Article 761
If the person, excluded from inheritance on account of incapacity, is a son or descendant of the testator and he has children
or descendants, they shall acquire his rights to the legitime.
-
Article 762
No action shall be instituted for the declaration of incapacity, after five years have elapsed from the time that the incapable
took possession of the inheritance or legacy.
-
Article 744
-
Section Second
Institution of Heir
-
Article 763
A person who has no forced heirs may dispose by testament of all
his property or part of it in favor of any person having capacity to acquire it.
-
Article 764
A testament shall be valid, even when it does not contain the institution of an heir, or it does not include the whole of
the property, and although the person appointed does not accept the inheritance
or is incapable of inheriting.
-
Article 765
The heirs appointed, without designation of shares, shall inherit share and share alike.
-
Article 766
The voluntary heir, who dies before the testator, the incapable of inheriting, and he who renounces the inheritance, do not transmit any rights to their heirs, unless as provided
in arts. 761 and 857.
-
Article 767
The statement of a false cause for. the institution of an heir
or of the appointment of legatee shall be considered as not written, unless
it may appear from the testament that the testator would not have made
such institution or legacy, had he known the falseness of such cause.
-
Article 768
An heir to whom a certain and determined thing is left shall be considered as a legatee.
-
Article 769
When a testator appoints some heirs individually and other collectively, as when he says: "I institute as my heirs N and
N, and the children of N," those collectively appointed shall be considered
as individually appointed, unless it appears in a clear manner that the
will of the testator was otherwise.
-
Article 770
If the testator institutes his brothers, and he has some of full blood and others on the father's or mother's side only,
the inheritance shall be divided as in cases of intestacy.
-
Article 771
When the testator calls to the succession any person and his children, it shall be understood that all of them are instituted
simultaneously and not successively.
-
Article 772
The testator shall designate the heir, by his name and family
name; and when there are two having the same names, he must state some
circumstances through which the instituted heir may be known.
-
Article 773
An error in the name, family name, or qualities of the heir, shall not vitiate the institution when it may be possible, in
any other manner, to know with certainty who is the person appointed.
-
Article 763
-
Section Third
Substitution
-
Article 774
The testator may substitute one or more persons in the place of the instituted heir or heirs in the cases where
they may die before him or do not desire to or cannot accept the inheritance.
-
Article 775
Parents and other ascendants may appoint substitutes in place of their descendants of both sexes, under fourteen years of age, for the cases where they may die before attaining
such age.
-
Article 776
The ascendant may appoint a substitute for the descendant over fourteen years of age who has lawfully been declared incapable on account of unsound mind.
-
Article 777
The substitutions, to which the two preceding articles refer, in case the substitute has forced heirs, shall only be
valid in so far as they do not injure the legitimate rights of such heirs.
-
Article 778
Two or more persons can be substituted instead of a single one, contrariwise, a single person for two or more heirs.
-
Article 779
When the heirs are instituted in unequal portions and are reciprocally substituted, they shall have in the substitution
the same portions as in the institution , unless it may clearly appear
that the will of the testator was otherwise.
-
Article 780
The substitute shall be subject to the same charges and conditions as imposed upon the instituted, unless the testator has
expressly disposed to the contrary or when the burdens or conditions may
be merely personal, respecting the heir instituted.
-
Article 781
Substitutions in trust (fideicomisarias), by virtue of which the heir is charged with keeping and transmitting to a third
party the whole or a part of the inheritance, shall be valid, and shall
be effective, provided, they do not go beyond the second degree or when
made in favor of persons living at the time of the death of the testator.
-
Article 782
Substitutions in trust can never impair the legitime. Should they fall upon the third share intended for advantages (mejora), they can be made only in favor of the descendants.
-
Article 783
To be valid, callings to the substitutions in trust, shall be expressly made.
-
Article 784
The fidei-commissary shall acquire rights to the succession upon the death of the testator, even when he dies before the
fiduciary. The rights of the former shall pass to his heirs.
-
Article 785
No effects shall be produced by:
-
1
Fidei-commissary substitutions not made in an express manner, either
by giving them such a name or by imposing upon the substitute the absolute
obligation of delivering the property to a second heir.
-
2
Dispositions containing perpetual prohibitions of alienation, and even
a temporal one, when not within the limits provided in art. 781.
-
3
Those imposing upon the heir the charge of paying a certain rent or
pension to various persons in succession, beyond the second degree.
-
4
Those, the object of which is to leave to a person the whole or part
of the estate, for the purpose of applying or investing the same, according
to secret instructions communicated to him by the testator.
-
1
-
Article 786
The nullity of a fidei-commissary substitution shall not cause injury, either to the validity of the institution or to the
heirs first called; the fidei-commissary clause shall simply be considered
as not written (in such cases).
-
Article 787
The disposition by which the testator leaves the whole or a part of the inheritance to a person, and the usufruct to another,
shall be valid. If various persons are called to the usufruct, not simultaneously,
but in succession, the provisions of art. 781 shall be followed.
-
Article 788
The disposition imposing upon the heir the duty of periodically investing certain sums for beneficent purposes, as dowers
for poor maidens, pensions for students, or in favor of the poor or for
any institution of beneficence, or of public instruction, shall be valid
under the following conditions:
-
When the charge is imposed on real property and is temporal, the heir
or heirs may dispose of the encumbered property, but the lien shall not
cease until its inscription is cancelled.
-
When the charge is perpetual, the heir can capitalize it and invest the
capital at interest, secured by a first and sufficient mortgage.
-
The capitalization and investment of the capital shall be made with the
intervention of the civil governor of the province, and after a hearing
of the Public Attorney.
-
In any event, when the testator has not established an order for the administration
and application of the beneficent legacy, the administrative authority,
who may be competent according to law, shall do it.
-
-
Article 789
All that is provided in this chapter in respect to heirs shall also apply to legatees.
-
Article 774
-
Section Fourth
Institution of Heirs; and Legacies Conditional or For a Term
-
Article 790
Testamentary dispositions, either by universal or special title, may be made conditionally.
-
Article 791
Conditions imposed upon heirs and legatees shall be governed by the rules provided for conditional obligations in whatever
is not prescribed in this section.
-
Article 792
Impossible conditions and those contrary to law and good morals shall be considered as not existing and shall in no way injure
the heir or legatee, even when the testator disposes otherwise.
-
Article 793
The absolute condition of not contracting a first or subsequent
marriage shall be considered as not existing, unless such condition has
been imposed on the widower or widow by the deceased consort, or by the
ascendants or descendants of the same.
-
Article 794
A disposition made under condition that the heir or legatee shall make in his testament some disposition in favor of the
testator or of a third party shall be void.
-
Article 795
A purely potestative condition imposed on the heir or legatee shall be complied with by them when, after the death of the
testator, they are informed of it.
-
Article 796
When the condition is casual or mixed, it shall be sufficient if it be realized or complied with at any time during the life
or after the death of the testator, unless he has ordered otherwise.
-
Article 797
The statement of the object of the institution or of the legacy or the application to be given to what the testator has left
or the lien imposed by the same shall not be considered as a condition,
unless it may appear that such was his will.
-
Article 798
When, without the fault or a personal act of the heir or legatee, the institution or the legacy, to which the preceding
article refers, cannot take place in the very terms ordered by the testator,
it shall be complied with in terms as nearly analogous and in conformity
with his will as possible.
-
Article 799
Suspensive conditions do not prevent the heir or legatee from acquiring his or her respective rights and transmitting them
to their heirs, even before the fulfillment of such conditions.
-
Article 800
When the potestative condition, imposed on the heir or legatee, is a negative one, or of not giving or not doing (a certain
thing), they shall comply with it by giving bonds that they will not do
or will not give what was forbidden by the testator, and, in case of contravention,
that they will refund what they have received with the fruits and interest thereon.
-
Article 801
When the heir is instituted under a suspensive condition, the estate shall be placed in administration until the condition is complied with or until there is a certainty that it cannot be fulfilled.
-
Article 802
The administration, to which the preceding article refers, shall be confided to the heir or heirs, unconditionally instituted,
when among them and the conditional heir, the right of accretion exists.
The same shall be understood in respect to legatees.
-
Article 803
When the conditional heir has no co-heirs or when the right of accretion does not exist among them, he shall take charge
of the administration upon giving bond.
-
Article 804
Administrators shall have the same rights and obligations as those who administer the property of an absentee.
-
Article 805
The designation of the day or time on which the effect of the institution of heir or legatee shall begin or be determined
shall be valid.
-
Article 790
-
Section Fifth
Legitimes
-
Article 806
Legitime is that part of the property of which the testator cannot
dispose because the law has reserved it for certain heirs, called, on that account, forced heirs.
-
Article 807
Forced heirs are:
-
1
Legitimate children and descendants in reference to their legitimate
parents and ascendants.
-
2
In default of the preceding, the legitimate parents and ascendants
in reference to their legitimate children and descendants.
-
3
The widower or widow, the natural children legally recognized, and the father or the mother of the same, in the form and
proportion established by arts. 834, 835, 836, 837, 840, 841, 842, and
-
1
-
Article 808
The legitime of legitimate children and descendants is constituted
by the two third parts of the hereditary estate of the father and of the
mother.
-
Article 809
The legitime of the parents or ascendants is constituted by one half of the hereditary estate of the children and descendants. The latter may freely dispose of the other half, with the exception of what is established in art. 836.
-
Article 810
The legitime, reserved for the parents, shall be divided between both of them equally; when one of the parents is dead,
the surviving shall take the whole of it.
-
When the testator leaves neither father nor mother, but ascendants in
the same degree in the paternal or maternal line, the estate shall be
divided share and share alike between both lines. When the ascendants
are of a different degree, the legitime shall wholly belong to the nearest
ones of either line.
-
-
Article 811
The ascendant who inherits from his descendant property, acquired by the latter under gratuitous title from another ascendant
or from a brother, shall be obliged to reserved such property, acquired
by ministry of the law, in favor of the relatives within the third degree,
belonging to the line from which such property came to him.
-
Article 812
Ascendants succeed, to the exclusion of all other persons, to things given by them to their children or descendants, who
died without issue, when the very objects donated are comprised in the
estate. If they have been alienated, they shall succeed in all the actions
which the donees have in respect to them, and in the value, if they have
been sold or in the property substituting them, if they were bartered
or exchanged.
-
Article 813
A testator cannot deprive the heirs of the legitime, except in the cases expressly determined by law.
-
Article 814
The preterition of one or of all of the forced heirs in the direct
line, either living, at the time of the execution of the testament, or
born after the death of the testator, shall void the institution of heir.
But the legacies and advantages shall be valid, in so far as they are not inofficious.
-
Article 815
The forced heir to whom the testator has left, for any cause whatever, less than the legitime pertaining to him may claim
the completion of the same.
-
Article 816
All renunciations or compromises, about the future legitime, among the persons owing it and their forced heirs, are null
and void, and the latter can claim it upon the death of the former, but
they shall bring to collation whatever they have received on account of
renunciations or compromises.
-
Article 817
Testamentary dispositions, diminishing the legitime of forced heirs, shall be reduced on petition of the same in so far as
they are inofficious or excessive.
-
Article 818
To determine the legitime, consideration shall be given to the value of the property remaining at the death of the testator,
after deducting all debts and charges, without comprising in them those
imposed by the testament To the net value of the testamentary estate shall be added the value of
all the collationable donations, made by the same testator at the time
at which they were made.
-
Article 819
Donations made to children, not considered as advantages, shall
be imputed to their legitime.
-
Article 820
After the legitime is fixed, in accordance with the two preceding articles, the reduction shall be made, as follows :
-
1
Donations shall be respected in so far as the legitime can be covered, reducing or voiding, if needs be, the legacies made in the testament
-
2
Such reductions shall be made pro rata, without any distinction whatever.
-
3
When the legacy consists of an usufruct or annuity for life, the value of which may be considered greater than that of the disposable part, the forced heirs may choose between complying with the testamentary disposition or delivering to the legatee the part of the estate of which the testator could freely dispose."
-
1
-
Article 821
When the legacy, subject to reduction, consists of a tenement, not convenient of division, it shall go to the legatee, if the
reduction does not absorb one half of its value, and, in the contrary
case, to the forced heirs ; but one or the other shall refund to the opposite
party the respective balance in cash.
-
Article 822
When the heirs or legatees do not wish to make use of the rights, granted to them by the preceding article, the one of them
who has not such right may use it ; if he does not wish to do so, the
tenement shall be sold at public auction, on petition of any of the interested
parties.
-
Article 806
-
Section Sixth
Advantages (mejoras)
-
Article 823
The father or the mother may dispose of one of the two third parts, intended as legitime, in favor of one or more of their children or descendants.
-
Article 824
No liens shall be imposed upon the advantage other than those in favor of the forced heirs or their descendants.
-
Article 825
No donation by contract inter vivos, either simple or for onerous causes, in favor of children or descendants who are forced
heirs shall be considered as an advantage, unless the donor has expussly
declared his wish to give an advantage.
-
Article 826
The promise of giving or not giving an advantage, made in the public deed of a marriage contract (capitulaciones matrimoniales)
shall be valid.
-
Article 827
The avantage, even when made with delivery of the property, shall be revokable, unless made in a marriage contract or by
an onerous contract entered into with a third party.
-
Article 828
The bequest or legacy, made by the testator to one of the children or descendants, shall not be considered as an advantage,
unless the testator has expressly declared that such is his will or when
it cannot be included in the part at his free disposal.
-
Article 829
An advantage may be given in a specified thing.
-
Article 830
The authority to give advantages cannot be delegated to a third party.
-
Article 831
Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article in marriage contracts, it may be valid to agree that, when one
of the consorts dies intestate, the widower or widow, who has not contracted
a new marriage, may distribute, according to his or her prudent judgment,
the estate of the decedent, and give advantages in it to the children
in common, without damage to the legitimes and to the advantages given
by the decedent while alive.
-
Article 832
When the advantage has not been granted in specified things, it shall be paid out of the property of the inheritance, observing, in so far as it may be possible the rules established by arts. 1061 and 1062, in order to preserve the equality of the heirs in the distribution of the property.
-
Article 833
The legitimate son or descendant receiving an advantage may renounce the inheritance and accept the advantage.
-
Article 823
-
Section Seventh
Right of the Surviving Consort
-
Article 834
The widower or widow, who at the death of his or her consort,
is not divorced, or should be so by the fault of the decedent consort,
shall have a right to a portion in the usufruct, equal to that which may
belong as legitime to each of the legitimate children or descendants who
have received no advantage.
-
When only one legitimate child or descendant remains, the widower or widow
shall have the usufruct of the third part, designated for advantage, and
the former shall keep the direct ownership, until by the death of the surviving consort the ownership is
consolidated in him.
-
When the consorts are separated by a suit for divorce, the results of
the suit are to be taken into account.
-
When there has been a pardon or a reconciliation between the divorced
consorts, the surviving one shall retain his or her rights.
-
-
Article 835
The hereditary portion, allotted in usufruct to the surviving consort, shall be taken from the third part of the estate which is designed for giving advantages to the children.
-
Article 836
When the testator leaves no descendants, but only ascendants, the surviving consort shall have a right to the third part
of the estate in usufruct.
-
Article 837
When the testator leaves no legitimate ascendants or descendants, the surviving consort shall be entitled to one half of the
estate also in usufruct.
-
Article 838
The heirs may satisfy the surviving consort for such part of usufruct,
assigning to him or her a life annuity or the proceeds of a certain property
or a sum in cash, acting by mutual agreement or, in default of it, by
virtue of a judicial decree.
-
Article 839
In case of concurrence of the children of two or more marriages, the usufruct, belonging- to the surviving consort of the
second marriage, shall be taken from the one third part at the free disposal
of the parents.
-
Article 834
-
Section Eighth
Right of Illegitimate Children
-
Article 840
When the testator leaves legitimate children or descendants, and
natural children, legally recognized, each one of the latter shall be
entitled to one half of the portion which may belong to each of the legitimate
children who have received no advantages, provided it may be comprised
in the one third part, at free disposal, from which it must be taken out,
after deducting the expenses of the burial and funeral.
-
Article 841
When the testator leaves no children or descendants but has legitimate ascendants, the recognized natural children shall be
entitled to one half of the part of the estate at the testator's free
disposal.
-
This is understood without injury to the legitime of the surviving consort,
in accordance with art. 836; therefore, when the consort concurs with
the natural recognized children, whatever may be wanting to complete their
legitime shall be allotted to them only in naked property, while the consort
survives.
-
-
Article 842
When the testator leaves no legitimate descendants or ascendants, the recognized natural children shall be entitled to one
third part of the estate.
-
Article 843
The rights recognized in natural children, by the preceding article, are transmitted, upon their death, to their legitimate
descendants.
-
Article 844
The hereditary portion of children, legitimated by Royal Concession, shall be equal to that established by law in favor of
recognized natural children.
-
Article 845
Illegitimate children, who have not the condition of natural children, shall only have a right to support.
-
Article 846
The right of succession which the laws grant to natural children, extends by reciprocity, in similar cases, to the natural
father or mother.
-
Article 847
The donations which the natural child may have received, during his life, from his father or mother, shall be charged
to his legitime.
-
Article 840
-
Section Ninth
Disinheritance
-
Article 848
Disinheritance shall only take place for one of the causes expressly fixed by law.
-
Article 849
Disinheritance can only be effected by a testament mentioning therein the legal cause on which it is based.
-
Article 850
The proof of the truth of the cause of disinheritance shall be established by the heirs of the testator, should the disinherited deny it.
-
Article 851
Disinheritance, made without stating the cause, or for a cause, the truth of which, if contested, should not be proven or
which is not one of those stated in the four following articles, shall
void the institution of heir, in so far as it injures the disinherited, but the legacies, advantages, and other testamentary dispositions,
which cause no damage to said legitime, shall be valid.
-
Article 852
Just causes for disinheritance are, in their respective cases, those of incapacity for succeeding by unworthiness, specified in nos. I, 2, 3, 5, and 6 of art. 756.
-
Article 853
Besides the causes specified in nos 2, 3, 5, 6 of art. 756 for
disinheriting children and descendants, either legitimate or natural,
the following shall be just causes therefor:
-
1
To have refused, without lawful cause, support to the father or ascendant
who disinherits him.
-
2
Having used personal violence against or previously offended the testator
by words.
-
3
If the daughter or granddaughter has prostituted herself.
-
4
To have been condemned for a crime carrying with it the penalty of
civil interdiction.
-
1
-
Article 854
Besides the causes mention in nos. I, 2, 3, 5, and 6 of art. 756,
the following are also just causes to disinherit the parents or ascendants,
either legitimate or natural:
-
Article 855
Besides those specified in nos. 2, 3, and 6 of art. 756, the following shall also be just causes for disinheriting the consort:
-
Article 856
A succeeding reconciliation of the offender and the offended deprives the latter of the right to disinherit and render
the disinheritance already made ineffective.
-
Article 857
The children of the disinherited shall take his or her place and shall retain the rights of forced heirs in respect to the legitime; but the disinherited parent shall have neither the usufruct nor the administration of the property of said legitime.
-
Article 848
-
Section Tenth
Legacies and Bequests
-
Article 858
A testator may burden with legacies and bequests, not only his
heir, but also the legatees.
-
Article 859
When the testator burdens one of the heirs with a legacy, he alone shall be obliged to comply with it. If he does not burden
any one in particular, all shall be liable for it, in the same proportion
in which they may be heirs of the estate.
-
Article 860
The person, bound to the delivery of the legacy, shall be responsible, in case of eviction, if the thing is undetermined
and is designated only in kind or species.
-
Article 861
The legacy of another person's property, when the testator knew, at the time of bequeathing it, that it was not his, is
valid. The heir is bound to acquire the property for its delivery to the
legatee; and, when not possible, to pay the latter its just value.
-
Article 862
When the testator did not know that the thing he bequeathed was not his, the bequest shall be null and void.
-
Article 863
A legacy made to a third party of a thing belonging to the heir
or to one of the legatees shall be valid, and they, on accepting the succession,
shall deliver the thing bequeathed or the just value thereof, under the
limitation established in the following article.
-
Article 864
When the testator, heir, or legatee have only a part or a right in the thing bequeathed, the legacy shall be understood
as limited to such part or right, unless the testator expressly declares
that he bequeathed the thing integrally.
-
Article 865
A legacy of things, out of commerce, is null and void.
-
Article 866
The legacy of a thing, which at the time of the execution of the testament, belonged already to the legatee, even when
another person has some right to it, shall not be effectual.
-
Article 867
When the testator bequeaths something, pledged or mortgaged, for the security of an exigible (mature) debt, the payment
of the same shall fall upon the heir.
-
If the legatee pays such debt because the heir has not done so, the legatee
shall be subrogated in the place and right of the creditor to make claim
against the heir therefor.
-
Any other lien, either perpetual or temporary, with which the thing bequeathed
is burdened, passes together with it to the legatee, but, in both cases,
the rents and interests or charges due, up to the death of the testator,
are a charge upon the inheritance.
-
-
Article 868
When the thing bequeathed is subject to the usufruct, use, or habitation, the legatee is obliged to respect such rights, until
they are lawfully extinguished.
-
Article 869
The legacy shall not be effective:
-
1
When the testator makes such alterations in the thing bequeathed that
it does not retain either the form or the denomination that it before
had.
-
2
When the testator alienates, under any title or cause whatever, the
thing bequeathed or a part of it, it being understood, in this last case,
that the bequest becomes void only in relation to the alienated part.
When, after the alienation, the thing reverts to the ownership of the
testator, even by nullity of the contract, the bequest shall not be valid,
after such fact, unless in the case in which the reacquisition is made
under a contract of revertible sale.
-
3
When the thing bequeathed perishes in whole, during the life of the
testator or after his death, without blame on the part of the heir. Nevertheless,
the person obliged to pay the legacy shall be liable for the eviction,
if the thing bequeathed has not been determined in species, as provided
in art. 860.
-
1
-
Article 870
The legacy of a credit against a third party or of the remission or liberation of a debt of the legatee, shall be effectual only in that part of the credit or of the debt, yet existing at the time of the death of the testator.
-
In the first case, the heir shall fulfill his duty by assigning to the legatee all the actions he may have against the debtor.
-
In the second, by giving to the legatee the full release, if he asks for it.
-
In both cases, the legacy shall comprise the interests on the credits
or the debts due to the testator, at the time of his death.
-
-
Article 871
The legacy, to which the preceding article refers, is made void when the testator, after having made it, judicially demands
from the debtor the payment of such debt, even when the payment has not
been made at the time of the death.
-
Article 872
The generic legacy of liberation or remission of debts comprises those existing at the time of the execution of the testament, and not subsequent ones.
-
Article 873
A legacy made to a creditor shall not be imputed in payment of his credit, unless the testator so expressly declares.
-
Article 874
In alternative legacies, the provisions made for obligations of the same kind shall be observed, excepting the modifications made by the express will of the testator.
-
Article 875
A legacy of generic personal property shall be valid, although there may not be things of the same kind in the estate.
-
Article 876
Whenever the testator expressly leaves an option to the heir or to the legatee, the former may give or the latter may select
what he may consider best.
-
Article 877
When the heir or legatee cannot make the election, in case of it having been granted to him, his right shall pass to the
heir, but the choice once made shall be irrevocable.
-
Article 878
When the thing bequeathed belonged to the legatee at the date of the will, the legacy is void, even when it has been alienated
afterwards.
-
Article 879
A legacy for education subsists until the legatee is of age.
-
That for support lasts during the life of the legatee, unless the testator
has otherwise disposed.
-
When the testator has not assigned any sum for said legacies, they shall
be fixed in accordance with the position and condition of the legatee
and the amount of the inheritance.
-
When the testator was, during his life, in the habit of giving to the
legatee a certain sum of money or other things by way of support, the
legacy shall be considered of an equal sum, unless it is greatly disproportionate
with the amount of the estate.
-
-
Article 880
When a periodical pension, or a certain sum, either annual, monthly, or weekly is bequeathed, the legatee may claim that of
the first term, as soon as the testator dies, and those of the following,
at the beginning of each of them, without any right to reimbursement,
even when the legatee dies before the expiration of the term begun.
-
Article 881
A legatee acquires a right to the pure and simple legacies from the death of the testator, and transmits it to his heirs.
-
Article 882
When the bequest is of a thing specific and determined, belonging
to the testator, the legatee acquires the property thereof upon the death
of the testator and makes the pending fruits or rents his own, but not
those which were due and unpaid before said death.
-
Article 883
The thing bequeathed shall be delivered (to the legatee) with all its accessories and in the condition in which it is at the death of the testator.
-
Article 884
When the bequest is not of a specific and determined thing, but generic or of quantity, its fruits and interests shall belong
to the legatee from the death of the testator, if the testator expressly
so ordered.
-
Article 885
The legatee cannot occupy the thing bequeathed of his own authority, but he shall ask the heir or the executor, when the
latter is authorized to give it, for its delivery and possession.
-
Article 886
The heir shall deliver the same thing bequeathed, if he is able to do so and he does not comply with this duty by paying for
its value.
-
Article 887
When the assets of the estate are not sufficient to cover all the legacies, payment shall be made in the following order:
-
Article 888
When the legatee cannot or does not wish to accept the bequest, or for any cause this may not be effectual, it shall be merged
into the whole of the estate, excepting in cases of substitution, and
rights of accretion.
-
Article 889
A legatee cannot accept a part of the legacy and repudiate the other part, when the latter is onerous to him.
-
Article 890
A legatee of two legacies, one of which is onerous, cannot renounce
this one and accept the former. When both are onerous or gratuitous, he
is free to accept all of them or repudiate any one he wishes.
-
Article 891
When all the inheritance is distributed in legacies, the debts and burdens of the same shall be charged to the legatees, pro
rata according to their shaies, unless the testator has provided otherwise.
-
Article 858
-
Section Eleventh
Executors (Albaceas testamentarios)
-
Article 892
A testator may appoint one or more executors.
-
Article 893
A person, who has no capacity to obligate himself, cannot be executor.
-
Article 894
Executors may be general or special. In any case, executors can be appointed, either severally, successively or conjointly.
-
Article 895
When the executors are appointed severally, every act shall be made by all of them together in order that it may be valid,
and shall be valid also when done by one of them, legally authorized by
the others; and, in case of discord, when the act has been agreed to by
the majority.
-
Article 896
In case of extreme urgency, one of the several executors may do, upon his personal responsibility, such acts as may be
necessary, giving notice thereof immediately to the others.
-
Article 897
When a testator does not clearly provide about the appointment of conjoint executors nor determine the order in which
they are to discharge their functions, it shall be understood that they
have been appointed severally, and they shall discharge their duties in
the form prescribed by the two preceding articles.
-
Article 898
Executorship is a voluntary charge, and it shall be understood as accepted, if the person appointed does not excuse himself
within six days next following the one on which he has received notice
of his appointment or if he was already aware of it during the six day
next following that on which he knew of the death of testator.
-
Article 899
An executor who accepts this charge is bound to comply with its duties; but he may renounce it alleging a cause which
may be just in the prudent judgment of the court.
-
Article 900
An executor who does not accept the charge or renounces it, without a just cause, shall lose what the testator has left
him, but always without prejudice to the right which he has to the legitime.
-
Article 901
Executors shall have all the powers expressly granted to them by the testator and which are not contrary to law.
-
Article 902
When the testator has not specially determined the powers of the executors, they shall have the following:
-
1
To dispose and pay the sufferages and funeral expenses of the testator
in accordance with the dispositions made by the same in his testament,
and, in default of them, according to the custom of the place.
-
2
To pay, with the knowledge and consent of the heir, the cash legacies.
-
3
To look carefully after the execution of whatever more has been ordered
in the testament, and maintain, when just, its validity in and out of
court.
-
4
To take the necessary precautions for the preservation and custody
of the property, with the intervention of the heirs present.
-
1
-
Article 903
When the estate has not cash enough for the payment of funeral (expenses) and legacies, and the heirs do not contribute
their own money therefor, the executors shall endeavor to sell the personal
property, and, if this is not enough, the real property with the intervention
of the heirs.
-
Article 904
An executor, for whom the testator has not fixed the term, shall comply with his charge within a year, to be counted from
his acceptance, or from the determination of the law suit which may be
instituted about the validity or the nullity of the testament or of any
one of its provisions.
-
Article 905
If the testator desires to extend the legal term, he shall expressly fix the time for the extension. When he has not done
so, it shall be understood that the term is extended for one year.
-
Article 906
The heirs and legatees may, by common agreement, extend the term of the executorship for the time they deem necessary;
but, if the agreement is only that of a majority, the extension shall
not exceed one year.
-
Article 907
Executors shall render to the heirs an account of their charge.
-
When they have been appointed not to deliver the property to specified
heirs, but to invest or distribute it in the form provided by the testator
in the cases allowed by law, they shall render their accounts to the Judge.
-
Any disposition of the testator, contrary to this article, shall be null
and void.
-
-
Article 908
Executorship is a gratuitous charge. However, the testator may
designate the executors, the compensation which he may consider convenient
; all of this without injury to the rights which they may have to collect
whatever may belong to them for their work in the distribution or for
any other professional services.
-
Article 909
Executors cannot delegate their charge, unless they have express authority from the testator for so doing.
-
Article 910
Executorship is determined by the death, impossibility, renunciation, or removal of the executor, and by the lapse of the term fixed by the testator, by law, and, in certain cases, by the parties concerned.
-
Article 911
In the cases of the preceding article and when the executor has not accepted the charge, the execution of the will of the
testator shall devolve upon the heirs.
-
Article 892
-
Section First
Capacity For Succession Under or Without a Testament
-
Chapter Third
Intestate Succession
-
Section First
General Provisions
-
Article 912
Legitimate succession takes place:
-
1
When a person dies without a testament, or under a void testament or under one which afterwards has lost its validity.
-
2
When the testament does not contain the institution of heir in the whole estate or in a part of it or does not dispose of
all that belongs to the testator. In this case the legitimate succession
shall take place only in regard to the part of the estate of which the
testator has not disposed.
-
3
When the condition imposed for the institution of heir is not complied
with or when the heir dies before the testator or repudiates the inheritance,
without having a substitute, and there is no right of accretion.
-
4
When the heir instituted is incapable to succeed.
-
1
-
Article 913
In default of testamentary heirs, the law gives the inheritance, according to the following rules, to the legitimate and natural
relatives of the decedent, to the widower or widow, or to the State.
-
Article 914
Provisions about incapacity to succeed by testament equally apply to intestate successions.
-
Article 912
-
Section Second
Relationship
-
Article 915
The proximity of relationship is determined by the number of generations. Each generation forms a degree.
-
Article 916
A series of degrees forms the line which may be either direct or collateral.
-
Article 917
The right line is either descendant or ascendant.
-
Article 918
In the lines, as many degrees are counted as there are generations or persons, deducting the progenitor.
-
In the right line the ascent is made only to the trunk, thus the son is
one degree distant from the father, two from the grandfather, and three
from the great-grandfather.
-
In the collateral line, the ascent is made up to the common trunk, and
then a descent is made down to the person with whom the computation is
made. On account of this reason, the brother is two degrees distant from
the brother, three from the uncle, brother of his father or mother, four
from the first cousins, and so forth.
-
-
Article 919
The computation, stated in the preceding article, governs in all matters, except in those which have relation to the impediments
to canonical marriage.
-
Article 920
Double or whole blood relationship is the relation in the father's and mother's line at the same time.
-
Article 921
In every inheritance, the relative nearest in degree excludes the farther one, except in the cases in which the right of representation
takes place.
-
Article 922
When there are several relatives in the same degree and one or some of them do not wish or cannot succeed, his portion shall
accrue to the others of the same degree, without affecting the right of
representation when it takes place.
-
Article 923
When the inheritance is repudiated by the nearest relative, if he is a single one, or by all the nearest relatives, called
by law, if there are several, then those of the following degree shall
inherit in their own right, without being able to represent those repudiating the inheritance.
-
Article 915
-
Section Third
Representation
-
Article 924
The right which all the relatives of a person have to succeed him in all the rights which he should have had, if alive,
or if he had been able to inherit, is called right of representation.
-
Article 925
The right of representation shall always take place in the direct descending line, but never in the ascending.
-
Article 926
Whenever the inheritance is taken by representation, the distribution of the estate shall be made in stirpes: thus the representative
or representatives shall inherit no more than that which the party represented
would inherit, if alive.
-
Article 927
When children of one or more brothers of the decedent survive,they
shall succeed the latter by representation, if they concur with their uncles, but if they concur alone, they shall
inherit in equal shares.
-
Article 928
The right of representing a person is not lost by having renounced the inheritance.
-
Article 929
A living person cannot be represented unless in cases of disinheritance or incapacity.
-
Article 924
-
Section First
General Provisions
-
Chapter Fourth
Order of Succession According to Diversity of Lines
-
Section First
Descending Direct Line
-
Article 930
Succession goes, in the first place, to the descending direct line.
-
Article 931
Legitimate children and their descendants succeed the parents and other ascendants, without distinction of sex or age, and even if they come from different marriages.
-
Article 932
The children of the decedent shall always inherit from him in their own rights, dividing the inheritance in equal shares.
-
Article 933
The grandchildren and other descendants shall inherit by right
of representation, and if one of them has died leaving several heirs, the portion belonging to him shall be distributed
among such heirs in equal shares.
-
Article 934
If there are children and descendants of other deceased children,
the former shall inherit in their own rights, and the latter by right of representation.
-
Article 930
-
Section Second
Ascending Direct Line
-
Article 935
In default of legitimate children and descendants of the decedent, his ascendants shall inherit from him, excluding collaterals.
-
Article 936
The father and mother, if living, shall inherit share and share alike.
-
Article 937
In default of mother or father, the ascendants, nearest in degree, shall inherit.
-
Article 938
The provisions of the two preceding articles are understood without prejudice to what is ordered by arts. 8 1 1 and 812,
which are applicable to intestate and testamentary successions.
-
Article 935
-
Section Third
Recognized Natural Children
-
Article 939
In default of legitimate descendants and ascendants, natural children legally recognized , and those legitimated by Royal Concession shall succeed the decedent in the whole inheritance.
-
Article 940
When, together with the natural or legitimated children, concur descendants of another deceased natural or legitimated
child, the former shall succeed by their own rights and the latter by
right of representation.
-
Article 941
The hereditary rights, granted by the two preceding articles to a natural or legitimated child, shall be transmitted upon
its death to its descendants, who shall inherit from their deceased grandfather
by right of representation.
-
Article 942
In case that there are legitimate descendants and ascendants, the natural and legitimate children shall take from the inheritance
only the portion granted to them by arts. 840 and 841.
-
Article 943
Natural and legitimated children have no rights to succeed intestate the legitimate children and relatives of the father
or mother who have recognized them ; nor shall such children or relatives
inherit from the natural or legitimated child.
-
Article 944
When the recognized natural or legitimated child dies without leaving issue, either lawful or recognized by it, the father
or mother who recognized it shall inherit its whole estate , and if both
recognized it and are alive , they shall inherit from it in equal shares.
-
Article 945
In default of natural ascendants, the natural and legitimated children shall be succeeded by their natural brothers, according
to the rules established for legitimate brothers.
-
Article 939
-
Section Fourth
Successions of Collaterals and of Consorts
-
Article 946
In default of the persons comprised in the three preceding sections, collateral relations and consorts shall inherit
in the order established in the following article.
-
Article 947
When there are only brothers of the whole blood, they shall inherit in equal shares.
-
Article 948
When brothers concur with nephews, children of brothers of the whole blood, the former shall inherit in capita, and the
latter in stirpes.
-
Article 949
When brothers of the whole blood concur with brothers of the half blood, the former shall take a portion in the inheritance
double that of the latter.
-
Article 950
When there are only brothers of the half blood, some on the father's and some on the mothers side, all shall inherit
equal portions, whatever the property may be.
-
Article 951
Children of brothers of the half blood shall take in capita or in stirpes, according to the rules established for brothers
of the whole blood.
-
Article 952
In default of brothers and of nephews, children of said .brothers, be they or not of the whole blood, the surviving consort,
not separated by a final sentence of divorce, shall take all the estate
of the decedent.
-
Article 953
When there are brothers or children of brothers, the widow or widower shall have a right to take, in concurrence with the
same, the portion of inheritance in usufruct provided in art. 837.
-
Article 954
When there are neither brothers or children of brothers, nor surviving consort, the other collateral relatives shall
succeed in the inheritance of the decedent.
-
Article 955
The right to inherit in the case of intestacy shall not extend beyond the sixth degree of relationship in the collateral line.
-
Article 946
-
Section Fifth
Inheritance by the State
-
Article 956
In default of persons having a right to succeed in accordance
with the provisions of the preceding sections, the State shall inherit,
and the property shall be destined for institutions of beneficence or
of gratuitous instruction, in the following order:
-
Article 957
The rights and obligations of institutions of beneficence and instruction, in the cases of the preceding articles, shall
be the same that other heirs may have.
-
Article 958
In order that the State may take possession of the property of the inheritance, a previous judicial declaration has to be
made by which the inheritance shall be adjudged to the State, in default
of legitimate heirs.
-
Article 956
-
Section First
Descending Direct Line
-
Chapter Fifth
Provisions Common to Inheritance by Testament or Without It
-
Section First
Precautions to be Adopted When the Widow Remains in a Pregnant Condition
-
Article 959
When the widow believes that she has been left in a pregnant condition,
she must give notice to those having in the inheritance, rights of such a kind that they shall disappear
or be diminished by the birth of a posthumous child.
-
Article 960
Interested persons, to which the preceding article refers, may ask the Municipal Judge or the Judge of the First Instance,
when there is one, to take the proper measures in order to prevent the
supposition of parturition or to accept the child born as viable, when,
in truth, it is not so.
-
Article 961
Whether the notice stated in art. 959 has been given or not, when
the time of the parturition approaches, the widow shall give notice of
this fact to the parties interested. They shall have a right to appoint
a person in whom they have confidence in order that he may aver the reality
of the delivery.
-
Article 962
The omission of these formalities shall not injure the legitimacy of the parturition, which, when contested, may be proven
by the mother or the child lawfully represented.
-
Article 963
When the husband has recognized by a document, either public or private, the certainty of the pregnancy of his wife,
she shall be excused from giving the notice provided in art. 959, but
she shall be subject to comply with the provisions of art. 961.
-
Article 964
A widow who remains pregnant, even when she is rich, shall receive
support from the estate, taking into consideration the portion of it which may belong to the posthumous child,
if he is born and is viable.
-
Article 965
During the time intervening, until the parturition arrives, or until certainty is established that it cannot take place,
either on account of a miscarriage, or because the maximum time for the
gestation has been exceeded, the security and administration of the estate shall be attended to in the form provided
in necessary testamentary proceedings.
-
Article 966
The distribution of the inheritance shall be suspended until the
parturition or miscarriage takes place, or the lapse of time shows the
widow was not pregnant.
-
Article 967
After the delivery or miscarriage has taken place or the time of gestation has elapsed, the administrator of the estate shall
cease in his charge, and shall render account of his management to the
heirs or their lawful representatives.
-
Article 959
-
Section Second
Property Subject to Reservation
-
Article 968
Besides the reservation imposed by art. 811, the widower or widow
contracting a second marriage shall be obliged to reserve for the children
and descendants of the first, the ownership of all the property acquired
from the deceased consort by will, by intestate succession, by donation,
or by any other lucrative title; but not his or her half of the conjugal property.
-
Article 969
The provision of the preceding article applies to property which has been acquired, under the titles already stated, by
the widower or widow from any of the children of the first marriage, or
that received from the relatives of the decedent on account of personal
considerations for the same.
-
Article 970
The obligation to reserve shall cease, when the children of a marriage, being of legal age and having a right to the estate,
have expressly renounced it, or when the things in question have been
given or left by the children to their father or mother, knowing that they had married a second time.
-
Article 971
Reservation shall cease when, at the death of the father or mother who contracted a second marriage, there remains no legitimate
children or descendants of the first marriage.
-
Article 972
Notwithstanding the obligation to reserve, the father or mother, married a second time, may give advantages in the property,
subject to reservation (reservables), to any of the children or descendants
of the first marriage, as provided in art 823.
-
Article 973
When the father or mother has not made use in whole or in part of the right granted to them in the preceding article,
the legitimate children or descendants of the first marriage shall succeed
to the property subject to reservation, in accordance with the rules prescribed
for succession in the descending line, even when, by virtue of a testament, he or she should
have unequally inherited from the first decedent consort, or should have
renounced or repudiated his or her inheritance.
-
Article 974
Conveyances of reserved real property shall be valid when made by the surviving consort, before contracting a second marriage,
under the obligation to secure, from the moment of the marriage, the value
of such property in favor of the children and descendants of the first
marriage.
-
Article 975
Conveyances of real property, subject to reservation, made by
the widower or widow, after contracting a second marriage, shall subsist
only when, at his or her death, there remains no legitimate children or
descendants of the former marriage; this without conflict with the provisions of the Law of Mortgage.
-
Article 976
Conveyances of personal property, made before or after contracting a second marriage, shall be valid, but always under
the obligation of paying an indemnity when proper.
-
Article 977
A widower or widow , on contracting a new marriage, shall make an inventory of all the property subject to reservation, and annotate in the Registry of property that such real property is subject to reservation in accordance with the provisions of the Law of Mortgage and shall have the personal property appraised.
-
Article 978
A widower or widow, on marrying again, is also bound to secure by mortgage:
-
1
The restitution of the personal property, not alienated, in the condition
in which it was at the time of the death of the decedent, when it was
paraphernalia or the proceeds from an unestimated dowry; or of their value,
if they arise from an estimated dowry.
-
2
The payment of the damages, caused or which may be caused by his or
her fault or neglect.
-
3
The return of any sums received for the personal property already sold or the delivery of the value it had, at the time
of the alienation, had it been made under a gratuitous title.
-
4
The value of the real property validly alienated.
-
1
-
Article 979
The provisions of the preceding article for the second marriage shall equally control the third and subsequent marriages.
-
Article 980
The obligation to reserve, imposed in the preceding, article, shall apply to the widower or widow, who though not having contracted
a new marriage, may afterwards have a recognized natural child or one
judicially declared as such.
-
Article 968
-
Section Third
Right of Acoretion
-
Article 981
In legitimate succession, the part of him who repudiated the inheritance shall always accrue to the co-heirs.
-
Article 982
In order that in testamentary succession the right of accretion may take place, it is required:
-
Article 983
It shall be understood that a designation has been made by portion only in case that the testator may have expressly designated
a quota to each heir.
-
Article 984
The heirs, to whom the inheritance accrues, shall succeed in all the rights and obligations which would have belonged to
the one who did not wish or could not receive it.
-
Article 985
Among forced heirs, the right to accrue shall take place only when the part, at free disposal, is left to two or more of
them or to any one of them and a stranger.
-
Article 986
In testamentary successions, when the right of accretion cannot take place, the vacant portion of the heir instituted,
for whom no substitute has been appointed, passes to the lawful heirs
of the testator who shall receive it under the same charges and obligations.
-
Article 987
The right of accretion shall also take place between the legatees and the usufructuaries in the same terms established for heirs.
-
Article 981
-
Section Fourth
Acceptance and Repudiation of the Inheritance
-
Article 988
Acceptance and repudiation of the inheritance are acts entirely voluntary and free.
-
Article 989
The effects of the acceptance and repudiation shall always relate back to the moment of the death of the person whose property
is inherited.
-
Article 990
Acceptance or repudiation of the inheritance cannot be made, either partially, up to a certain term, or conditionally.
-
Article 991
No person can accept or repudiate an inheritance, unless he is certain of the death of the person from whom he is to inherit
and of his rights to the inheritance.
-
Article 992
Any person having free disposal of his property may accept or repudiate an inheritance.
-
An inheritance left to minors or incapables may be accepted in the form
provided by no. 10 of art. 259. When the guardian accepts by himself,
the acceptance shall be considered as made under benefit of inventory.
-
Acceptance of an inheritance, left to the poor, shall pertain to the persons
appointed by the testator to classify them and distribute the property,
and, in default of them, to those designated in art. 749, and it shall
also be understood as accepted under benefit of inventory.
-
-
Article 993
The lawful representatives of associations, corporations, and institutions having capacity to acquire can accept the inheritance left to the same; but for repudiating it they require judicial approval, after the Public Attorney has been heard.
-
Article 994
Public official institutions can neither accept nor repudiate inheritances without the approval of the government.
-
Article 995
A married woman can neither accept nor repudiate an inheritance, unless with permission of her husband, and, in his default,
with the approval of the Judge.
-
Article 996
The deaf and dumb, knowing how to read and write, shall accept or repudiate the inheritance personally or through an attorney. If they cannot read or write, their guardian shall accept it under benefit of inventory, subject to what is provided in art. 218 in relation to such disability.
-
Article 997
Acceptance and repudiation of the inheritance, once made, are irrevocable, and can be contested only in case they suffer from any of the vices which annul the consent, or when an unknown testament appears.
-
Article 998
Inheritances can be accepted purely and simply or under benefit of inventory.
-
Article 999
Pure and simple inheritances may be either express or tacit. Express is one made in a public or private instrument. Tacit
is one made by acts, which necessarily imply a will to accept, or acts
which no one should %have a right to execute unless in the capacity of
an heir.
-
Article 1000
An inheritance is considered as accepted:
-
1
When the heir sells, donates or assigns a right to a stranger, to all
his co-heirs or to one of them only.
-
2
When the heir renounces it, even gratuitously, for the benefit of one
or more of his co-heirs.
-
3
When he renounces it for a consideration in favor of all his co-heirs
indiscriminately, but when this renunciation is gratuitous and the co-heirs,
in whose favor he makes it, are those to whom the share renounced must
accrue, the inheritance shall not be considered as accepted.
-
1
-
Article 1001
When the heir repudiates the inheritance to the damage of his own creditors, they may ask the Judge to authorize them
to accept it on behalf of the latter.
-
Article 1002
The heirs, who have subtracted or concealed any effects of the inheritance, lose the right to renounce it, and retain
only the character of pure and simply heirs without being released from
the penalties which they may have incurred.
-
Article 1003
By the acceptance, pure and simple, or without benefit of inventory, the heir shall be liable for all the charges of
the estate, not only with the properties of the same, but also with his
own.
-
Article 1004
Until nine days have elapsed from the death of the person whose inheritance is dealt with, no action can be instituted against
the heir to compel him to accept or repudiate it.
-
Article 1005
When a third party having an interest, urges in a suit that the heir should accept or repudiate the inheritance, the Judge
shall give the latter a term, not exceeding thirty days, within, which
he shall declare his intention, warning him that, in case he does not
do it, the inheritance shall be considered as accepted.
-
Article 1006
Upon the death of the heir, without having accepted or repudiated the inheritance, the same rights he had are transmitted
to his heirs.
-
Article 1007
When there are several heirs called to an inheritance, some of them may accept and some repudiate it. Every one of the heirs shall enjoy the same liberty to accept it purely and simply, or under benefit of inventory.
-
Article 1008
Repudiation of an inheritance shall be made by a public or authentic instrument or by a writ presented to the Judge,
competent to take cognizance of testamentary or intestate proceedings.
-
Article 1009
Any person called to an inheritance by a testament or by intestacy and who repudiates it under the former title, is considered
as having repudiated under both titles.
-
Article 988
-
Section Fifth
Benefit of Inventory and Right to Deliberate
-
Article 1010
Every heir may accept an inheritance under benefit of inventory,
even if the testator has forbidden it.
-
Article 1011
Acceptance of the inheritance, under the benefit of inventory, may be made before a Notary, or in a writing before any
of the judges, competent for taking cognizance of the testamentary or
intestate proceedings.
-
Article 1012
When the heir, to whom the preceding article refers, is in a foreign land, he may make such declaration before a diplomatic
or consular Agent of Spain, who may be authorized to exercise the duties
of a Notary in the place of such execution.
-
Article 1013
The declaration, to which the preceding articles refer, shall produce no effect, unless it be preceded or followed by a
true and exact inventory of all the property of the estate, made with
the formalities and within the term specified in the following articles.
-
Article 1014
An heir, having in his hands the property of the estate or a part of it, and who wishes to make use of the benefit of inventory
or of the right to deliberate shall so state to the Judge, competent to
take cognizance of the testamentary or intestate proceedings, within ten
days next following that on which he has become aware that he is such an heir, if he resides in the
place where the originator of his inheritance dies. If he resides out
of the place, the term shall be thirty days.
-
Article 1015
When the heir has not in his possession the inheritance or a part of it, or has not executed any act as such heir,
the terms, specified in the preceding article, shall be counted from the
next day following the one on which shall expire the term fixed by the
Judge for accepting or repudiating the inheritance, in accordance with
art. 1005, or from the day on which he has accepted it or has acted as
heir.
-
Article 1016
In the cases not provided for by the two preceding articles, if no complaint has been presented against the heir, he may
accept, under the benefit of inventory, or with the right to deliberate
while the action to claim an inheritance is not prescribed.
-
Article 1017
An inventory shall be begun within thirty days next following the summoning of the creditors and legatees and shall be
finished within sixty days more.
-
Article 1018
If by the fault or neglect of the heir, the inventory is not begun or finished within the term, and with the solemnities prescribed in the preceding article, it shall be understood that he accepts the inheritance purely and simply.
-
Article 1019
An heir, who has reserved to himself the right to deliberate, shall state to the court, within thirty days, counted from
the day following that on which the inventory has been finished, whether
he accepts or repudiates the inheritance.
-
Article 1020
In any case, the judge may, on petition of any party interested, during the making of the inventory and until the acceptance
of the inheritance, provide for the administration and custody of the
hereditary estate, in accordance with the provisions of the Law of Civil
Procedure about testamentary proceedings.
-
Article 1021
A person who judicially claims an inheritance, which another has held in his possession for over a year and who wins the suit, shall not he obliged to make an inventory for enjoying such benefit, and he shall be liable for the burdens of the estate only with the property which has been delivered to him.
-
Article 1022
The inventory made by the heir, who afterwards repudiates the inheritance, shall benefit the substitutes and the intestate
heirs, in respect to whom, the thirty days for deliberation and in which
to make the statement, provided by art. 1019, shall be counted from the
day next following that on which they were made aware of the repudiation.
-
Article 1023
The benefit of inventory produces the following effects in favor of the heir:
-
1
The heir shall not be bound to pay the debts and other charges of the
inheritance but up to the amount that the estate may be worth.
-
2
He retains against the estate all the rights and actions which he may
have had against the decedent.
-
3
The private property of the heir shall not anywise be confused, to
his injury, with the property belonging to the estate.
-
1
-
Article 1024
The heir shall lose the benefit of inventory:
-
1
When having knowledge of it, he fails to include in the inventory any
of the property, rights or actions of the inheritance.
-
2
When, before completing the payment of the debts and legacies, he alienates any property of the estate without judicial
authorization, or that of all the parties in interest, or, if he does
not apply the value of what is sold to what has been ordered, when the
authorization was granted to him.
-
1
-
Article 1025
During the making of the inventory and the term granted for deliberating, the legatees cannot claim the payment of their
legacies.
-
Article 1026
Until all known creditors and legatees have been paid, it shall be understood that the estate is under administration.
-
Article 1027
The administrator shall not pay the legacies, until he has paid all the creditors.
-
Article 1028
When there is a pending lawsuit among the creditors about the preference of their credits, they shall be paid in the order
and according to the degree fixed by the final sentence of graduation.
-
Article 1029
If, after the legacies are paid, more creditors appear, they shall have a right to make claims against the legatees only
in case that the estate may not have property enough to pay them.
-
Article 1030
When for the payment of credits and legacies, the sale of the property of the estate may be necessary, it shall be made
in the form established by the Code of Civil Procedure about intestate
and testamentary proceedings, unless all the heirs, creditors, and legatees
agree otherwise.
-
Article 1031
When the hereditary estate is not sufficient for the payment of the debts and legacies, the administrator shall render an account
of his administration to the creditors and legatees who have not been
paid in full, and he shall be liable for the damages caused to the estate
by his fault or negligence.
-
Article 1032
After the creditors and legatees are paid, the heir shall have the full enjoyment of the remainder of the estate.
-
Article 1033
The cost of the inventory and other expenses, caused by the administration of the inheritance, accepted under the benefit
of inventory, and the defense of its rights, shall be paid by the same
estate. The cost to which the heir may have been personally condemned,
on account of his deceit or bad faith, shall be excepted.
-
Article 1034
The private creditors of the heir cannot interfere with the operations of the estate, accepted by him under benefit of inventory,
until the creditors and legatees of the same have been paid; but they
may claim the retention or the seizure of the remainder which may be left
in favor of the heirs.
-
Article 1010
-
Section First
Precautions to be Adopted When the Widow Remains in a Pregnant Condition
-
Chapter Sixth
Collation and Distribution
-
Section First
Collation
-
Article 1035
A forced heir, concurring with others of the same character in a succession, shall bring to the estate the properties or values which he may have received from the originator of the inheritance, during the life of the same, as dowry, donation, or under any other lucrative title for the purpose of computing it, the regulation of the legitimes, and in the account of the distribution.
-
Article 1036
Collation shall not take place among forced heirs when the donor has so expressly ordered, or when the donee repudiates
the inheritance, unless in the case in which the donation is to be reduced
as inofficious.
-
Article 1037
What is left by will is not subject to collation, unless the testator orders otherwise; but, in any case, the legitime shall
remain free.
-
Article 1038
When grandchildren inherit from their grandparents in representation of their parents, and concur with their uncles or cousins,
they shall bring to collation all that their parents, if alive, would
have been required to bring, though they may not have inherited it.
-
Article 1039
Parents are not obliged to bring to collation in the inheritance of their ascendants what may have been donated by the latter to their children.
-
Article 1040
Neither shall the donations made to the consort of the child be brought to collation; but if they have been made by the
parent to both of them jointly, the child shall be obliged to bring to
collation one half of the thing donated.
-
Article 1041
Expenses for support, education, for sickness, even if extraordinary, apprenticeship, ordinary equipment or the usual presents
are not subject to collation.
-
Article 1042
Expenses, incurred by the parents in giving their children a professional or artistic career , shall not be brought
to collation, unless the parent so disposes or they injure the legitime,
but when it may be lawful to bring them to collation, the sum which the
child should have spent, if living in the house and company of the parents,
shall be deducted From them.
-
Article 1043
The sums paid by the parents to redeem the children from the lot of soldiers, pay their debts, obtain for them a title of honor or other similar expenses, shall be brought to collation.
-
Article 1044
Wedding presents, consisting of jewels, clothing and equipment, shall not be reduced as inofficious but in the amount exceeding
one tenth or more of the sum disposable by testament.
-
Article 1045
The same things, donated or given in dowry, are not to be brought to collation and distribution, but only the value they
had at the time of the donation or dowry, though they were not appraised
at such time.
-
Article 1046
The dowry or donation, made jointly by both censorts, shall be brought to collation in equal parts in the inheritance
of each one of them. That made by only one of them shall be brought to
collation in his inheritance.
-
Article 1047
The donee shall take from the funds of the succession a sum so much less than the sum already received by him, and the co-heirs shall receive the equivalent in property of the same nature, class and quality, in so far as possible.
-
Article 1048
When what has been provided in the preceding article cannot be executed, if the property donated has consisted of real
property, the co- heirs shall have a right to be equalized in cash, or
in stocks and bonds, at the rate at which they are quoted; and when there
are in the estate neither cash nor stocks and bonds, other property shall be sold at public auction up to
the amount required.
-
Article 1049
The fruits and interests of the property, subject to collation, are not due to the bulk of the estate, except from the day
on which the succession is opened.
-
Article 1050
When a question arises among the heirs about the obligation to bring to collation or about the objects which are to be
brought thereto, the distribution shall not be stopped for such a cause,
but proper bond shall be given.
-
Article 1035
-
Section Second
Distribution
-
Article 1051
No co-heir shall be obliged to continue in the estate in an undivided condition, unless the testator has expressly
forbidden the distribution.
-
Article 1052
Every co-heir having the free administration and disposal of his property, may, at any time, ask for the distribution of
the estate.
-
Article 1053
The wife cannot ask for the distribution of the estate without authority of the husband, and, in certain cases, of the
Judge. When the husband asks for it, in the name of his wife, he shall
do it with her consent.
-
Article 1054
The heirs, under condition, shall not ask for the distribution until the condition is fulfilled. But the other co-heirs
may ask for it, by properly securing the rights of the former for the
cases in which the condition may be fulfilled, and until it is known that
it has failed or can no longer be complied with, the distribution shall be considered as provisional.
-
Article 1055
When, before the distribution is made, one of the co-heirs dies leaving two or more heirs, a petition by one of them shall
be sufficient; but all those who intervene in such capacity shall appear
under a single representation.
-
Article 1056
When the testator makes a distribution of his property by an act
inter vivos or by a last will, it shall be accepted in so far as it does
not injure the legitime of the forced heirs.
-
Article 1057
The testator may, by an act inter vivos or mortis causa, confer the mere power of making the distribution, after his death,
to any person who shall not be one of the co-heirs.
-
The provisions of this and the preceding articles shall be observed, even
when there may be found a minor or a person subject to guardianship among
the heirs; but the trustee shall, in this case, make an inventory of the
property of the inheritance, after summoning the co-heirs, the creditors,
and the legatees.
-
-
Article 1058
When the testator has not made any distribution nor trusted this power to another person, if the heirs are of age and have the free administration of their property, they may distribute the estate in the manner they may deem fit.
-
Article 1059
When the heirs of age cannot agree about the manner of making the distribution, they shall be free to enforce their rights in the manner prescribed by the Law of Civil Procedure.
-
Article 1060
When the minors are subject to the parental power and are represented in the distribution by the father or, in his default, by the mother, neither the intervention nor the approval of the Judge shall be required.
-
Article 1061
In the distribution of the estate,all possible fairness shall be observed by drawing lots or adjudging to each one of the heirs things of the same nature, quality, or kind.
-
Article 1062
When a thing is indivisible or loses considerable by being divided, it may be adjudged to one of the heirs, under condition
of paying the excess in cash to the others.
-
Article 1063
On making the distribution, the co-heirs shall reciprocally compensate one another for the rents and fruits which each
of them may have collected from the estate for the useful and necessary
expenses made on said property or for the injuries caused to it by malice
or neglect.
-
Article 1064
The expenses of the distribution, made for the common interests of all the co-heirs, shall be deducted from the estate,
those made for the particular interest of one of them, shall be borne
by the same.
-
Article 1065
The titles of acquisition or of ownership shall be delivered to the co-heir to whom the tenement or tenements, to which they
refer, were adjudged.
-
Article 1066
When the same title comprises several tenements adjudged to several co-heirs, or one only which may have been divided
among two or more, the title shall remain in the possession of the person
having a greater interest in the tenement or tenements and authenticated
copies of it shall be furnished to the other parties, at the expense of
the estate. Should the interests be equal, the title shall be delivered
to the male heir, and, where there are more than one, to the senior of
them.
-
Article 1067
When any of the heirs sell their hereditary rights to a stranger, before the distribution, all or any one of the heirs can
subrogate himself in the place of the purchaser, reimbursing him for the
value of the purchase, provided they do so with in the term of a month,
to be counted from the day on which they have been informed of it.
-
Article 1051
-
Section Third
Effects of the Distribution
-
Article 1068
A distribution lawfully made confers upon each heir the exclusive ownership of the property adjudged to him.
-
Article 1069
After the distribution is made, the co-heirs are reciprocally bound to warrant and defend (eviccion y saneamiento) the
property adjudged.
-
Article 1070
The obligation, to which the preceding article refers, shall cease only in the following cases :
-
1
When the testator himself has made the distribution, unless it may
appear or be reasonably presumed that he desired to do contrary, it always
being understood not to conflict with the legitime.
-
2
When it has been expressly stipulated on making the distribution.
-
3
When the eviction originates from a cause subsequent to the distribution
or has been caused by the fault of the person to whom it was adjudged.
-
1
-
Article 1071
The reciprocal obligation of the co- heirs, in the case of eviction, is proportional to their respective hereditary shares;
but if any one of them is insolvent, the other co-heirs shall be liable
for his part, in the same proportion, deducting the part belonging to
the one to be indemnified.
-
Article 1072
When a credit is allotted as recoverable, the co-heirs shall not be liable for the subsequent insolvency of the debtor
of the estate, and shall be responsible only for his insolvency, at the
time the distribution is made.
-
Article 1068
-
Section Fourth
Rescission of Distribution
-
Article 1073
Distribution may be rescinded for the same causes as obligations.
-
Article 1074
Distribution may also be rescinded on account of lesion exceeding the fourth part, taking into consideration the value
of the things when they were adjudged.
-
Article 1075
The distribution made by the testator, cannot be contested on account of lesion, excepting in the cases in which it may
injure the legitime of the forced heirs, or when it may appear or it may
be reasonably presumed that the will of the testator was otherwise.
-
Article 1076
A rescissory action for lesion shall be brought within four years, to be counted from the time the distribution was made.
-
Article 1077
A defendant heir shall have an option between paying an indemnity for the injury, or consent to a new distribution.
-
Article 1078
An heir, who has alienated the whole or a considerable part of the real property adjudged to him, cannot enforce the rescissory action for lesion.
-
Article 1079
The omission of one or several objects or values of the estate shall not cause the rescission of the distribution for lesion,
but only to complete or increase the estate with the objects or values
omitted.
-
Article 1080
A distribution, made with preterition of any of the heirs, shall not be rescinded, unless it is proven that there was bad faith or deceit on the part of the other parties concerned, but the latter shall be obliged to pay to the ommitted person the proportionate share belonging to him.
-
Article 1081
When in a distribution, a person, who was believed to be an heir, without being so, has been included, it shall be null and
void.
-
Article 1073
-
Section Fifth
Payment of Hereditary Debts
-
Article 1082
Creditors, recognized as such, can object to the distribution of the estate being carried into effect, until they are paid or the amount of their credits is secured.
-
Article 1083
Creditors of one or more of the co-heirs may intervene, at their own expense, in the distribution, in order to prevent it being made in fraud or to the injury of their rights.
-
Article 1084
After the distribution is made, the creditors may exact the payment
of the debts, in full, from any of the heirs who have not accepted the
inheritance under benefit of inventory, or up to the amount of their hereditary
share in case they have accepted it under such benefit.
-
Article 1085
The co-heir, who has paid more than corresponds to his share in the estate, may claim from the others his proportionate
part.
-
The same course shall be pursued, when because of the debt being secured
by mortgage or consisting in a specified object, he has paid it in full.
The person to whom it has been adjudged may, in such case, claim from
his co-heirs only the proportional part, even when the creditor has assigned
to him his actions and subrogated him in his place.
-
-
Article 1086
When one of the tenements belonging to the estate is encumbered with a perpetual rent or real charge, it shall not be extinguished,
even when redeemable, unless a majority of the heirs agree to do it.
-
Article 1087
The co-heir, who, at the same time, is a creditor of the decedent, may claim from the others the payment of his credit,
deducting his proportional part, as such heir, and without prejudice to
what is established in section fifth, chapter fifth of this title.
-
Article 1082
-
Section First
Collation
-
General Provisions
-
Preliminary Provision
-
Book Fourth
Obligations and Contracts
-
Title I
Obligations
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Article 1088
Every obligation consists in giving, doing, or not doing a certain thing.
-
Article 1089
Obligations are created by law, by contracts, by quasi-contracts, and by illicit acts and omissions or by those in which
any kind of fault or neglect intervenes.
-
Article 1090
Obligations emanating from law are nor presumed.
-
Article 1091
Obligations arising from contracts have the force of law between the contracting parties, and must be complied with according
to the tenor of the contracts.
-
Article 1092
Civil obligations, arising from crimes or misdemeanors, shall be controlled by the provisions of the Penal Code.
-
Article 1093
Those emanating from acts or omissions, in which faults or neglect, not punished by law, intervenes, shall be subject to the provisions of chapter second of title 16 of this book.
-
Article 1088
-
Chapter Second
Nature and Effects of Obligations
-
Article 1094
A person obliged to give something is also bound to preserve it with the proper diligence of a good father of a family.
-
Article 1095
A creditor has a right to the fruits of a thing from the time the obligation of delivering it to him arises. However, he shall not acquire real rights therein, until it has been delivered to him.
-
Article 1096
When the thing to be delivered is a specified one, the creditor, independently of the right granted to him by art. 1001, may compel the debtor to make the delivery.
-
When the thing is undetermined or generic, he may ask that the obligation be complied with at the expense of the debtor.
-
When the person obliged is in default or has engaged himself to deliver the same thing to two or more different persons, until
the delivery is made, the debtor shall be liable therefor in respect to
unforeseen events.
-
-
Article 1097
The obligation of giving a specified thing comprises that of delivering all its accessories, though they may not have been mentioned.
-
Article 1098
When a person obliged to do a certain thing should not do it, it shall be ordered to be done at his expense.
-
Article 1099
The provision of paragraph two of the preceding article shall also be observed when the obligation consists in not doing, and the debtor does what has been forbidden him.
-
Article 1100
Persons obliged to deliver or to do something are in default from the moment on which the creditor exacts judicially or extra-judicially
the compliance with their obligation. However, the intimation of the creditor,
in order that default may exist, shall not be necessary:
-
1
When the obligation or law declares it expressly.
-
2
When from its nature and circumstances, it may appear that the fixing
of the time on which the thing was to be delivered or the service was to
be done, was a determinate cause to constitute the obligation, In reciprocal obligations, none of the obliged parties shall incur default,
if the other does not comply with or does not submit to duly comply with
what he is bound to do. From the moment on which one of the obligated parties
complies with his obligation, the default begins for the other party.
-
1
-
Article 1101
Those who, in compliance with their obligations, incur fraud, neglect or delay, and those who, in any way, act in opposition
to the tenor of the same, become subject to pay indemnity for the damages
and injuries caused thereby.
-
Article 1102
Liability arising from fraud is exigible in all obligations. The renunciation of the action to enforce it is null and void.
-
Article 1103
Liability arising from neglect is also exigible in the fulfillment of all kinds of obligations; but it maybe mitigated by the
court, according to the case.
-
Article 1104
The fault or negligence of the debtor consists in the omission of such diligence, as may be required by the nature of the
obligation, and may correspond to the circumstances of persons, time, and
place.
-
Article 1105
No one shall be held liable for events which could not be foreseen or those, even when foreseen, were inevitable, aside from
the cases expressly stated by law or those in which the obligation so declares.
-
Article 1106
Indemnity for damages and injuries comprises not only the amount of the loss suffered, but also that of the benefit which the creditor has failed to obtain, with exception of the provisions contained in the following articles.
-
Article 1107
The damages and injuries, for which the debtor in good faith is liable, are those foreseen or which may have been foreseen,
at the time of constituting the obligation, and which are a necessary consequence
of the failure to comply with it.
-
Article 1108
When the obligation consists in the payment of a sum of money, and the debtor is in default, the indemnity for damages and
injuries, when there is no stipulation to the contrary, shall consist in
the payment of the interest agreed upon, and, when there is no agreement,
the legal interest shall be paid.
-
Article 1109
Interest due shall produce legal interest from the date on which it was judicially demanded, even if the obligation is silent
on this point.
-
Article 1110
A receipt from the creditor for the principal, without making any reservation about interest, extinguishes the obligation
of the debtor as to such interest.
-
Article 1111
Creditors , after having pursued the property, of which the debtor is in possession, for the purpose of collecting all that is due them, may enforce all the rights and actions of the debtor for the same purpose, excepting those inherent in his person; they may also contest the acts which the debtor may have done in fraud of their rights.
-
Article 1112
All rights acquired by virtue of an obligation, are transmissible, subject to the laws, when there is no stipulation to the contrary.
-
Article 1094
-
Chapter Third
Different Kinds of Obligations
-
Section First
Pure and Conditional Obligations
-
Article 1113
Every obligation, the compliance with which does not depend upon a future or uncertain event or upon a past event,
unknown to the parties concerned, shall be immediately exigible.
-
Article 1114
In conditional obligations, the acquisition of rights, as well as the extinction or loss of those already acquired, shall depend upon the event constituting the condition.
-
Article 1115
When the fulfillment of the condition depends upon the exclusive will of the debtor, the conditional obligation shall be
null and void. If it depends upon chance or upon the will of a third person,
the obligation shall produce all its effects in accordance with the provisions
of this Code.
-
Article 1116
Impossible conditions, those contrary to good morals, and those
forbidden by law, shall void the obligation depending upon them. The condition of not doing a thing which is impossible
is considered as non-existing.
-
Article 1117
The condition, that a certain event shall happen within a certain time, shall extinguish the obligation as soon as the
time has elapsed or it should be indubitable that the event cannot take
place.
-
Article 1118
The condition that a certain even shall not occur, at a certain
time, shall render the obligation binding as soon as the time fixed has
elapsed or when it becomes evident that such event cannot happen.
-
Article 1119
The condition shall be considered as complied with when the obligated party voluntarily prevents its compliance.
-
Article 1120
The effects of the conditional obligation of giving, when the condition is complied with, will be retroactive from the day on which such obligation was constituted. Nevertheless, when the
obligation imposes reciprocal prestations on the parties concerned, the
fruits and interests for the time during which the condition has been
pending, shall be understood as compensating each other. When the obligation
is unilateral, the debtor shall become owner of the fruits and interests
collected, unless by the nature and circumstances of the obligation, it
must be inferred that the will of the person constituting it was otherwise.
-
Article 1121
The creditor may, before the fulfillment of the conditions, enforce the actions which may be proper for the preservation
of his rights.
-
Article 1122
When the conditions were established with the intent of suspending the efficiency of the obligation of giving, the following rules shall be observed in the cases in which the thing improves, or is lost, or impaired, while the condition is pending:
-
1
When the thing is lost without fault of the debtor, the obligation shall become extinguished.
-
2
When the thing was lost by the fault of the debtor, he is obliged to make an indemnity for damages and injuries.
-
3
When the thing is impaired without fault of the debtor, the impairment is to be borne by the creditor.
-
4
When the thing is impaired by fault of the debtor, the creditor may choose between the resolution of the obligation and its fulfillment, with indemnity for damages in both cases.
-
5
When the thing improves by its nature or by time, the improvements are for the benefit of the creditor.
-
6
When it improves at the expense of the debtor, the latter shall have no more rights than those granted to the usufructuary."
-
1
-
Article 1123
When the object of the conditions is to resolve the obligation of giving, after they are complied with, the parties in interest shall reciprocally return all that they have collected.
-
In cases of loss, impairment or improvement of the thing, the provisions
in respect to the debtor, contained in the preceding article, shall be
applied to the person bound to make restitution.
-
As to the obligation of doing or not doing, the provisions of the second
paragraph or art. 1120 shall be observed in regard to the effects of the
resolution.
-
-
Article 1124
The right to resolve the obligations is considered as implied
in reciprocal ones, in the cases in which one of the obligated persons
does not comply with his duties.
-
The injured party may choose between exacting the compliance with the obligation or its resolution with indemnity for damages
an'd payments of interest in both cases. He may also ask for the resolution,
even after having asked for the compliance, when the latter may appear
impossible.
-
The court shall decree the resolution petitioned for, unless there are
just causes authorizing it for fix a term.
-
This is understood without prejudge to the rights of third acquirers,
in accordance with arts. 1295 and 1298, and with the provisions of the
Law of Mortgage.
-
-
Article 1113
-
Section Second
Obligations Depending on a Term
-
Article 1125
Obligations, the fulfillment of which has been fixed for a certain
day, are exigible only when such day arrives.
-
Article 1126
In obligations depending on a certain term; what has been paid in advance cannot be recovered.
-
Article 1127
Whenever there is a term fixed in obligations, it is presumed as established for the benefit of both the creditor and debtor,
unless from its tenor or from other circumstances, it may appear that
it has been established for the benefit of one or the other.
-
Article 1128
When the obligation does not fix a term, but it can be inferred from its nature and circumstances that there was an intention
of granting it to the debtor, the courts shall fix the duration of such
a term.
-
Article 1129
The debtor shall lose all right to profit by the term:
-
1
When, after the obligation has been contracted, it appears that he is insolvent, unless he gives security for the debt.
-
2
When he does not give to the creditor the security he is bound to give.
-
3
When by his own acts, he has reduced such security, after giving it,
or when it disappears through an unforeseen event, unless it is immediately
substituted by a new one equally safe.
-
1
-
Article 1130
When the term of the obligation is fixed by days, to be counted from a specified one, such day shall be excluded from the
computation which shall begin on the following day.
-
Article 1125
-
Section Third
Alternative Obligations
-
Article 1131
A person, who is alternatively obliged to make different prestations, shall fully comply with one of them.
-
Article 1132
The election belongs to the debtor, unless it has been expressly granted to the creditor.
-
Article 1133
An election shall not be effectual, until due notice has been given of it.
-
Article 1134
A debtor shall lose the right to elect when, of the prestations which he is alternatively obliged to fulfill, only one is feasible.
-
Article 1135
A creditor shall have a right to be indemnified for damages and injuries when, by the fault of the debtor, all the things,
which were alternatively the objects of the obligation, have disappeared,
or it has become impossible to comply with the same.
-
Article 1136
When an election has been expressly given to the creditor, the obligation shall cease to be alternative, from the date
on which notice of such election has been given to the debtor. Until this
date, the liability of such debtor shall be governed by the following
rules:
-
1
When any of the things has been lost by an unforeseen event, he will
comply by delivering the one which the creditor may select from among
those remaining, or the one that remains, if only one exists.
-
2
When the loss of any of the things has been caused by the fault of
the debtor, the creditor may claim any of those which still remain, or
the value of the one which has disappeared by the fault of the debtor.
-
3
When all the things have been lost by the fault of the debtor, the
creditor shall have a right to select the value of any one of them.
-
1
-
Article 1131
-
Section Fourth
Several and Joint Obligations
-
Article 1137
The concurrence of two or more creditors or of two or more debtors, in a single obligation, does not imply that each one
of the former has a right to ask, nor each one of the latter is bound
to comply in full with the things which are the objects of such obligation.
This shall only take place when the obligation determines it expressly, and is constituted as a joint obligation.
-
Article 1138
If from the context of the obligation, referred to in the preceding
article, any other thing does not appear, the credit or the debt shall
be presumed as divided in as many equal parts as there are creditors or
debtors, and shall be considered as credits or debts, each one different from the others.
-
Article 1139
When the division is impossible, the right of the creditors shall only be impaired by the collective acts of the same, and
the debts shall only be recoverable by proceedings against all of the
debtors. If any one of them is found to be insolvent, the others shall
not be obliged to pay his share.
-
Article 1140
Solidarity may exist, even when the creditors and debtors are not bound in the same manner, and for the same periods and
under the same conditions.
-
Article 1141
Each one of the joint creditors can do whatever may be profitable,
but not what may be injurious to the others.
-
Article 1142
A debtor may pay the debt to any one of the joint creditors, but when it has been judicially demanded by any one of them, he must pay to this particular one.
-
Article 1143
Novation, compensation, confusion or remission of the debt, made by any of the joint creditors, or with any of the debtors
of the same class, extinguishes the obligation without prejudice to the
provisions of art. 1146.
-
Article 1144
A creditor may sue any of the joint debtors or all of them simultaneously. The claims instituted against one shall not be an obstacle for those that may be later presented against the others, as long as it does not appear that the debt has been collected in full.
-
Article 1145
A payment made by one of the joint debtors extinguishes the obligation.
-
A person who has made the payment can only claim from his co-debtors the
shares pertaining to each one with the interest on the amounts advanced.
-
The failure to comply with the obligation, on account of the insolvency
of a joint debtor, shall be made good by the co-debtors in proportion
to the debt of each one of them.
-
-
Article 1146
The liberation or remission, made by the creditor of the part affecting one of the joint debtors, does not release this
one of his liability as to the co-debtors, in case the debt has been fully
pay by any one of them.
-
Article 1147
When the thing has perished, or the prestation has become impossible, without any fault of the joint debtors, the obligation
shall be extinguished.
-
Article 1148
A joint debtor may utilize, against the claims of the creditor, all the exceptions derived from the nature of the obligation,
and those which are personal to him. Those which personally pertain to
the others may be employed by him only as to the share of the debt for
which such co-debtors may be responsible.
-
Article 1137
-
Section Fifth
Divisible and Indivisible Obligations
-
Article 1149
The divisibility or indivisibility of things, objects of obligations,
in which there is a single debtor and a single creditor, neither changes nor modifies the provisions of chapter
second of this title.
-
Article 1150
An indivisible several obligation is determined by paying the indemnity for damage and injury, from the moment that any of
the debtors fails to comply with his duties. The debtors, who have been
ready to comply with their duties, shall only contribute to the indemnity
in a sum equivalent to the corresponding portion of the value of the thing
or of the service in which the obligation consists.
-
Article 1151
For the effects of the preceding articles, the obligation of giving specified things, and all those which are not susceptible of
partial fulfillment, shall be considered as indivisible.
-
The obligations of doing shall be divisible when their object is the prestation of a number of days of work, the execution of work by units of measure, or any other similar things which
by their nature are susceptible of partial fulfillment.
-
In the obligation of not doing, the divisibility or indivisibility, shall
be decided by characteristics of the prestation in each particular case.
-
-
Article 1149
-
Section Sixth
Obligations with Penal Clause
-
Article 1152
In obligations with a penal clause, the penalty shall substitute
the indemnity for damages and the payment of interest in cause of a failure to comply therewith, if it has not been
otherwise stipulated.
-
Article 1153
The debtor cannot exempt himself from the fulfillment of the obligation
by paying the penalty, unless in case that such right has been expressly reserved to him.
-
Article 1154
The Judge shall equitably modify the penalty, when the principal
obligation has been partly or irregularly complied with by the debtor.
-
Article 1155
The nullity of the penal clause does not carry with it that of the principal obligation.
-
Article 1152
-
Section First
Pure and Conditional Obligations
-
Chapter Fourth
Extinction of Obligations
-
General Provisions
-
Article 1156
Obligations are extinguished:
-
Article 1156
-
Section First
Payment
-
Article 1157
A debt shall not be considered as paid, until the total amount of the thing has been delivered, or the prestation of which the obligation consisted has been made.
-
Article 1158
Any person, whether he has an interest or not in the compliance with the obligation, and whether the debtor knows it
and approves it or is not aware of it, can make the payment.
-
Article 1159
He who pays in the name of the debtor, when the latter is not aware of it, cannot compel the creditor to subrogate him
in the rights the creditor possesses.
-
Article 1160
In obligations of giving, the payment made by the person who has not the free disposal of the thing due, and capacity
for conveying it, shall not be valid.
-
Article 1161
In obligations of doing, the creditor cannot be compelled to receive the prestation or the services from a third party, when the quality and circumstances of the person of the debtor has been taken into account in establishing the obligation.
-
Article 1162
Payment shall be made to the person in whose favor the obligation is constituted, or to another authorized to receive it in his name.
-
Article 1163
The payment, made to a person who is incapable to manage his
property, shall be valid, in so far as it may be employed for his benefit.
-
Article 1164
A payment made, in good faith, to the person who is in possession of the credit shall release the debtor.
-
Article 1165
A payment made by the debtor to the creditor, after he has been judicially ordered to retain the debt, shall not be
valid.
-
Article 1166
The debtor for a thing cannot oblige his creditor to receive a different one, even when it should be of equal or superior
value to the thing due.
-
Article 1167
When the obligation consists in the delivery of a thing, not specified or generic, the quality and circumstances of which
have not been expressed, the creditor cannot exact one of a superior
quality nor can the debtor deliver an inferior one.
-
Article 1168
Extrajudicial expenses, caused by the payment, shall be charged to the debtor. The court in accordance with the Code of Civil Procedure shall decide about the judicial expenses.
-
Article 1169
Unless the contract expressly authorizes it, the creditor cannot be compelled to partially receive the prestations of
which the obligation consists.
-
Article 1170
Payments of debts in money shall be made in the class of coins stipulated, and when it is not possible to deliver the
same class, in legal silver or gold coin current in Spain.
-
Article 1171
Payments shall be made at the place designated in the obligation.
-
Imputation of Payments
-
Article 1172
A person having several debts of the same class, in favor of
a single creditor, can declare, at the time of making a payment, to
which of them it must be applied.
-
Article 1173
If the debt bears interest, the payment cannot be considered as made on account of the principal, until the interest is covered.
-
Article 1174
When the payment cannot be imputed, according to the preceding rules, the debt, which is most onerous for the debtor among those which have matured, shall be considered as the one paid.
-
Article 1172
-
Payment by Assignment of Property
-
Article 1175
The debtor may assign his property to creditors in payment of
his debts. This assignment liberates the former from liability to the net amount of the property assigned, unless
there are stipulations to the contrary. Agreements in respect to the
effects of an assignment, entered into between the debtor and his creditors,
shall be made in accordance with the provisions of title seventeenth
of this book, and with what is prescribed in the Code of Civil Procedure.
-
Article 1175
-
Tender of Payment and Consignation
-
Article 1176
When the creditor, to whom the tender of payment has been made,
refuses to accept it, without reason, the debtor shall remain free from
all liability by the consignation of the thing due.
The same effect shall be produced by the consignation alone when made in the absence of the creditor, or when he is incapacitated
from receiving the payment, at the time in which it is due, and when
several persons pretend to have a right to collect it, or when the title
of the obligation has been mislaid.
-
Article 1177
In order that the consignation of the thing due may liberate
the obligee, notice of it shall previously be given to the persons interested
in the fulfillment of the obligation.
Consignation shall be ineffective when not strictly adjusted to the
provision regulating payment.
-
Article 1178
Consignation shall be made by depositing the things due, at
the disposal of the judicial authority before whom it shall be proven that, in the proper case, the tender has been made and,
in all other cases, that notice has been given of the consignation.
After consignation is made, notice thereof shall also be given the parties
concerned.
-
Article 1179
The expenses of consignation, when proper, shall be charged to the creditor.
-
Article 1180
After the consignation is duly made, the debtor can ask the
Judge to order the cancellation of the obligation.
While the creditor has not accepted the consignation or no judicial
decision has been rendered that it has been well done, the debtor may
withdraw the thing or sum consigned, leaving the obligation subsisting.
-
Article 1181
If, after the consignation is made, the creditor authorized the debtor to withdraw it, the former shall lose all the
(right) of preference which he has in the thing.
The co-debtors and sureties shall become discharged.
-
Article 1176
-
Article 1157
-
Section Second
Loss of the Thing Due
-
Article 1182
The obligation, which consists in the delivery of a specified
thing, shall be extinguished when this thing is lost or destroyed without fault of the debtor and before he has
become liable for delay.
-
Article 1183
Whenever the thing is lost, when in the possession of the debtor, it shall be presumed that the loss has occurred by his
fault and not by an unforeseen event, unless there is proof to the contrary
and without prejudice to provision of art. 1096.
-
Article 1184
In obligations of doing, the debtor shall also be liberated when the prestation appears to be legally or physically impossible.
-
Article 1185
When the debt for a certain and specified thing originates from a crime or fault, the debtor shall not be exempted from
the payment of its value, whatever the cause of the loss may be, unless,
when after he has offered the thing to the person, who should have received
it, this person without reason had refused to accept it.
-
Article 1186
Whenever the obligation is extinguished by the loss of the thing, all actions which the debtor should have against third
persons, on account of it, pass to the creditor.
-
Article 1182
-
Section Third
Remission of Debts
-
Article 1187
A remission may be made either expressly or tacitly.
Both of them shall be governed by the provisions which rule inofficious donations.
An express remission must, besides, be adjusted to the forms of a donation.
-
Article 1188
A voluntary surrender, made by a creditor to his debtor, of a private document which bears evidence of a credit, implies
the renunciation of the action which the former had against the latter.
When, for the purpose of invalidating this renunciation, it is claimed
that it is inofficious, the debtor and his heirs may support it by proving
that the delivery of the document was made on account of the payment of
the debt.
-
Article 1189
Whenever a private document from which the debt appears is in the possession of the debtor, it shall be presumed that
the creditor delivered it by his own will, unless the contrary is proven.
-
Article 1190
The remission of the principal debt shall extinguish the accessory obligations, but the remission of the latter shall leave
the former existing.
-
Article 1191
The accessory obligation of a pledge shall be considered remitted, when the pledge, after having been delivered to the
creditor, is found in the possession of the debtor.
-
Article 1187
-
Section Fourth
Confusion of Rights
-
Article 1192
Whenever the capacities of creditor and debtor are merged in the
same person, the obligation becomes extinguished.
The case in which this confusion takes place by title of inheritance is excepted, when such inheritance has been accepted under benefit of inventory.
-
Article 1193
The confusion which takes place in the person of the debtor or
of the principal creditor is beneficial to the sureties. The one which takes place in the person of any of such sureties
does not extinguish the obligation.
-
Article 1194
Confusion does not extinguish debts in severalty, except as to the part which corresponds to the creditor or debtor in whom
both capacities are merged.
-
Article 1192
-
Section Fifth
Compensation (Set-Off)
-
Article 1195
Compensation shall take place when two persons, in their own rights,
are reciprocally creditors and debtors of each other.
-
Article 1196
In order that compensation may be effectual, it is required:
-
1
That each one of the persons bound may be principally so, and that he may be, at the same time, the principal creditor of the other.
-
2
That both debts consist in a sum of money or, when the things due are
perishable, that they be of the same kind and also of the same quality,
when the latter has been stipulated.
-
3
That both debts are due.
-
4
That they are liquid and exigible.
-
5
That no retention or suit, instituted by a third party and of which due notice has been given to the debtor, affects any of them.
-
1
-
Article 1197
Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the sureties may oppose compensation in respect to what the creditor
owes to his principal debtor.
-
Article 1198
The debtor, who has consented to an assignment of rights, made by a creditor in favor of a third party, cannot oppose,
against the assignee, the compensation which should pertain to him against
the assignor.
When the creditor gave him notice of the assignment and the debtor did
not consent to it, he may oppose compensation for the debts, prior to
such assignment, but not for those contracted afterwards.
When the assignment is made without knowledge of the debtor, he can oppose compensation for the credits, prior to it, and for
those contracted subsequently, until he has been informed of the assignment.
-
Article 1199
Debts payable in different places may be compensated by an indemnity for the expenses of transportation or for the exchange
at the place of payment.
-
Article 1200
Compensation shall not take place when any of the debts arises from a deposit or from the obligations of the depositary
or borrower.
Neither can it be opposed to the creditor for support due under a gratuitous
title.
-
Article 1201
When a person has against himself different debts, which may be compensated, the provisions referring to imputation of payments
shall be observed in the order of compensation.
-
Article 1202
The effect of compensation is to extinguish both debts to the concurrent amount, even when the creditors and debtors have
no knowledge of it.
-
Article 1195
-
Section Sixth
Novation
-
Article 1203
Obligations can be modified:
-
Article 1204
In order that an obligation may be extinguished by another which substitutes it, it is necessary that it should be so
expressly declared, or that the old and new be absolutely incompatible.
-
Article 1205
Novation, consisting in the substitution of any debtor in the place of the original one, can be made without the knowledge
of the latter, but not without the consent of the creditor.
-
Article 1206
The insolvency of the new debtor, who has been accepted by the creditor, shall not revive the action of the latter against
the original debtor, unless said insolvency has been prior, public, and
known to the debtor when he transfers his debt.
-
Article 1207
When the principal obligation is extinguished by effect of the novation, the accessory obligations shall only subsist in
so far as they benefit third parties who have not given their consent.
-
Article 1208
Novation is null and void, if the original obligation is also so, unless the cause of nullity can be claimed by the debtor only or the ratification gives validity to acts which were null in their origin.
-
Article 1209
The subrogation of a third party in the rights of a creditor cannot be presumed, except in the cases expressly mentioned
in this Code.
In other cases, it shall be necessary to prove it clearly in order that it may be effectual.
-
Article 1210
Subrogation is presumed:
-
1
When a creditor pays another preferred creditor.
-
2
When a third party, who is not interested in the obligation, pays with the express or tacit approval of the debtor.
-
3
When the person, who has interest in the fulfillment of the obligation,
pays, without injury to the effect of the confusion in respect to the
share belonging to him.
-
1
-
Article 1211
A debtor may make the subrogation, without the consent of the creditor, when for paying the debt, he has borrowed money by a public deed, stating therein his intent and setting forth, in the release, the origin of the sum paid.
-
Article 1212
Subrogation transfers to the subrogated the credit with the rights annexed to it, either against the debtor or against third
parties, be they sureties or holders of mortgages.
-
Article 1213
A creditor, to whom a partial payment has been made, may enforce his right for the balance, with preference to the person
subrogated in his stead by virtue of the partial payment of the same credit.
-
Article 1203
-
General Provisions
-
Chapter Fifth
Proof of Obligations
-
General Provisions
-
Article 1214
Proof of obligations devolves upon the persons claiming their fulfillment, and that of their extinguishment falls upon those who oppose the same.
-
Article 1215
Proofs can be made by instruments, by confession, by the personal inspection of a Judge, by experts, by witnesses, and by presumptions.
-
Article 1214
-
Section First
Public Documents
-
Article 1216
Public documents are those authorized by a Notary or by a competent public official, with the solemnities required by law.
-
Article 1217
Documents in which a Notary Public intervenes shall be governed by the Notarial law.
-
Article 1218
Public instruments are evidence, even against a third party, of the fact which gave cause for their execution and of the date of the same.
They shall also be evidence against the contracting parties and those holding rights under them, as to the declarations made in them by the former.
-
Article 1219
Public instruments, made for the purpose of weakening a former deed, between the same parties, shall be effectual against third parties only when their contents have been annotated in the proper public registry or on the margin of the original deed, and on the transcription or copy by virtue of which the third parties have acted.
-
Article 1220
Copies of public instruments of which there is an original or protocol, when contested by those to whom they cause
damage, shall have probatory force only when they have been duly collated.
If there is any difference between the original and the copy, the contents
of the former shall govern.
-
Article 1221
When the original deed, the protocol, and the original file have disappeared, the following shall constitute evidence:
-
1
The first copies taken by the public officer who had authorized them.
-
2
The subsequent copies, issued by order of a court, after summoning the interested parties.
-
3
Those which may have been taken in the presence of the interested parties and with their assent, but without judicial order.
-
In default of the above mentioned copies, any other copies, thirty or
more years old, shall be evidence, provided they have been taken from
the original by the officer who authorized them or by any other in charge
of their custody.
-
Copies less than thirty years old, or which are authorized by a public
official, in which the circumstances, specified in the preceding paragraph
do not concur, shall serve only as a beginning of written evidence.
-
The probatory force of copies of a copy shall be valued by the courts
according to circumstances.
-
1
-
Article 1222
The inscription in any public registry of a document which has disappeared shall be valued, according to the rules established in the last two paragraphs of the preceding articles.
-
Article 1223
An instrument, defective by the incompetency of the Notary, or by any other fault in its form, shall be considered as a private document when signed by the parties who executed the same.
-
Article 1224
An instrument of recognition of an act or contract proves nothing against the instrument by which the same was executed, when, by excess or omission, they disagree with it, unless the novation of the former is expressly proven.
-
Private Documents
-
Article 1225
A private document legally recognized shall have, as to those who executed it and those holding rights under them, the same force as a public instrument.
-
Article 1226
A person against whom a written obligation, which appears subscribed by him, is set up in court is bound to declare
whether the subscription is or is not his own.
The heirs and those holding rights under the person bound may limit themselves to state if they know whether the subscription
of the obligation is, or is not that of their principal.
Refusal, without a just cause, to make the declaration mentioned in
the preceding paragraph, may be considered by the court as a confession
of the genuineness of the document.
-
Article 1227
The date of a private document shall be considered, in respect to third parties, only from the date on which it has been
filed or inscribed in a public registry, from the death of any of the
persons who subscribe it, or from the date on which it is delivered
to a public official by virtue of his office.
-
Article 1228
Entries, registries, and private papers shall be evidence only against the person who has written them in all that may
appear clearly stated, but the person who wants to be benefited by such
is bound to accept them also in the part which is injurious to him.
-
Article 1229
A note written or signed by a creditor, at the end, in the margin, or on the back of a document held by him, constitutes
evidence in all that is favorable to the debtor.
The same thing shall be understood of the notes written or signed by
the creditor, on the back, in the margin, or at the foot of the duplicate
of a document or receipt which the debtor holds.
In both cases, the debtor, who wishes to avail himself of what is favorable
to him, shall have to abide by what is injurious as well.
-
Article 1230
Private documents made for the purpose of changing the stipulations made in a public instrument produce no effect against a third party.
-
Article 1225
-
Article 1216
-
Section Second
Confession
-
Article 1231
Confession may be made either judicially or extrajudicially.
In both cases, it shall be an indispensable condition for the validity
of the confession that it should relate to personal acts of the confessor
and that he may have legal capacity for making it.
-
Article 1232
Confession is evidence against the author.
Exception is made of the cases in which compliance with the laws may be
evaded by such confession.
-
Article 1233
The confession cannot be partially used against him who makes it, unless it refers to different facts or when a part of the confession is proven by other means, or when, in any particular, it may be contrary to nature or law.
-
Article 1234
Confession loses its effectiveness only when it is proven that on the making of it an error of fact was committed.
-
Article 1235
A judicial confession must be made under oath before a competent
judge, and when he who may be benefited by it has actual representation in the proceedings.
-
Article 1236
When judicial confession under decisory oath is demanded, the party from whom it is requested may ask the oath to be referred
to the adversary, and if the latter refuses to give it, it shall be considered
that the person has confessed.
-
Article 1237
Decisory oath cannot be demanded about incriminating facts nor on questions about which the parties cannot compromise.
-
Article 1238
Confession made under decisory oath, whether deferred or referred,
constitutes a proof only in favor or against the parties who submitted
to it or their heirs, and persons holding rights under them.
No proof shall be admitted about the falseness of such oath.
-
Article 1239
Extrajudicial confession shall be considered as an act subject to the appreciation of the courts, according to the rules
established about evidence.
-
Article 1231
-
Section Third
Personal Inspection by the Judge
-
Article 1240
Evidence by personal inspection of the Judge shall only be effective
in so far as it clearly permits the court to estimate, by the external
appearance of the thing inspected, the fact which he tries to ascertain.
-
Article 1241
The inspection made by a judge may be estimated in the sentence
rendered by another judge, provided the former has set forth with perfect clearness, in the proceedings, the details
and circumstances of the things inspected.
-
Article 1240
-
Section Fourth
Evidence by Experts
-
Article 1242
This class of evidence can only be used, when, in order to estimate the facts, scientific, artistic or practical knowledge is necessary or convenient.
-
Article 1243
The value of this evidence and the form in which it must be given are the subjects of the provisions of the Code of Civil Procedure.
-
Article 1242
-
Section Fifth
Evidence by Witnesses
-
Article 1244
Evidence by witnesses shall be admissible in all cases in which it has not been expressly forbidden.
-
Article 1245
All persons, of either sex, who are not unable by natural incapacity or by the provisions of law, can be witnesses.
-
Article 1246
The following cannot be witnesses by natural incapacity:
-
Article 1247
The following persons are incapable by provisions of law:
-
1
Those who are directly interested in the suit
-
2
The ascendants in the suits of their descendants and the latter in those of the former.
-
3
The father-in-law or mother-in-law in the suits of the son-in law or daughter-in-law, and vice versa.
-
4
The husband in the suits of his wife and the wife in those of the husband.
-
5
Those who, on account of their condition or profession, are bound to keep secrecy in matters relating to their profession or condition.
-
6
Those who are especially disqualified to be witnesses in certain acts.
-
1
-
Article 1248
The probatory force of the depositions of the witnesses shall be valued by the courts in accordance with the provisions of the Law of Civil Procedure, taking care to avoid that, by the simple coincidences of some depositions, unless their truthfulness be evident, the affairs may be finally decided in which are usually employed public deeds, private documents, or any commencement or written evidence.
-
Article 1244
-
Section Sixth
Presumptions
-
Article 1249
Presumptions are only admissable when the facts from which they are to be deduced are completely proven.
-
Article 1250
Presumptions established by law exempt those favored by them from producing any further evidence.
-
Article 1251
Presumptions established by law can be destroyed by evidence to the contrary, except in those cases in which it is expressly prohibited.
Only a sentence obtained in a suit for revision shall be effective against the presumption that a final judgment is true.
-
Article 1252
In order that the presumption of a final sentence may be effective
in another suit, it is necessary that between the case determined by the
sentence and that in which the same is invoked, there shall be the most
perfect identity, between the things, the causes, and the persons of the
litigants, and the capacity, under which they litigated.
In questions relating to the civil condition of persons and in those about
the validity or nullity of testamentary provisions, the presumption of
a final sentence shall be effective against third parties, even if they
have not litigated.
It is understood that there is identity of persons whenever the litigants
of the second suit hold rights under those who litigated in the preceding
suit, or when they are united to them by liens of solidarity, or by those
which are established by the indivisibility of prestations among those
who have the right to exact them, or those who are bound to satisfy the
same.
-
Article 1253
In order that presumptions, not established by law, may be considered
as means of evidence, it is indispensable that between the facts demonstrated and the one that is to be deduced, should exist a precise and direct connection according
to the rules of human criterion.
-
Article 1249
-
General Provisions
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Title II
Contracts
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Article 1254
A contract exists from the moment when one or several persons consent to bind himself or themselves, in respect to another or others, to give some thing or to render some service.
-
Article 1255
The contracting parties may establish any pacts, clauses, and conditions which they deem convenient, provided they do not conflict with the laws, morals, or public order.
-
Article 1256
The validity and fulfillment of contracts cannot be left to the will of one of the contracting parties.
-
Article 1257
Contracts shall only be effectual between the parties by whom they are executed and their heirs, except, with respect
to the latter, in the cases where the rights and obligations originating
from the contract are not transmissible, either by their nature, or by pact,
or by provision of law.
When the contract contains any stipulation in favor of a third party, he
can exact its fulfillment, whenever he has given notice of his acceptance
to the person bound, before the said stipulation has been revoked.
-
Article 1258
Contracts are perfected by mere consent and from that time they are binding, not only in respect to the fulfillment of what
has been expressly stipulated, but also in all the consequences which, according
to their nature, are in accordance with good faith, use, and law.
-
Article 1259
No one can contract in the name of another without being authorized by him, or without lawfully having his legal representation.
A contract, entered into in the name of another by one who has not either
his authorization or legal representation, shall be null and void, unless
it is ratified by the person in whose name it was executed, before it is
revoked by the other contracting party.
-
Article 1260
Oaths shall not be admitted in contracts. If admitted, they shall be considered as not existing.
-
Article 1254
-
Chapter Second
Essential Requirements for the Validity of Contracts
-
Article 1261
There is no contract unless the following requirements are present:
-
Article 1261
-
Section First
Consent
-
Article 1262
Consent is shown by the concurrence of the offer and of the acceptance
of the thing and the cause which shall constitute the contract.
Acceptance made by letter only binds the person who made the offer when it came to his notice. The contract, in this case,
is presumed as entered into at the place where the offer was made.
-
Article 1263
The following persons cannot give their consent:
-
Article 1264
The incapacity, set forth in the preceding article, is subject to the modifications which are determined by law and is to
be understood without prejudice to the special incapacities established
by such law.
-
Article 1265
Consent given by error, under violence, intimidation or by deceit shall be void.
-
Article 1266
In order that the error may invalidate the consent, it must refer
to the substance of the thing, object of the contract, or to those conditions
of the same, which should have been principally the cause of its celebration.
An error as to the person shall invalidate a contract only when the consideration
of the person should have been the principal cause of the contract.
A mere error of accounts shall only give cause for its correction.
-
Article 1267
Violence exists when, to exact the consent, an irresistible force is used.
Intimidation exists when one of the contracting parties is inspired with
a reasonable and well grounded fear of suffering and imminent and serious
injury to his person or property, or to the person or property of his
consort, descendants or ascendants.
To qualify the intimidation, the age, sex, and status of the person must
be considered.
Fear of displeasing the persons to whom obedience and respect is due shall
not annul the contract.
-
Article 1268
Violence or intimidation shall annul the obligation, even if they have been employed by a third person who did not intervene in the contract.
-
Article 1269
There is deceit, when by words or insidious contrivances on the part of one of the contracting parties, the other is induced to enter into a contract which he would not have done without the use of them.
-
Article 1270
In order that deceit may cause the nullity of a contract, it should be grevious and must not have been employed by both
of the contracting parties.
Incidental deceit renders only the party who employed it liable to indemnity
for damages and injuries.
-
Section Second
Objects of Contracts
-
Article 1271
All things, even future ones, which are not out of the commerce of men, can be objects of contracts.
Notwithstanding, no contract can be entered into in respect to future inheritances, other than those whose object is to make a distribution inter vivos of the estate, according to art. 1056.
All services not contrary to law or to good morals may also be the object of a contract.
-
Article 1272
Things or services which are impossible cannot be the object of a contract.
-
Article 1273
The object of every contract must be a thing determined as to its kind. The indetermination of the sum cannot be an obstacle to the existence of the contract, provided it may be possible to determine it without necessity of a new agreement between the contracting parties.
-
Article 1271
-
Section Third
Consideration (causa) for Contracts
-
Article 1274
In onerous contracts, the prestation or promise of a thing or
services by the other party is understood as a consideration for each
contracting party; in remuneratory ones, the services or benefits remunerated,
and in those of pure beneficence, the mere liberality of the benefactor.
-
Article 1275
Contracts without consideration or with an illicit one are not effectual. A consideration is illicit, when it is contrary to law and good morals.
-
Article 1276
The statement of a false consideration in contracts shall render them void, unless it is proven that they were based on another real and licit one.
-
Article 1277
Although the consideration is not expressed in the contract, it is presumed as existing and that it is licit, unless the debtor proves the contrary.
-
Article 1274
-
Article 1262
-
Chapter Third
Effectiveness of Contracts
-
Article 1278
Contracts shall be binding, whatever the form may be in which they have been entered into, provided the essential conditions required for their validity are present.
-
Article 1279
When the law exacts the execution of a deed or other special form
for making effectual suitable obligations of a contract, the contracting
parties may compel each other to comply with such forms, from the moment
in which consent and the other requirements, necessary for their validity, have taken place.
-
Article 1280
The following must be executed by a public instrument:
-
1
Acts and contracts the object of which is the creation, transmission,
modification or extinction of real rights on real property.
-
2
The leases of the same property for six or more years, whenever they shall cause damage to third parties.
-
3
Marriage contracts, and the constitution and increase of dowries, whenever it is intended to enforce them against third parties.
-
4
The assignment, repudiation , and renunciation of hereditary rights or of those of the conjugal society.
-
5
The power for contracting marriage, the general one for law suits, and
the special ones which are to be presented in a law suit; the power for
administering property and any other, the object of which is an act drawn
or which is to be drawn in a public instrument, or which may do injury to
a third party.
-
6
The assignment of actions or rights proceeding from an act specified in a public instrument.
-
1
-
Article 1278
-
Chapter Fourth
Interpretation of Contracts
-
Article 1281
When the terms of a contract are clear and leave no doubt about
the intentions of the contracting parties, the literal sense of its clauses
shall rule.
When the words appear contrary to the evident intention of the contracting
parties, the intention is to prevail.
-
Article 1282
To form a judgment about the intention of the contracting parties, attention must principally be paid to their acts, contemporaneous and subsequent to the contract.
-
Article 1283
However general the terms of a contract may be, there should not be understood as comprised in it, things and cases different from those about which the parties interested intended to contract.
-
Article 1284
When any of the clauses of a contract admits of different meanings, it should be understood in the sense most suitable to be effective.
-
Article 1285
The clauses of a contract should be interpreted in relation to one another giving to those that are doubtful the meaning which may result from the consideration of all of them together.
-
Article 1286
Words which may have different meanings shall be taken in the meaning which may be nearest in accordance with the nature and object of the contract.
-
Article 1287
The uses or customs of the country shall be taken in consideration in interpreting the ambiguity in contracts, and shall supply
in them the omissions of clauses which are usually established therein.
-
Article 1288
The interpretation of the obscure clauses of a contract shall not favor the party who caused such obscurity.
-
Article 1289
When it is absolutely impossible to resolve the doubts by the rules
set forth in the preceding articles, if these deal with incidental circumstances
of the contract, and this contract be gratuitous, they shall be resolved
in favor of the smallest transmission of rights and interests. If the contract
be onerous, the doubt shall be decided in favor of the greatest reciprocity
of interests.
When the doubts, a decision about which is referred to in this article,
deal about the principal object of the contract, in such a way that the
intention or will of the contracting parties cannot be ascertained, the
contract shall be null and void.
-
Article 1281
-
Chapter Fifth
Rescission of Contracts
-
Article 1290
Contracts validly entered into may be rescinded in the cases provided by law.
-
Article 1291
The following contracts are rescindable:
-
1
Those which may be entered into by guardians without the authorization
of the family council, whenever the person represented by them has suffered
lesion of more than one fourth part of the value of the things which have
been the object of such contracts.
-
2
Those entered into in representation of absentees, provided they have
suffered the lesion, referred to in the preceding paragraph.
-
3
Those entered into in fraud of the creditors, when they cannot recover,
in any other way, what is due them.
-
4
Contracts which refer to litigious things, when they have been entered
into by the defendant without the knowledge and approval of the parties
in litigation or of competent judicial authority.
-
5
Any others specially determined by law.
-
1
-
Article 1292
Payments made, while in the condition of insolvency, by a debtor on account of obligations, the compliance with which at the time of making them the debtor could not be compelled to do, are also rescindable.
-
Article 1293
No contract shall be rescinded for lesion, except those specified in nos. 1 and 2 of art. 1291.
-
Article 1294
The action for rescission is a subsidiary one and can be enforced only when the injured party has no other remedy to obtain the reparation for the injury.
-
Article 1295
Rescission obliges the return of the things which were the objects
of the contract, together with their fruits and the value with interest,
therefore, it can only be carried into effect when the person who claims
it can return that which, on his part, he is bound to do.
Neither can rescission take place when the things, objects of the contract,
are lawfully in the possession of third parties who have not acted in bad
faith.
In this case the indemnity for damages may be claimed from the person who
caused the lesion.
-
Article 1296
The rescission, to which no. 2 of art. 1291 refers, shall not be allowed in contracts made with judicial authorization.
-
Article 1297
All contracts by virtue of which the debtor conveys property, under
gratuitous title, are presumed to be made in fraud of creditors.
Conveyances, under onerous titles, made by persons against whom a condemnatory
sentence, in any instance, has been previously rendered, or a writ of seizure
of property has been issued, shall also be presumed fraudulent.
-
Article 1298
Any person, who has in bad faith acquired things, alienated in fraud
of creditors, shall indemnify the latter for the damages and injuries caused
to them by the conveyance, whenever, by any reason, it may be impossible
for him to return them.
-
Article 1299
The action asking rescission must be brought within four years.
For persons subject to guardianship and for absentees, the four years shall
not commence to run, until the incapacity of the former has ceased to exist
or the domicil of the latter is known.
-
Article 1290
-
Chapter Sixth
Nullity of Contracts
-
Article 1300
Contracts, in which the requirements stated in art. 1261 concur, can be annulled, even when there is no lesion to the contracting parties, whenever they are affected by one of the vices which invalidate them according to law.
-
Article 1301
The action for nullity shall last only four years.
This term shall commence to run in cases of intimidation or violence from
the day on which it has ceased.
In those of error or deceit or falseness of consideration, from the date
of the consumation of the contract When the object of the action is to invalidate contracts, made by a married
woman, without consent or by competent authority, from the date of the dissolution
of the marriage.
And when it refers to contracts, entered into by minors or incapables, from
the date when they were freed from guardianship.
-
Article 1302
The action for nullity of contracts can be exercised by those who are principally or subsidiarily obligated by virtue of them. Capable persons cannot, however, allege the incapacity of those who contracted with them; neither those who caused the intimidation or violence, or employed deceit, or caused the error, can base their action on such vices of the contract.
-
Article 1303
When the nullity of an obligation has been declared, the contracting parties shall restore to each other the things which have been the matter of the contract with their fruits, and the value with its interest, except what is provided by the following articles.
-
Article 1304
When the nullity is caused by the incapacity of one of the contracting parties, the incapable is not obliged to make restitution, except to the extent he has profited by the thing or by the value received by him.
-
Article 1305
When the nullity arises from the illegality of the consideration
or the object of the contract, if the fact constitutes a crime or fault,
common to both contracting parties, they shall have no action against each
other and proceedings shall be instituted against them, and the things or
value which may have been the matter of the contract shall be applied, as
provided in the Penal Code in respect to the goods or instruments of the crime or fault.
This provision is applicable to the cases in which there is a crime or fault
on the part of only one of the contracting parties, but the one who is not
culpable, shall be entitled to recover what he has given, and shall not
be bound to comply with what he has promised.
-
Article 1306
If the fact of which the illicit consideration consists does not
constitute either a crime or fault, the following rules shall be observed:
-
1
When both parties are culpable, neither of them can recover what he has
given by virtue of the contract, nor claim the fulfillment of what the other
party has offered.
-
2
When only one of the contracting parties is culpable, this one shall
not recover what he has given by virtue of the contract, nor ask for the
fulfillment of what has been offered to him. The other party, who has .
had nothing to do with the illicit consideration, may claim what he has
given, without being obliged to comply with what he has offered.
-
1
-
Article 1307
Whenever a person, who is obliged by a declaration of nullity to return a thing, cannot return it because it has been lost, he shall return the fruits collected and the value which the thing had when lost, together with the interest from the same date.
-
Article 1308
While one of the contracting parties does not return that which he is obliged to deliver by virtue of the declaration of nullity, the other cannot be compelled to comply with what is incumbent on him.
-
Article 1309
The action of nullity becomes extinguished from the moment in which the validity of the contract has been confirmed.
-
Article 1310
Only contracts which have all the requirements stated in art. 1261, can be confirmed.
-
Article 1311
The confirmation can be made either expressly or tacitly. It shall be understood that there is a tacit confirmation, when being aware of the cause of the nullity and such cause having ceased to exist, the person, who has the right to invoke it, executes an act which necessarily implies his will to renounce such a right.
-
Article 1312
Confirmation does not require the consent of the contracting parties who are not entitled to exercise the action of nullity.
-
Article 1313
Confirmation cures the contract of all vices which affected it from the moment of its execution.
-
Article 1314
The action for nullity of a contract shall also be extinguished
when the thing, object of the contract, is lost by deceit or blame of the
person entitled to enforce the action.
When the cause of the action is the incapacity of one of the contracting
parties, the loss of the things shall be no obstacle for the action to prevail,
unless it has occurred by deceit or blame on the part of the plaintiff,
after having acquired capacity.
-
Article 1300
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Title III
Contracts About Property on Account of Marriage
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Article 1315
Persons who are to be united in marriage may, before entering into
it, execute contracts, stipulating the conditions for the conjugal society
in reference to present and future property without any other limitations
than those stated in this Code.
In default of contracts about property, it shall be understood that the
marriage has been contracted under the system of legal conjugal community.
-
Article 1316
In the contracts, to which the preceding article refers, the contracting
parties shall not stipulate anything contrary to law or to good morals,
nor humiliating to the authority belonging respectively to the future consorts
within the family.
All stipulations not conformable to the provisions of this article shall
be considered null and void.
-
Article 1317
Shall also be considered as null and void and as not written in
the contracts, mentioned in the two preceding articles, the clauses by which
the contracting parties, in a general manner, stipulate that the property
of the consorts shall be submitted to the local laws and customs of regions
governed by such laws, and not by the general provisions of this Code.
-
Article 1318
A minor, who can marry in accordance with law, may also execute
his marriage contract, but it shall be valid only when in its execution
there take part the persons designated by the same law for giving consent
to the minor for the purpose of contracting marriage.
In case the marriage contract is null and void, because the concurrence
and subscription of the aforesaid persons are wanting and yet the marriage
is valid according to law, it shall be understood that the minor has contracted
it, under the system of conjugal community.
-
Article 1319
In order that any change in the marriage contract be valid, this
change should be made before the celebration of the marriage and in the
presence and with the concurrence of the persons who took part in the contract
as executors. The attendance of the same witnesses shall not be necessary.
Any of the persons, who attended the execution of the original contract,
can only be substituted by another, or his attendance may not be required
when, by cause of death or any other legal cause, at the time of the execution
of the new stipulation or the modification of the preceding one, the attendance
is impossible or might not be required according to law.
-
Article 1320
After the marriage has been celebrated, the marriage contract, executed before the marriage, cannot be changed, whether present or future property is involved.
-
Article 1321
Marriage contracts and modifications made in them shall be executed
in a public instrument before the celebration of the marriage.
Property in the conditions referred to in art. 1324, is an exception to
the preceding rule.
-
Article 1322
Any modification made in the marriage contract shall be legally ineffectual in respect to third persons, if it does not comprise the following conditions:
-
1
That in the respective protocol and by marginal note, reference be made
to the notarial act or instrument which contains the modification of the
previous contract.
-
2
That in case the original contract is inscribable in the Registry of
property, the document by which the former has been modified must also be
inscribed.
-
1
-
Article 1323
For the validity of the marriage contract, made by a person against
whom a judgment of civil interdiction or incapacity has been rendered or
against whom a suit for the same cause has been instituted, the attendance
and consent of the guardian shall be indispensable and said guardian shall
be appointed, to his end, by the persons who are entitled to do so according
to the provisions of this Code, and of the Code of Civil Procedure.
-
Article 1324
When the property brought by the consorts is not real, and that
of the husband and wife together amount to a total sum not exceeding two
thousand five hundred pesetas, and no Notary exists in the town of their
residence, the marriage contract may be executed in the presence of the
Secretary of the Municipal Board and two witnesses, who shall state, on their responsibility, that they know said property has been delivered or
that it has been brought to the marriage, as the case may be.
The original contract or contracts shall be kept in custody, under registry,
in the archives of the corresponding municipality.
When amongst the property brought to the marriage, whatever its value may
be, there are one or more tenements, or the contracts refer to real property,
they shall always be executed in a public instrument before a Notary, as
provided in art. 1321.
-
Article 1325
When the marriage is contracted in a foreign country, between a
Spaniard and a foreign woman or between a foreigner and a Spanish woman,
and the contracting parties do not state or stipulate anything about their
property, it shall be understood, when the husband is a Spaniard, that he
marries under the system of the legal conjugal community, and when the wife is a Spaniard that she marries under the system of laws which are
in force in the husband's country, all without prejudice to what is established
in this Code in respect to real property.
-
Article 1326
All that is agreed to in the stipulations or contracts about which the preceding articles refer, in contemplation of a future marriage, shall be null and ineffectual in case the marriage is not celebrated.
-
Article 1315
-
Chapter Second
Donations on Account of Marriage
-
Article 1327
Donations on account of marriage are those made, before its celebration, in consideration of the same, and in favor of one or of both intented consorts.
-
Article 1328
These donations shall be governed by the rules established in title second, book third, in so far as they are not modified by the following articles.
-
Article 1329
Persons under age may grant and receive donations in their antenuptual contracts, provided they are authorized by persons who must give their consent for contracting marriage.
-
Article 1330
Acceptance is not required for the validity of such donations.
-
Article 1331
Affianced persons may give each other in their marriage contract as much as the tenth part of their actual property, and, in regard to future property, they can give to each other, only in case of death, a portion within the limit set forth in the provisions of this Code which refer to succession by testament.
-
Article 1332
The donor, on account of marriage, must liberate the property donated from mortgages and any other charges burdening them, except ground-rents and easements, unless in the marriage stipulations or contract the contrary has been specified.
-
Article 1333
A donation made on account of marriage can only be revoked in the following cases:
-
1
When it is conditional and the condition is not fulfilled.
-
2
When the marriage does not take place.
-
3
When the persons marry without having obtained the consent according
to the provisions of rule 2, art. 50, or when the marriage is annulled and
there exists bad faith on the part of one of the consorts, in conformity
with no. 3, art. 73 of this Code.
-
1
-
Article 1334
All donations between consorts, made during the marriage, shall
be null and void.
Moderate gifts which the consorts make to each other on days of rejoicing
of the family are not included in this rule.
-
Article 1335
All donations made during marriage by one of the consorts to the
children, whom the other consort had by a former marriage, or to the persons
of whom he or she is a presumptive heir, when the donation is made, shall
be null and void.
-
Article 1327
-
Chapter Third
Dowry
-
Section First
The Constitution of and Guarantee for Dowry
-
Article 1336
Dowry is composed of the property and rights brought, as such,
by the wife to the marriage, at the time of contracting it, and of those
which she acquires during the marriage by donation, inheritance or legacy,
as dotal property.
-
Article 1337
Real property, acquired during the marriage, shall also be considered
as dotal in the following causes:
-
Article 1338
The parents and relatives of the consorts and persons not belonging
to the family may constitute the dowry in behalf of the wife, either before
or after the celebration of the marriage.
The husband may also constitute it before the marriage but not after it.
-
Article 1339
The dowry, constituted before, or at the time of the celebration
of the marriage, shall be governed, in all that is not provided in this
chapter, by the rules of donations made in contemplation of marriage.
Dowry constituted after the marriage shall be governed by the rules of
common donations.
-
Article 1340
The father or the mother or whichever one of them is alive is bound to give a dowry to his or her legitimate daughters, except in the cases in which they need their consent, according to law, to contract marriage and yet marry without obtaining said consent.
-
Article 1341
The obligatory dowry, to which the preceding article refers ,
shall consist in a moiety of the presumptive rigorous legitime. When the
daughter has property equivalent to the moiety of her legitime, this obligation
shall cease, and if the value of the property does not cover the moiety
of the legitime, the donor shall supply the balance required to complete it.
In any event, it is prohibited to make investigations about the fortune
of the parents, in order to determine the amount of the dowry, and the
courts, in an act of voluntary jurisdiction, shall regulate it without
any further investigations than the statement of the same parents who
are to give the dowry and of the two nearest relatives of the daughter,
male and of full age, one of the paternal line and the other of the maternal,
residing in the same place or within the judicial district.
In default of relatives of full age, the courts shall decide, in their
prudent judgment, only by the statements of tho parents.
-
Article 1342
The parents may comply with the obligation of giving dowries to their daughters, either by delivering to them the capital of the dowry, or by paying them an annual rent, as fruits or interest of the same.
-
Article 1343
When the husband alone or both consorts jointly constitute a dowry for their daughters, it shall be paid out of the property of the conjugal community; if there is no property, said dowry shall be paid by halves or in the proportion in which the parents may have respectively bound themselves with the property belonging to each consort. When the wife alone grants the dowry, what she has given or promised should be charged to her own property.
-
Article 1344
The dowry confessed by the husband, the delivery of which is not proven, or is shown only in a private document, shall produce no other effect than that of a personal obligation.
-
Article 1345
Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the wife
in whose behalf a confessed dowry has been constituted by the husband
before the celebration of the marriage, or within the first year of such
marriage, may require, at any time, that the said husband secure it with
a mortgage, provided she judicially proves the existence of the dotal property or
of other similar or equivalent property, at the time she instituted her
claims.
-
Article 1346
Dowry may be either estimated or not estimated. It shall be estimated,
if the property of which it consists was appraised, at the time of the
constitution of the dowry, and when the ownership was transferred to the
husband who became obliged to return its value.
It shall be not estimated, if the wife retains the ownership of the property,
whether appraised or not, and the husband remains bound to return the
same property.
When the marriage contract does not state the kind of dowry, it shall
be considered as not estimated.
-
Article 1347
The increase or the impairment of the estimated dowry shall be on the account of the husband, who shall remain bound only to return the value at which he received it and to guarantee the rights of the wife, in the manner provided in the following articles.
-
Article 1348
When the husband who has received the estimated dowry believes himself injured by its appraisal, he may ask that the error or injury be remedied.
-
Article 1349
The husband is bound:
-
1
To inscribe in his name and to mortgage in behalf of his wife the real
property and real rights which he received as estimated dowry, or other
sufficient ones to secure the value of the same.
-
2
To secure with a sufficient special mortgage all other property which
has been delivered to him as estimated dowry.
-
1
-
Article 1350
The sum which must be secured by reason of the estimated dowry shall not exceed the amount of the valuation, and if that of said dowry be reduced, the mortgage shall be reduced in the same proportion.
-
Article 1351
The mortgage, constituted by the husband in behalf of the wife,
shall be security for the restitution of the property or of the valuation
of the same, in case it should be effected according to the laws and with
the limitations therein provided, and it shall become ineffectual and
may be cancelled when, for any lawful cause, the husband may be exempted
from the obligation of making the restitution.
-
Article 1352
A married woman of full age may herself exact the constitution
of the mortgage and the inscription of the property referred to in art. 1349.
When she has not yet celebrated the marriage, or if having contracted
it, she is a minor, said right should be enforced in her name and the
qualification of the sufficiency of the mortgage, which is constituted,
shall be passed upon by the father, the mother, or the person who has
given the dowry or the properties which must be secured.
In default of these persons, and when the woman is a minor, whether she
be married or not, the guardian, the protutor, family council or any of
its members, shall require that the same rights be enforced.
-
Article 1353
When the guardian, protutor or the family council do not ask for
the constitution of the mortgage, the Public Attorney shall officially,
or upon the request of any other party, demand that the husband be compelled
to execute the same.
The Municipal Judge shall also be obliged to interest and to urge the
Public Attorney to comply with the provisions of the preceding paragraph.
-
Article 1354
When the husband has no property of his own upon which to constitute the mortgage, stated in art. 1349, he shall remain bound to constitute the same on the first real estate or real rights which he may acquire.
-
Article 1355
Whenever whole or a part of the property which constitutes the
estimated dowry consists in government securities or stocks listed on
the exchange (efectos publicos 6 valores cotizables), and as long as the
value is not secured by the mortgage which the husband is bound to constitute,
the titles, inscriptions or documents representing that value, shall be deposited, in the name of the wife and with the knowledge of the husband,
in any of the public institutions designated for that purpose.
-
Article 1356
When the husband is bound so secure, with a mortgage, personal property belonging to not estimated dowry, the provisions of arts. 1349 to 1355, with regard to estimated dowries, shall apply.
-
Article 1336
-
Section Second
Administration and Usufruct of the Dowry
-
Article 1357
The husband is the administrator and usufructuary of the properties which constitute the not estimated dowry with the rights and obligations annexed to the administration and the usufruct, but with the modifications set forth in the following articles.
-
Article 1358
The husband is not bound to give the bonds required from common usufructuaries, but is obliged to inscribe in the Registry, when they are not registered, in the name of the wife and as not estimated dowry, all the real property and real rights which he may receive as such, and to constitute a sufficient mortgage as security for his administration, usufruct, and restitution of the personal property.
-
Article 1359
Notwithstanding the provisions of the two preceding articles,
the husband who receives bonds, stocks, or values listed on the exchange,
or perishable property, as estimated or not estimated dowry, and has not
secured them with a mortgage, may, nevertheless, substitute them with
others, equivalent to the same, with the consent of the wife, if she is
of age or of the persons referred to in art. 1352, if she is a minor.
Said property may also be alienated by the husband with the consent of
the wife, and, when proper, with that of the aforesaid persons, under
the condition that the amount of its value shall be invested in other
property, bonds or rights equally safe.
-
Article 1360
The wife preserves her dominion over the property which constitutes
the not estimated dowry, and, consequently, to her belongs also any increase
or decrease the same may have.
The husband is only liable for the impairment which such property may
suffer by his fault or neglect.
-
Article 1361
The wife may alienate, incumber or mortgage the property of the
not estimated dowry, when she is of full age, with the license of the
husband, and, when she is a minor, with judicial license and with the
intervention of the persons stated in art. 1352.
When she alienates said property, the husband shall be bound to constitute
a mortgage, in the same manner and under the same conditions as in respect
to the property of the estimated dowry.
-
Article 1362
The property of the not estimated dowry shall be security for the usual daily expenses of the family, incurred by the wife or by her order, under the tacit assent of the husband, but in this case levy (excusion) shall first be made on the properties belonging to the conjugal society, and then on that belonging to the husband.
-
Article 1363
The husband shall not, without the consent of the wife, lease
for longer than six years the real property of the not estimated dowry.
In any case, the advancement of the rents or leases, made to the husband
for more than three years, shall be considered void.
-
Article 1364
When the consorts, by virtue of the provisions of art. 1315, have
stipulated that the legal conjugal community shall not exist between them,
without stating the rules by which their property is to be governed, or
if the wife or her heirs renounce said community, the provisions of this
chapter shall be observed and the husband in compliance with the obligations
stated in the same chapter, shall receive all the fruits which should be considered as earnings of the community, in case it should exist.
-
Article 1357
-
Section Third
Restitution of Dowry
-
Article 1365
Dowry shall be restored to the wife or to her heirs in the following
cases:
-
Article 1366
The restitution of the estimated dowry shall be effected by the
husband or his heirs delivering to the wife or her heirs the value at
which it was estimated when the husband received the same. From the value
shall be deducted:
-
Article 1367
The real property of the not estimated dowry shall be restored in the condition in which it may be found; and when it has been alienated, the proceeds of the sale shall be delivered, deducting what may have been applied to the payment of the exclusive obligations of the wife.
-
Article 1368
The payments of the expenses and the improvements, made by the husband in the not estimated dotal property, shall be governed by what is provided with regard to the possessor in good faith.
-
Article 1369
After the marriage is dissolved or has been declared null, the husband or his heirs may be compelled to the immediate restitution of the real and personal property of the not estimated dowry.
-
Article 1370
Until one year, to be counted from the dissolution of the marriage, has elapsed, neither the husband nor his heirs can be required to return the money, the perishable property and public effects which do not exist totally or in part upon the dissolution of the conjugal society.
-
Article 1371
The husband or his heirs shall pay to the wife or to her heirs, from the date of the dissolution of the marriage until the restitution of the dowry, the legal interest on what they are bound to return in money, also that on the amount of the perishable property and what may be produced by public values or credits, in the meantime, according to their condition or nature, without conflict with the provision of art. 1379.
-
Article 1372
In default of an agreement between the person s interested, or
of an express stipulation in the marriage contract, the credit of not
estimated dowry or the part of the same which is not restored in the same
property which had constituted the dowry or in those which substituted
the same, shall be restored and paid in money.
From this rule is excepted the restitution of the value of personal dotal
property which does not exist, and said value may be paid with other personal
property of the same kind, if there is any such remaining to the conjugal
society.
The restitution of the perishable property, not appraised, shall be made
with an equal amount of property of the same kind.
-
Article 1373
In the same manner, as designated in the preceding article, shall
be restored the part of the dotal credit consisting:
-
1
Of marriage donations, legally made by the husband to his wife to be
effectual after his death, excepting the provisions in respect to the
consort who has acted in bad faith; in the case of the nullity of the
marriage, and in that of art. 1440.
-
2
Of indemnities which the husband may owe to the wife in accordance
with this Cede.
-
1
-
Article 1374
The daily bed, with whatever constitutes it, and the clothing and dresses for ordinary use of the widow shall be delivered to her without charging them to her dowry.
-
Article 1375
The credits or rights brought to the marriage as not estimated
do.wry, or assigned with this character, shall be delivered in the condition
in which they are, at the time of the dissolution of the marriage, unless
through negligence of the husband, said credits have not been collected
or have become unrecoverable, in which cases, the wife and her heirs shall
have the right of exacting their value.
-
Article 1376
When two or more dowries are to be restored, at the same time, each of them shall be paid with the property which may exist and originally belonged to them respectively, and, in default of the same, if the estate inventoried is not sufficient to cover both of them, their payment shall be effected according to priority of time.
-
Article 1377
For the liquidation and restitution of the not estimated dowry,
the following items shall be deducted in case they have been paid by the
husband:
-
1
The amount of the judicial costs and expenses incurred for the collection
and defence of the dowry.
-
2
The debts and obligations inherent to or affected by the dowry, which
in accordance with the marriage contract or with the provisions of this
Code are not chargeable to the conjugal community.
-
3
The sums for which the wife may be peculiarly liable, in accordance
with the provisions of this Code.
-
1
-
Article 1378
At the time of the restitution of the dowry, the marriage donations legally made to the husband by his wife shall be paid to him without conflict with the provisions of this Code for the cases of separation of property, or that of nullity of the marriage in which bad faith has existed on the part of one of the consorts.
-
Article 1379
When the marriage is dissolved by the death of the wife, the interests
or fruits of the dowry which are to be restored shall commence to run
in favor of the heirs from the day of the dissolution of the marriage.
When the marriage is dissolved by the death of the husband, the wife may,
either demand the interests and fruits of one year of the dowry, or that
support be given her from the estate of the inheritance of the husband.
In any case, the widow shall receive from the estate the value of the
mourning apparel.
-
Article 1380
After the dissolution of the marriage, the pending fruits or rents shall be divided pro rata among the surviving consort and the theirs of the deceased, in accordance with the rules established for the cases in which the usufruct ceases.
-
Article 1365
-
Section First
The Constitution of and Guarantee for Dowry
-
Chapter Fourth
Parapherna
-
Article 1381
Parapherna is the property which the wife brings to the marriage, not included in the dowry, and what she acquires after the constitution of the same and which is not added to such dowry.
-
Article 1382
The wife retains dominion over the parapherna.
-
Article 1383
The husband shall not institute actions of any kind whatever, in regard to the parapherna, without the intervention of the wife or her consent.
-
Article 1384
The wife shall have the management of the parapherna, unless she
has delivered the same to her husband, before a Notary, with the intent
that he may administer said property.
In this case, the husband is bound to constitute a mortgage for the value
of the personal property which he receives, or to secure said property,
in the manner provided for dotal property.
-
Article 1385
The fruits of the parapherna form a part of the capital of the conjugal
community, and are liable for the payment of the expenses of the marriage
state.
The property itself also shall be liable, in the case of article 1362, whenever
that of the husband and the dotals are insufficient to pay the liabilities
set forth in the same.
-
Article 1386
The personal obligations of the husband shall not be paid out of the fruits of the parapherna, unless it is proven that they were incurred for the benefit of the family.
-
Article 1387
The wife shall not alienate, incumber or mortgage the parapherna without the permission of the husband, nor appear in court
to litigate about the same, unless she has been judicially authorized for
that purpose.
-
Article 1388
When the parapherna, the administration of which has been reserved by the wife, consists in money or public stocks or valuable personal property, the husband shall have a right to require that said property be deposited or invested in such a way that the alienation or pignoration of the same should be impossible without his consent.
-
Article 1389
The husband, to whom the parapherna has been delivered, shall be governed, with regard to the management of the same, by the provisions in respect to the property of the not estimated dowry.
-
Article 1390
The alienation of the parapherna entitles the wife to demand the constitution of a mortgage for the amount of the value which the husband may have received. Both the husband and the wife may, in their respective cases, exercise, with regard to the value of the sale, the right granted by arts., 1384 and 1388.
-
Article 1391
The return of the parapherna, the management of which has been granted to the husband, shall take place in the same cases and in the same manner as that of property belonging to the not estimated dowry.
-
Article 1381
-
Chapter Fifth
Conjugal Community
-
Section First
General Provisions
-
Article 1392
By virtue of the conjugal community, the earnings or profits indiscriminately obtained by either of the consorts, during the marriage, shall belong to the husband and the wife, share and share alike, when the marriage is dissolved.
-
Article 1393
The conjugal community shall always begin on the same day that
the marriage is celebrated.
Any stipulation to the contrary shall be void.
-
Article 1394
This community cannot be renounced during the marriage, except
in case of judicial separation.
When the renunciation takes place on account of a separation, or after
the marriage has been dissolved or declared null, said renunciation shall
be set forth in a public instrument, and the creditors shall have the
right granted them in art. 1001.
-
Article 1395
The conjugal community shall be governed by the rules of the contract of partnership in all that does not conflict with the express provisions of this chapter.
-
Article 1392
-
Section Second
Property Belonging to Each One of the Consorts
-
Article 1396
The following is the separate property of each of the consorts:
-
1
That brought to the marriage as his or her own.
-
2
That acquired under a lucrative title by either of them, during the marriage.
-
3
That acquired by right of redemption or by exchange for other property
belonging to only one of the consorts.
-
4
That bought with money belonging exclusively to the wife or to the
husband.
-
1
-
Article 1397
A person giving or promising capital to the husband shall not be subject to eviction, except in case of fraud.
-
Article 1398
Property, donated or left by will conjointly to the consorts and with designation of specified shares, shall belong as dowry to the wife and as capital to the husband, in the proportion directed by the donor or testator; and, in default of such designation, share and share alike, without conflict with provisions of art. 637.
-
Article 1399
When donations are onerous, the amount of the burdens shall be deducted from the dowry, or from the capital of the consort who makes them, provided they have been borne by the conjugal community.
-
Article 1400
In case that any credit, payable within a certain number of years, or a pension for life belongs to either of the consorts, the provisions of art. 1402 and 1403 shall be observed for determining what constitutes the dowry, and what forms the capital of the husband.
-
Article 1396
-
Section Third
Property of the Conjugal Community
-
Article 1401
To the conjugal community belong:
-
1
Property acquired by onerous title, during the marriage, at the expense
of the community property, whether the acquisition is made for the community
or for only one of the consorts.
-
2
That obtained by the industry, salaries or work of the consorts or
of either of them.
-
3
The fruits, rents, or interests collected or accrued during the marriage,
and which come from the community property, or from that which belongs
to either one of the consorts.
-
1
-
Article 1402
Whenever a sum or credit, payable in a certain number of years, belongs to one of the consorts, the sums collected for installments due during the marriage shall not be community property, but shall be considered as capital of the husband or of the wife, according to whom the credit belongs.
-
Article 1403
The right to an usufruct or pension, belonging to one of the consorts,
either in perpetuity or for life, shall form part of his or her own property;
but the fruits, pensions, and interests due, during the marriage, shall
be community property.
In this provision is comprised the usufruct which the consorts have in
the property of their children, even when they are of another marriage.
-
Article 1404
The useful expenses, made on behalf of the private property of
either one of the consorts, through advancements made by the community,
or by the industry of husband or wife, are community property.
Buildings constructed, during the marriage, on land belonging to one of
the consorts, shall also belong to the community, but the value of the
land shall be paid to the consort owning the same.
-
Article 1405
Whenever the dowry or the capital belonging to the husband consists, in whole or in part, of cattle existing at the time of the dissolution of the community, the heads of cattle, exceeding the number which were brought to the marriage, shall be considered as common property.
-
Article 1406
The earnings obtained by the husband or wife by gambling or proceeding from other causes, exempted from restitution, shall belong to the conjugal community, without conflicting, in certain cases, with the provisions of the Penal Code.
-
Article 1407
All the property of the marriage shall be considered as community property, until it is proven that it belongs exclusively to the husband or to the wife.
-
Article 1401
-
Section Fourth
Charges and Obligations of the Conjugal Community
-
Article 1408
The conjugal community shall be responsible for:
-
1
All the debts and obligations contracted during the marriage by the
husband, and also those contracted by the wife in the cases in which she
can legally bind the community.
-
2
The arrears or interests, matured during the marriage, of obligations
which affect the private property of the consorts as well as the community
property.
-
3
The minor repairs or of mere preservation, made during the marriage,
on the private property of the husband or the wife. Extensive repairs
shall not be chargeable to the community.
-
4
Extensive or minor repairs of the property of the community.
-
5
The maintenance of the family and the education of the children in
common, and of the legitimate children of only one of the consorts.
-
1
-
Article 1409
The conjugal community shall also bear the amount of what has been donated or promised to the children in common by the husband, only for their establishment or for a professional career, or by both consorts by common consent, when it may not have been stipulated that it should be paid in whole or in part out of the private property of one of them.
-
Article 1410
The payment of debts contracted by the husband or by the wife,
before the marriage, shall not be borne by the community.
Neither shall it bear the payment of fines or pecuniary condemnations
imposed on either of them.
However, the payment of debts contracted by the husband or the wife, prior
to the marriage, and that of fines and condemnations imposed on either
of them may be claimed against the community property, after covering
the erogations, enumerated in art. 1408, when the debtor consort has no private capital,
or it be insufficient; but at the time of the liquidation of the community,
the payments, made for the specified causes, shall be charged to said
consort.
-
Article 1411
What has been lost and paid for, during the marriage, by either
of the consorts, in any kind of game whatever, shall not diminish his
or her respective share in the community.
Whatever has been lost and not paid for by either of the consorts, in
licit games, shall be charged to the conjugal community.
-
Article 1408
-
Section Fifth
Administration of the Conjugal Community
-
Article 1412
The husband is the administrator of the conjugal community, with the exception of what is prescribed in art. 59.
-
Article 1413
Besides the faculties which the husband has as administrator,
he may alienate and burden by onerous title the property of the conjugal
community without the consent of the wife.
Notwithstanding, every alienation or agreement which the husband may make,
respecting said property in opposition to this Code or in fraud of the
wife, shall not cause injury to her or to her heirs.
-
Article 1414
The husband can dispose of his half of the property of the conjugal community only by testament.
-
Article 1415
The husband may dispose of the property of the conjugal community
for the purposes stated in art. 1409.
He may also make moderate donations for objects of piety or beneficence,
but without reserving to himself the usufruct.
-
Article 1416
The wife cannot bind the property of the conjugal community without
the consent of the husband.
The cases provided in arts. 1362, 1441, and 1442 are excepted from this
rule.
-
Article 1412
-
Section Sixth
Dissolution of the Conjugal Community
-
Article 1417
The conjugal community expires on the dissolution of the marriage
or when it is declared null.
The consort who, on account of his or her bad faith, caused the nullity,
shall not share any part of the property of the community.
The conjugal society shall also terminate in the cases specified in art. 1433.
-
Article 1417
-
Section Seventh
Liquidation of the Property of the Conjugal Community
-
Article 1418
Upon the dissolution of the community, an inventory shall immediately be made, but the same shall not be required for the liquidation:
-
1
When, after the community is dissolved, one of the consorts or the
persons holding rights under 'him have, in due time, renounced its effects
and consequences.
-
2
When the separation of property has preceded the dissolution of the community.
-
3
In the case to which paragraph second of the preceding article refers.
-
1
-
Article 1419
The inventory shall comprise numerically (numericamente) for the
purpose of collating them, the sums, which having been paid by the conjugal
society, are to be deducted from the dowry or from the capital of the
husband, in accordance with arts. 1366, 1377, and 1427.
The amount of the donations and alienations which may be considered illegal
or fraudulent, as provided in art. 1413, shall also be brought to collation.
-
Article 1420
In the inventory shall not be included things constituting the bed and bedding (lecho) ordinarily used by the consorts. These things, as well as the clothing and dresses ordinarily used by the deceased consort, shall be delivered to the surviving one.
-
Article 1421
When the inventory is completed, the dowry of the wife shall first be liquidated and paid, according to the rules, which for its restitution are determined in section third, chapter third of this title, and subject to the provisions of the following articles.
-
Article 1422
After the dowry and the parapherna of the wife have been paid,
the debts, charges, and obligations of the community shall be paid.
When the inventoried estate is not sufficient to satisfy all the provisions
of this and the preceding article, the prescriptions of title seventeen
of this book shall be observed.
-
Article 1423
After the debts, charges, and obligations of the community are paid, the capital of the husband shall be liquidated and paid, in so far as the inventoried estate may reach, making the corresponding deductions according to the same rules which are prescribed in art. 1366, in reference to dowry.
-
Article 1424
After the deductions from the inventoried estate, specified in the three preceding articles, have been made, the remainder of the same estate shall constitute the assets of the conjugal community.
-
Article 1425
The losses or impairments which any personal property, belonging
to either of the consorts, may have suffered even by unforeseen events,
shall be paid out of the conjugal property, when any remains.
Those suffered by the real property shall not be payable, in any case,
except those falling upon the dotal property, and which have been caused
by the fault of the husband, when an indemnity shall be paid for them
as provided in arts. 1360 and 1373.
-
Article 1426
The net remainder of the community property shall be divided, share and share alike, between the husband and the wife or their respective heirs.
-
Article 1427
The mourning apparel of the widow shall be paid out of the estate of the inheritance of the husband, as provided in art. 1379. The heirs of the husband shall pay it according to the standing and means of the decedent.
-
Article 1428
In regard to making the. inventory, rules for the appraisal and sales of the property belonging to the conjugal community, security and bonds for the respective dowries, and all other particulars, not expressly determined in the present chapter, the prescriptions of sections fifth, chapter fifth, title third, book third, and sections second and third, chapter third of this title shall be observed.
-
Article 1429
When the conjugal community is dissolved by the nullity of the marriage, the provisions of arts. 1373, 1378, 1417 and 1440 shall be observed, and if it is dissolved by reason of the separation of the property of the consorts, what is prescribed in chapter sixth of this title shall be complied with.
-
Article 1430
Support shall be given out of the property belonging to the community to the surviving consort and his or her children, pending the liquidation of the inventoried estate and until they have received their share; but it shall be deducted from their portion in so far as it exceeds what should have belonged to them as fruits or rents.
-
Article 1431
Whenever the liquidation of the community properties of two or
more marriages, contracted by the same person, has to be simultaneously
effected in order to determine the estate of each community, every kind
of evidence shall be admitted, in default of inventories; and, in case
of doubt, the community property shall be distributed between the different communities in proportion to the time of the duration of the same and
to the property belonging to the respective consorts.
-
Article 1418
-
Section First
General Provisions
-
Chapter Sixth
Separation of Property of the Consorts and Its Administration by the Wife During the
Marriage
-
Article 1432
In default of express declarations in the marriage contract, the separation of the property of the consorts, during the marriage, shall only take place by virtue of a judicial decree, except in the case provided by art. 50.
-
Article 1433
The husband and the wife may demand the separation of the property,
and it shall be decreed, whenever the consort of the plaintiff has been
condemned to a penalty to which civil interdiction is annexed, or has
been declared an absentee or has given cause for the divorce.
In order that the separation may be decreed, it shall be sufficient to
present the final sentence rendered against the culpable or absent consort
in each one of the three cases, above stated.
-
Article 1434
After the separation of property is ordered, the legal conjugal
community becomes dissolved, and its liquidation shall be made according
to the provisions of this Code.
Husband and wife, however, shall reciprocally attend to their maintenance
during the separation, and to the maintenance of the children, as well
as the education of the same; each one in proportion to his or her respective
means.
-
Article 1435
The power to administer the property of the marriage, granted
to the husband by this Code, shall subsist when the separation has been
granted on his petition; but, in such case, the wife shall not have any
right to the future profits of the community, and the rights and obligations
of the husband shall be governed by the provisions of sections second
and third, chapter third of this title.
-
Article 1436
When the separation has been granted on the petition of the wife
by the civil interdiction of the husband, the administration of all the
property belonging to the marriage, and the rights to all the future community
property, shall be transferred to the wife to the exclusion of the husband.
When the separation is granted because the husband has been declared an
absentee, or because he has given cause for divorce, the wife shall enter
upon the administration of her dowry, and of all further property which
may have been apportioned to her, as a result of the liquidation.
In every case, to which this article refers, the wife shall remain obliged
to comply with all that is prescribed in paragraph second of art. 1434.
-
Article 1437
The demand for separation and the final sentence in which it is declared, when rendered about real property, must be noted and inscribed respectively in the corresponding Registries of property.
-
Article 1438
Separation of the property shall not injure the rights previously acquired by creditors.
-
Article 1439
Whenever the separation ceases by reconciliation, in cases of
divorce, or, because, in the other cases the causes have disappeared,
the property belonging to the marriage shall be governed by the same rules
as before the separation, without injury to what may have been lawfully
done during the same.
The consorts, at the time of their reuniting, shall specify in a public
instrument the property which they bring anew, and such property shall
be that forming the private estate of each one of them respectively.
In the case provided in this article, all -said property shall always
be considered as new property brought to the marriage, even when it is
the same, either partially or wholly, as existed before the liquidation
made on account of the separation.
-
Article 1440
Separation shall not entitle the consorts to exercise the rights provided under the presumption of death of one of them, nor those granted to them by art. 1374 and 1420, neither shall it injure them in the exercise of the same, when such case occurs, except as provided in art. 73.
-
Article 1441
The administration of the property belonging to the marriage shall be transferred to the wife:
-
1
Whenever she is the guardian of the husband in accordance with art. 220.
-
2
When she asks for the declaration of absence of her husband, in accordance with arts. 183 and 185.
-
3
In the case stated in paragraph first of art. 1436.
-
The courts shall also confer the administration upon the wife, with such
limitations as they may consider convenient, when the husband is a fugitive
or has been declared contumacious in a criminal prosecution, or if, when
he is absolutely incapacitated for the administration, he has taken no
steps in respect thereto.
-
1
-
Article 1442
The wife, upon whom the administration of all the property of the marriage may devolve, shall have, in respect thereto, the identical powers and liabilities as the husband when he exercises it, buy always subject to what is provided in the last paragraph of the preceding article, and in art 1444.
-
Article 1443
The administration of her dowry shall be transferred to the wife, in the case provided by art. 225, and when the court orders it by virtue of the provisions of art. 441; but she shall remain subject to what is prescribed in paragraph second of art. 1434.
-
General Provision
-
Article 1444
During the marriage, the wife can neither alienate nor encumber,
without judicial permission , the real property which may have been allotted
to her, in case of separation, nor that, the administration of which ,
has been transferred to her.
Such permission shall be granted whenever the convenience or necessity
of the alienation be justified.
When it refers to public bonds or stocks of mercantile enterprises, and
companies and cannot be delayed without serious or imminent injury to
the estate in administration, the wife, with the intervention of an agent
or broker, may sell them placing the proceeds in judicial deposit, until
the approval of a competent judge or tribunal is obtained.
The agent or broker shall always be personally responsible for the making
of the consignation or deposit to which the preceding paragraph refers.
-
Article 1444
-
Article 1432
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Title IV
Contract of Purchase and Sale
-
Chapter First
Nature and Form of this Contract
-
Article 1445
By the contract of purchase and sale, one of the contracting parties binds himself to deliver a specified thing and the other (binds himself) to pay a certain price for it, either in money or in something (signo) representing the same.
-
Article 1446
When the price of the sale consists partly in money and partly in something else, the contract shall be qualified by the manifest intention of the contracting parties. When this intention does not appear, the contract shall be considered as a barter, if the value of the thing given as a part of the price exceeds that of the money or its equivalent; and, otherwise, it shall be considered as a sale.
-
Article 1447
In order that the price may be held as certain, it shall be sufficient
that it be certain with reference to another thing also certain, or that
the determination of the same be left to the will of a specified person.
When such person cannot or will not fix the price, the contract shall be
inoperative.
-
Article 1448
The price of bonds, grain, liquids, and of other perishable things
shall also be held as certain, when the prices fixed are the same as the
things, if sold, would have on a certain day on the exchange or market,
or when a certain amount is fixed above or below the price of such day,
exchange or market, provided said price be certain.
-
Article 1449
The determination of the price shall never be left to the judgment of one of the contracting parties.
-
Article 1450
The sale shall be perfected between vendor and vendee and shall be binding on both of them, if they have agreed upon the thing, object of the contract, and as to the price, even when neither one nor the other has been delivered.
-
Article 1451
A promise to sell or to buy, when there has been an agreement about
the thing and the price, gives a right to both the parties reciprocally
to claim the compliance with the contract.
Whenever a promise of purchase and sale cannot be complied with, the provisions
about obligations and contracts, set forth in this present book, shall govern
the vendor and the vendee, according to the case.
-
Article 1452
The injury to or the profit of the thing sold shall, after the contract
is perfected, be governed by the provisions of arts. 1096 and 1 182.
This rule shall be applied to the sale of perishable things, made independently
and for a single price, or without consideration as to weight, number, or
measure.
If the perishable things are sold for a price fixed with relation to weight,
number, or measure, the risk shall not be imputed to the vendee, until they
have been weighed, counted, or measured, unless the vendee is in default.
-
Article 1453
A sale, made subject to approval or trial of the things sold, and the sale? of things which are customarily tested or tried before being received, shall always be considered as made under suspensive conditions.
-
Article 1454
When earnest or binding money has been given in the contract of purchase and sale, the contract may be rescinded, when the vendee agrees to forfeit the money, or the vendor to return double the amount of it.
-
Article 1454-A
In a contract for the sale of personal property payable in installments,
failure to pay two or more installments shall confer upon the vendor the
right to cancel the sale or foreclose the mortgage if one has been given
on the property, without reimbursement to the purchaser of the installments
already paid, if there be an agreement to this effect.
However, if the vendor has chosen to foreclose the mortgage he shall have
no further action against the purchaser for the recovery of any unpaid balance
owing by the same, and any agreement to the contrary shall be null and void.
The same rule shall apply to leases of personal property with option to
purchase, when the lessor has chosen to deprive the lessee of the enjoyment
of such personal property.
-
Article 1455
The expenses of the execution of a public deed shall be on account of the vendor, and those of the first copy and subsequent ones, after the sale, shall be charged to the vendee, unless the contrary is stipulated.
-
Article 1456
Forcible expropriation on account of public utility shall be governed by the provisions of special laws.
-
Article 1445
-
Chapter Second
Capacity to Purchase or Sell
-
Article 1457
The contract of purchase and sale may be entered into by all persons who, according to this Code, are authorized to bind themselves, with the modifications, however, contained in the following articles.
-
Article 1458
The husband and the wife cannot reciprocally sell any property to each other, except in the cases in which they have stipulated about the separation of their property or when a judicial separation of the same property exists, authorized, under the provisions of chapter sixth, title third, of this book.
-
Article 1459
The following persons cannot acquire by purchase, even at public or judicial auction, neither in person nor by an intermediate representative:
-
1
The guardian or protutor as to the property of the person or persons who are under their guardianship.
-
2
The attorneys as to the property of which they have been given charge to administer or sell.
-
3
Executors as to the property entrusted to their care.
-
4
Public officials as to the property of the State, municipalities, towns, and also of public institutions, the administration of which has been entrusted to them.
This provision shall apply to judges and experts who, in any way whatever, intervene in the sale.
-
5
Magistrates, judges, Public Attorney, and, their assistants, clerks of tribunals and courts, and officials of justice as to the property and rights about which litigation is pending before the tribunal in the jurisdiction or territory over which they exercise their respective functions; this prohibition includes the act of acquiring by assignment.
From this rule shall be excepted the cases in which hereditary action among co-heirs are dealt with, or of assignments in payment of debts, or of warranty of the goods they may possess.
The prohibition contained in this number shall comprise the lawyers and attorneys as to the property and rights, matters of the suit, in which they intervene by virtue of their profession or office.
-
1
-
Article 1457
-
Chapter Third
Effects of the Contract of Purchase and Sale When the Thing Sold Has Been Lost
-
Article 1460
When, at the time of making the sale, the thing, object of the contract,
has been wholly lost, the contract shall be ineffectual.
But if the thing is lost only in part, the vendee shall choose either to
withdraw from the contract or to claim the existing part, paying its price,
in proportion to the total sum agreed upon.
-
Article 1460
-
Chapter Fourth
Obligations of the Vendor
-
Section First
General Provisions
-
Article 1461
A vendor is bound to deliver and warrant the thing, object of the sale.
-
Article 1461
-
Section Second
Delivery of the Thing Sold
-
Article 1462
A thing sold shall be considered as delivered, when it is placed
in the hands and possession of the vendee.
When the sale is effected by a public instrument, the execution of the
same shall be equivalent to the delivery of the thing, object of the contract,
provided that in the same instrument the contrary does not appear or may
be clearly inferred.
-
Article 1463
Except in the cases stated in the preceding article, the delivery of personal property shall be made by the delivery of the keys of the place or depository where it is stored or kept, and by the mere consent and agreement of the contracting parties, if the thing sold cannot be transferred to the possession of the vendee, at the time of the sale, or if the latter already held it in his possession for any other cause.
-
Article 1464
With regard to incorporeal things, the provision of paragraph second of art. 1462 shall govern. In any other case in which this paragraph cannot be applied, the fact of placing the titles of ownership in the possession of the vendee or the use which the vendee may make of his right with the consent of the vendor shall be considered as a delivery.
-
Article 1465
The expenses of the delivery of the thing sold shall be borne by the vendor, and those of the removal or transportation of the same by the vendee, except in case of special stipulation.
-
Article 1466
A vendor shall not be bound to deliver the thing sold, when the vendee has not paid the price, or when a term for such payment has not been designated in the contract.
-
Article 1467
Neither shall the vendor be bound to deliver the thing sold, when
a delay or time for payment has been agreed upon, and it is discovered
after the sale that the vendee is insolvent to such a degree that the
vendor is in imminent danger of losing the price.
From this rule is excepted the case in which the vendee gives security
for the payment within the time agreed upon.
-
Article 1468
A vendor is bound to deliver the thing sold in the condition in
which it existed on the completion of the contract.
All the fruits shall belong to the vendee from the day on which the contract
was perfected.
-
Article 1469
The obligation to deliver the thing sold includes that of placing
in possession of the vendee all that is set forth in the contract, according
to the following rules:
When the sale of real property has been made and its dimensions stated
at the rate of a certain price for an unit of measure or number, the vendor
shall be bound to deliver to the vendee, if the latter requires it, all
that has been mentioned in the contract ; but when this is not possible,
the vendee may choose between proportional reduction of the price or the
rescission of the contract, provided that, in this last case, the decrease
of the tenement, is not inferior to the tenth part of the dimensions attributed
to it.
The same thing shall be observed, even when the dimensions appear to be
the same, if any part of the tenement is not of the quality stated in
the contract.
The rescission, in this case, shall only take place, at the will of the
vendee, when the inferior value of the thing sold exceeds the tenth part
of the price agreed upon.
-
Article 1470
When, in the case of the preceding article, there are greater dimensions or number in real property, than those stated in the contract, the vendee shall be bound to pay the price of the excess, if the greater dimensions or number does not exceed the one twentieth part of those set forth in the contract ; but when it surpasses such one twentieth part, the vendee may choose between paying the greater value of the estate or withdrawing from the contract.
-
Article 1471
In the sale of a parcel of real estate made for a fixed price
and not at the rate of a specified sum for an unity of measure or number,
the increase or decrease of the same shall not be considered, even when
greater or less dimensions or amount than that stated in the contract
may be found.
The same provision shall apply when two or more tenements are sold for
a single price, but, if besides mentioning the boundaries, indispensable
in every conveyance of real property, their dimensions and number are
designated in the contract, the vendor shall be bound to deliver all that
is included within such boundaries, even when they exceed the dimensions or number specified in the contract; and, if he is not able to do it,
he shall suffer a reduction in the price, in proportion to what is wanting
in the dimensions or number, unless the contract be annulled because the
vendee does not accept the default of delivery of what had been stipulated.
-
Article 1472
Actions, arising from the three preceding articles, shall be prescribed after six months, counted from the day of the delivery.
-
Article 1473
When the same thing has been sold to different vendees, the ownership
shall be transferred to the person who first took possession of it in
good faith, if the thing is personal.
When the thing is a piece of real property, it shall belong to the person
acquiring it who first inscribed it -in the Registry.
When there is no inscription, the property shall belong to the person
who first took possession of it in good faith, and, in default of said
possession, to the person who presents the oldest title, provided there
is good faith.
-
Article 1462
-
Section Third
Warranty
-
Sub-Section 1
Warranty In Case of Eviction
-
Article 1475
Eviction shall take place, when by a final sentence and by virtue
of a right prior to the sale, the vendee is deprived of the whole or
of a part of the thing purchased.
The vendor shall be liable for the eviction even when nothing hes been
stipulated about it in the contract.
The contracting parties may, however, increase, decrease, or suppress
this legal obligation of the vendor.
-
Article 1476
Any stipulation exempting the vendor from the obligation of answering for the eviction shall be void, whenever there is bad faith on his part.
-
Article 1477
When a vendee has renounced the right of warranty in the case of eviction and it occurs, the vendor shall only be bound to deliver the price which the thing had, at the time of the eviction, unless the vendee has made the renunciation, knowing the risk of eviction and submitting himself to the consequences thereof.
-
Article 1478
When a warranty has been stipulated or when nothing has been
agreed upon about this point, if the eviction has been effected, the
vendee shall have the right to claim from the vendor:
-
1
The restitution of the price which the thing sold had at the time
of the eviction, whether it be greater or less than that of the sale.
-
2
The fruits or proceeds, when he has been condemned to deliver them
to the person who won the suit instituted against such vendee.
-
3
The costs incurred in the suits which caused the eviction, and, in
proper cases, the costs of the suit instituted against the vendor for
the warranty.
-
4
The expenses of the contract, when the vendee has paid them.
-
5
The damages and interests and the voluntary expenses or of mere recreation
or ornamentation, when the sale was made in bad faith.
-
1
-
Article 1479
When the vendee loses, on account of the eviction, a part of
the thing sold of such importance, in relation to the whole, that he
would not have purchased it without such part, he may claim the rescission
of the contract; but under the obligation of returning the thing without
other incumbrances than those it had when he acquired it.
The same provision shall be observed when two or more things are conjointly
sold for a total price, or a partial price for each one of them, when
it clearly appears that the vendee would not have purchased one without
the other.
-
Article 1480
A warranty cannot be claimed until a final sentence has been rendered by which the vendee is condemned to lose the thing acquired or a part of it.
-
Article 1481
A vendor shall be bound to the corresponding warranty, whenever it is proved that he was given notice of the demand
for eviction on petition of the vendee. In default of this notice, the
vendor shall not be bound to the warranty.
-
Article 1482
A defendant vendee shall ask, within the term fixed by the Code
of Civil Procedure for answering the demand, that notice thereof be
given to the vendor or vendors with the least possible delay.
This notification shall be made in the maner provided by the same law
for the summoning of defendants.
The term for answering the complaint granted to the vendee shall be
suspended until the expiration of that granted to the vendor or vendors
for appearing and answering the complaint; said terms shall be the same
granted to all defendants by the aforesaid law of Civil Procedure, and
shall be counted from the notificacion provided by the first paragraph
of this article.
When the persons summoned for eviction do not appear, in time and form,
the term in which to answer the complaint shall continue with regard
to the vendee.
-
Article 1483
When the tenement sold is encumbered by any non-apparent burden
or easement which is not stated in the deed, but is of such a nature
that it must be presumed that the vendee would not have acquired it
if he was aware of the same, he may ask for the rescission of the contract,
unless he prefers the corresponding indemnity.
During a year, to be counted from the date of the execution of the deed,
the vendee may either exercise the rescissory action or claim an indemnity.
After the lapse of one year , he can only claim such indemnity within
an equal period, to be counted from the date on which the lien or easement
was discovered by him.
-
Article 1475
-
Sub-Section 2
Warranty Against Hidden Defects or Burdens of the Thing Sold
-
Article 1484
A vendor is bound to give a warranty against hidden defects
in the thing sold, when these defects render it unfit for the use for
which it was intended, or when they diminish said use in such a way
that had the vendee known them, he would not have acquired it, or would have given a lower
price for it; but said vendor shall not be liable for the patent defects
or those which may be visible, neither for those which are not in sight,
when the vendee is an expert and by reason of his office or profession
ought easily to perceive them.
-
Article 1485
The vendor is responsible to the vendee for the warranty against
vices or hidden defects in the thing sold, even when the same were unknown
to him.
This provision shall not rule when the contrary has been stipulated
and the vendor was not aware of such vices or hidden defects.
-
Article 1486
In the cases of the two preceding articles, the vendee may elect,
either to withdraw from the contract, the expenses which he incurred
being returned to him, or to demand a proportional reduction of the
price, according to the judgment of experts.
When the vendor knew the vices or hidden defects in the thing sold,
and did not give notice of them to the vendee, the latter shall have
the same option, and, furthermore, he shall be indemnified for the damages
and injuries, should he choose the rescission.
-
Article 1487
When the thing sold is lost on account of hidden vices, and the vendor was aware of them, he shall bear the loss, and return the price and pay the expenses of the contract, with damages and injuries. When he was not aware of them, he shall only return the price and pay the expenses of the contract, which may have been paid by the vendee.
-
Article 1488
When the thing sold has any hidden vice, at the time of the
sale, and is lost afterwards by an unforeseen event, or by fault of
the vendee, the latter may claim from the vendor the price he paid,
deducting the value which the thing had when lost.
When the vendor acted in bad faith, he shall pay damages and interests
to the vende.
-
Article 1489
The liability for damages and injuries shall never take place in judicial sales, but all the other provisions of the preceding articles shall be applied.
-
Article 1490
Actions growing out of the provisions of the five preceding articles shall be extinguished after six months, to be counted from the delivery of the thing sold.
-
Article 1491
When two or more animals are sold together, whether it be for
a lump sum or by fixing a separate price for each one of them, the redhibitory
vice of each one shall only cause the redhibition of the same and not
that of the others, unless it appears that the vendee would not have
bought the sound one or ones without defective ones.
The latter is presumed when a team, yoke, pair or set is bought, even
when a separate price has been fixed for each one of the animals composing
the same.
-
Article 1492
The provision of the preceding article, with regard to the sale of animals, shall be understood applicable also to the sale of any other things.
-
Article 1493
Warranty for the hidden vices of animals and cattle shall not take place in the sales made at fairs or public auctions, nor that of riding beasts, sold as condemned, except in the case determined in the following article.
-
Article 1494
Animals and cattle suffering from contagious diseases shall
not be objects of a contract of sale. Any contracts made with respect
to the same shall be null and void.
A contract of sale of animals and cattle shall also be null and void,
when the use or service for which they were acquired is stated, and
they are found useless therefor.
-
Article 1495
When the hidden vice of animals, even if they have been subject
to a professional inspection, is of such a nature that the knowledge
of experts is not sufficient to discover it, it shall be considered
as redhibitory.
But when the veterinarian (professor), through ignorance or bad faith,
shall fail to discover or to give notice of it, he shall be liable for
damages and injuries.
-
Article 1496
The redhibitory action, based on the vices or defects of animals,
shall be instituted within forty days, to be counted from the delivery
of the same to the vendee, unless owing to the usages in each locality,
longer or shorter terms are established.
This action, in the sale of animals, shall only be enforced in reference
to the vices and defects of the same, determined by law or by local
usages.
-
Article 1497
When the animal dies, within three days after it has been bought, the vendor shall be responsible, provided that the disease that caused the death, according to the judgment of veterinarians (professors), existed before the contract.
-
Article 1498
When the sale is rescinded, the animal shall be returned in the condition in which it was sold and delivered, and the vendee shall be liable for any injury caused by his negligence and which does not arise from the redhibitory vice or defect.
-
Article 1499
In the sale of animals and cattle with redhibitory vices, the vendee shall also have the power set forth in art. 1486; but he shall make use of the same within the same term which has been respectively determined for the exercise of the redhibitory action.
-
Article 1484
-
Sub-Section 1
Warranty In Case of Eviction
-
Section First
General Provisions
-
Chapter Fifth
Obligations of the Vendee
-
Article 1500
A vendee is bound to pay the price of the thing sold at the time
and place stipulated in the contract.
When the time and place have not been fixed, the payment shall be made at
the time and place where the thing sold is delivered.
-
Article 1501
In the three following cases the vendee shall owe interest from
the time the thing is delivered, until the payment of the price:
-
Article 1502
When the vendee is disturbed in the possession or dominion of the
thing acquired, or may have reasonable grounds to fear being disturbed by
a revindicatory or hypothecary action, he may suspend the payment of the
price until the vendor has caused the disturbance or danger to cease, unless the latter gives security for the restitution of the price, if needs
be, or when it has been stipulated that, notwithstanding such contingency,
the vendee shall be bound to make the payment.
-
Article 1503
When the vendor has reasonable grounds to fear the lass of the real
property sold and the price of the same, he may immediately ask for the
resolution of the sale.
When such reasonable grounds do not exist, the provisions of art. 1124 shall
be observed.
-
Article 1504
In the sale of real property, even when it is stipulated that in
default of the payment of the price, within the time agreed upon, the resolution
of the contract shall take place by full right, the vendee may pay, even
after the expiration of the term, as long as he has not been summoned either
judicially or by a notarial act.
After such summons have been made the Judge shall not grant him a further
term.
-
Article 1505
With regard to personal property, the resolution of the sale shall
take place by full right for the benefit of the vendor when the vendee,
before the naturity of the term fixed for the delivery of the thing, has
not presented himself, to receive it, or when having presented himself,
he has not offered the price, at the same time, unless a longer term has been stipulated for the payment of said price.
-
Article 1500
-
Chapter Sixth
Resolution of the Sale
-
Article 1506
The sale shall be resolved by the same causes as all other obligations, and furthermore those set forth in the preceding chapters and by conventional or legal redemption (retracto).
-
Section First
Conventional Redemption (Retracto Convencional)
-
Article 1507
Conventional redemption shall exist when the vendor reserves to himself the right to recover the thing sold, binding himself to fulfill that which is stated in art. 1518, and whatever more may have been stipulated.
-
Article 1508
The right stated in the preceding article, in default of an express
stipulation, shall last four years to be counted from the date of the
contract.
When a stipulation exists, the term shall not exceed ten years.
-
Article 1509
When the vendor does not comply with the provisions of art. 1518, the vendee shall irrevocably acquire the ownership of the thing sold.
-
Article 1510
A vendor may exercise his action against every possessor whose right originates from that of the vendee, even when in the second contract mention has not been made of the conventional redemption; without conflict with the provisions of the Law of Mortgage in respect to third parties.
-
Article 1511
A vendee substitutes the vendor in all his rights and actions.
-
Article 1512
The creditors of the vendor shall only be able to make use of the conventional redemption against the vendee, after having levied upon the property of the vendor.
-
Article 1513
A vendee who has a stipulation for redemption of a part of an undivided estate and who acquires the whole estate, in the case of art. 404, may oblige the vendor to redeem the whole estate, if said vendor pretends to make use of the redemption.
-
Article 1514
When several persons, conjointly and in one and the same contract,
sell an undivided estate under condition of redemption, neither of them
shall exercise this right for more than his respective share.
The same rule shall be observed, when the person alone who has sold an
estate has left several heirs in which case each one of them may only
redeem the part which he may have acquired.
-
Article 1515
In the cases of the preceding article, the vendee may require all the vendors and co-heirs to agree about the redemption of the whole of the thing sold; and when they do not do so, the vendee shall not be bound to the partial redemption.
-
Article 1516
Each one of the owners in common of an undivided estate, who has separately sold his share, may independently exercise the right of redemption for his respective share and the vendee can not oblige him to redeem the whole of the estate.
-
Article 1517
When the vendee leaves several heirs, the action of redemption
cannot be exercised against each of them, except for his respective share,
whether it be undivided, or whether it has been distributed among them.
But when the inheritance has been divided, and the thing sold has been
adjudicated to one of the heirs, the action of redemption may be exercised
against him for the whole.
-
Article 1518
A vendor cannot exercise the right of redemption without returning
to the vendee the price of the sale, and furthermore:
-
Article 1519
When on the execution of the sale, there are on the tenement visible
and grown fruits, no indemnity or payment pro rata shall be made for those
existing at the time of the redemption.
When there were no fruits, at the time of the sale, but some exist at
the time of the redemption, they shall be divided pro rata, between the
redemptor and the vendee, giving to the latter the share corresponding
to the time he possessed the estate during the last year, counted from
the date of the sale.
-
Article 1520
A vendor, who recovers the thing sold, shall receive it free of all burdens and mortgages, imposed by the vendee, but he shall remain bound to respect the contracts of lease, executed by the latter in good faith and according to the usage of the place, where it is located.
-
Article 1507
-
Section Second
Legal Redemption (Retracto Legal)
-
Article 1521
Legal redemption is the right to be subrogated, under the same conditions, stipulated in the contract, in the place of the person who acquires a thing by purchase or in payment of a debt.
-
Article 1522
An owner in common of a thing held in common may exercise the
redemption when the shares of all the other owners in common or of any
of them are sold to a third party.
When two or more owners in common wish to exercise the right of redemption,
they shall only do so pro rata as to the shares they have in the thing
held in common.
-
Article 1523
Proprietors of adjacent lands shall also have the right of redemption,
when the rural tenement is sold, the extent of which does not exceed one
hectare.
The right, to which the preceding paragraph refers, shall not apply to
adjacent lands which are divided by brooks,drains, ravines, roads and
other apparent easements for the benefit of other tenements.
When two or more adjacent owners make use of the redemption, at the same
time, the one who is owner of the adjacent land of lesser area shall be
preferred; and if both are equal in area, the person who first asked for
it.
-
Article 1524
The right of legal redemption cannot be exercised except within
nine days to be counted from the inscription in the Registry, and, in
default of it, from the time the redemptor has been informed of the same.
The redemption of an owner in common excludes that of adjacent owners.
-
Article 1525
In legal redemptions, the provisions of articles 1511 and 1518 shall be observed.
-
Article 1521
-
Article 1506
-
Chapter Seventh
Assignments of Credits and Other Incorporeal Rights
-
Article 1526
The assignment of a credit, right or action, shall produce no effect
against a third party but from the time when the date is considered certain,
in accordance with articles 1218 and 1227.
When said assignment refers to real property, from the date of its inscription
in the Registry.
-
Article 1527
A debtor, who before having been informed of the assignment pays the creditor, shall be free from the obligation.
-
Article 1528
The sale or assignment of a credit includes that of all the accessory rights, as the security, mortgage, pledge or privilege.
-
Article 1529
A vendor in good faith shall be responsible for the existence and
legitimacy of the credit, at the time of the sale, unless said credit has
been sold as doubtful, but said vender is not responsible for the solvency
of the debtor, unless it has been expressly stipulated, or when the insolvency
is prior and public.
Even in these cases, he shall only be liable for the price received and
for the expenses stated in no. 1 of art. 1518.
The vendor in bad faith shall always be liable for the payment of all the
expenses and for the damages and injuries.
-
Article 1530
When the assignor in good faith has made himself responsible for
the solvency of the debtor, and the contracting parties have not stipulated
any thing about the duration of such responsibility, it shall only last
one year, to be counted from the assignment of the credit, if the term had
already matured.
When the credit is payable within a term or period not yet expired, the
responsibility shall cease one year after its maturity.
When the credit consists of a perpetual rent, the responsibility shall be
extinguished after ten years, to be counted from the date of the assignment.
-
Article 1531
A person who sells an inheritance, without enumerating the things of which it is composed, shall only be obliged to prove that he is an heir.
-
Article 1532
A person who sells for a total or lump sum certain rights, rents, or products, as a whole, shall comply by answering for the legitimacy of the whole in general, but he shall not be bound to warrant each of the parts of which it is composed, unless in the case of eviction of the whole or of the greater part.
-
Article 1533
When the vendor has profited by some of the fruits, or has received anything from the inheritance which he sells, he must pay the vendee therefor, if the contrary has not been stipulated.
-
Article 1534
The vendee shall, on his part, pay to the vendor all that the latter has paid for debts or charges on the estate and for the credits which he may have against the same, unless the contrary has been stipulated.
-
Article 1535
When the litigious credit is sold, the debtor shall have the right
to extinguish the same by reimbursing the assignee for the price the latter
paid for it, the judicial expenses incurred by him, and the interest on
the price, from the day on which the same was paid.
A credit shall be held as litigious from the day on which the demand, relating
to the same, has been answered.
The debtor may make use of his right within nine days, counted from the
day the assignee claimed the payment from him.
-
Article 1536
From the provisions of the preceding article are excepted the assignments
or sales made:
-
Article 1526
-
Chapter Eighth
General Provision
-
Article 1537
All that is prescribed in this title is understood subject to the provisions of the Law of Mortgage in regard to real property.
-
Article 1537
-
Chapter First
Nature and Form of this Contract
-
Title V
Barter or Exchange
-
Article 1538
Barter or exchange is a contract by which each of the contracting parties binds himself to give a thing in order to receive another.
-
Article 1539
When one of the contracting parties has received the thing promised to him in exchange, and he proves that it did not belong to the person who gave it, he shall not be bound to deliver the one which he offered in exchange, and he shall comply with his duty by returning the one that he received.
-
Article 1540
A person, who loses by eviction the thing received in exchange, may choose between recovering the one which he gave in exchange or claiming an indemnity for damages and injuries; but he shall only be able to enforce the right of recovering the thing which he delivered in so far as said thing remains in the hands of the other party, and without damage to any rights acquired to such thing, in good faith in the mean time, by a third party.
-
Article 1541
Exchange shall be governed by the provisions relating to purchase and sale in all that is not specially determined in this title.
-
Article 1538
-
Title VI
Contract of Lease
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Article 1542
Leases may be made in respect to things, woks (obras), or services.
-
Article 1543
In a lease of things, one of the parties thereto binds himself to give to the other the enjoyment or use of a thing for a specified time and at a determined price.
-
Article 1544
In a lease for works or services, one of the parties binds himself to execute a work or to render a service to the other for a determined price.
-
Article 1545
Perishable things, which are consumed by use, can not be a matter of this contract.
-
Article 1542
-
Chapter Second
Leases of Rural and City Tenements
-
Section First
General Provisions
-
Article 1546
A person who binds himself to grant the use of a thing, execute a work, or render a service is called the lessor; and the person, who acquires the use of a thing or a right to the work or service, for which he binds himself to pay, is the lessee.
-
Article 1547
When the performance of a contract of verbal lease has begun and the evidence of the price is wanting, the lessee shall return to the lessor the thing leased, paying him such price as may be adjudged for the time he has enjoyed such thing.
-
Article 1548
The husband cannot give, in lease, the property of the wife, the father and guardian, that of the son or minor, and the administrator of property, that for which he has not a special power, for a term exceeding six years.
-
Article 1549
In regard to third parties, leases of real property, which are not duly recorded in the Registry of property, shall not be effectual.
-
Article 1550
When it is not expressly forbidden in the contract of lease of things, the lessee may sub-let the whole or a part of the things leased, without lessening his responsibility for the fulfillment of the contract entered into with the lessor.
-
Article 1551
A sub-lessee, notwithstanding his obligation with regard to the sub-lessor, shall remain bound to the lessor for all the acts which refer to the use and preservation of the thing leased, in the manner agreed upon between the lessor and the lessee.
-
Article 1552
The sub-lessee shall also remain bound with respect to the lessor for the amount of the price agreed upon in the contract of sub-lease, which said sub-lessee owes, at the time of the summons, considering the payments made in advance as not made, unless he has paid them according to usage.
-
Article 1553
The provisions respecting warranty, contained under the title
of purchase and sale, shall apply to the contract of lease.
In the cases in which restitution of the price is required, a deduction
of the price should be made proportional to the time for which the lessee
has enjoyed the thing.
-
Article 1546
-
Section Second
Right and Obligations of the Lessor and Lessee
-
Article 1554
The lessor is bound:
-
1
To deliver to the lessee the thing which is the object of the contract.
-
2
To make thereon, during the lease, all the necessary repairs with a
view of preserving it in condition to serve for the purpose for which
it was intended.
-
3
To maintain the lessee in the peaceful enjoyment of the lease during
all the time of the contract.
-
1
-
Article 1555
The lessee is bound:
-
1
To pay the price of the lease in the terms stipulated.
-
2
To use the thing leased as a diligent father of a family would do,
applying the same to the use agreed upon: and, in default of a stipulation,
to the use which may be inferred from the nature of the thing leased according
to the custom of the land.
-
3
To pay the expenses incurred for the deed of contract.
-
1
-
Article 1556
When the lessor or lessee does not comply with the obligations, set forth in the preceding articles, they may ask for the rescission of the contract and the indemnity for damages and injuries, or only for the latter, leaving the contract in force.
-
Article 1557
The lessor shall not change the form of the thing leased.
-
Article 1558
When, during the lease, it becomes necessary to make any urgent
repairs in the thing leased, which cannot be delayed until the expiration,
thereof, the lessee shall be obliged to suffer the execution of the work,
even when it is very annoying to him, and even when, during such repairs,
he may be deprived of a part of the tenement.
When the repairs last more than forty days, the price of the lease shall
be reduced in proportion to the time and the part of the tenement of which
the lessee is deprived.
When the work is of such a nature that the part which the lessee and his
family require for a dwelling becomes inhabitable, the lessee may rescind
the contract.
-
Article 1559
The lessee is bound to give notice to the owner; with the least
possible delay, of any usurpation or injurious alterations (novedad) which
any other person may have done or openly is preparing to do to the thing
leased.
He is also bound to give notice with the same promptness to the owner
of the necessity of all repairs, stated in no. 2, of art. 1554.
In both cases the lessee shall be liable for the damages and injuries,
which through his negligence, may be caused to the lessor.
-
Article 1560
The lessor shall not be obliged to answer for the mere fact of
a trespass (perturbation de mero hccho), made by a third party in the
use of the tenement leased, but the lessee shall have a direct action
against the trespasser.
The fact of trespass does not exist, when the third person, whether it
be the administration or a private party, has acted by virtue of a right
belonging to the same.
-
Article 1561
The lessee shall return the tenement at the expiration of the lease, in the same condition in which he received it, except what may have been destroyed or impaired by time or by inevitable causes.
-
Article 1562
When, at the time of the lease of the tenement, the condition of the same was not stated, the law presumes that the lessee received it in good condition, unless there be proof to the contrary.
-
Article 1563
The lessee is liable for the impairment or loss of the thing leased, unless he proves that the same was caused without his fault.
-
Article 1564
A lessee is liable for the impairment caused by the members of his household.
-
Article 1565
When the lease has been entered into for a specified time, it shall expire on the day previously fixed without the necessity of any notice.
-
Article 1566
When, at the expiration of the contract, the lessee continues enjoying the thing leased for fifteen days (longer) with the acquiescence of the lessor, it shall be understood that there is a tacit new lease for the time set forth in arts. 1577 and 1581, unless a notice has previously been given.
-
Article 1567
In the case of a tacit renewal, the obligations contracted by a third party for the security of the principal contract shall cease in regard thereto.
-
Article 1568
When the thing leased is lost, or any of the contracting parties do not comply with what has been stipulated, the provisions of arts. 1182, 1183, 1101, and 1124 shall be respectively observed.
-
Article 1569
The lessor may judicially eject the lessee for any of the following causes:
-
1
Upon the expiration of the conventional term or the one fixed for the
duration of leases by arts. 1577 and 1581.
-
2
Default in payment of the rent agreed upon.
-
3
Breach of any of the conditions stipulated in the contract.
-
4
When the lessee employs the thing leased in uses or services not stipulated
and which cause the same to be impaired, or when he does not comply, in
respect to its use, with what is prescribed in no. 2 of art. 1555.
-
1
-
Article 1570
Besides the cases mentioned in the preceding article, the lessee shall have the right to avail himself of the terms fixed in arts, 1577 and 1581.
-
Article 1571
The purchaser of a leased tenement has the right to determine
the lease in force at the time of the consumation of the sale, unless
there is a stipulation to the contrary, and the provisions of the Law
of Mortgage are considered.
When the purchaser exercises this right, the lessee may require to be
allowed to gather the fruits of the crop corresponding to the current
agricultural year and to be indemnified by the vendor for the damages
and injuries which he may have suffered.
-
Article 1572
A purchaser with a stipulation of redemption cannot use the power of ejecting the lessee, until the term for the use of the right of redemption has expired.
-
Article 1573
A lessee shall have , in respect to the useful and voluntary improvements, the same rights granted to the usufructuary.
-
Article 1574
When no stipulation exists about the place and time of the payment of rent, the provision of art. 1171 shall govern as to place, and the custom of the land in respect to time.
-
Article 1554
-
Section Third
Special Provisions for Leases of Rural Property
-
Article 1575
A lessee shall not have the right to a reduction of the rent on
account of the sterility of the land leased or on account of the loss
of the fruits, through usual unforeseen events, but he shall have said
right in case of loss of more than half of the fruits through extraordinary
unforeseen events, unless there are special stipulations to the contrary.
By extraordinary unforeseen events shall be understood fire, war, pestilence,
extraordinary inundations, locusts, earthquakes or any other equally unfrequent
events, and which the contracting parties could not have reasonably foreseen.
-
Article 1576
A lessee shall neither have the right to a reduction of the rent, when the fruits have been lost, after having been separated from their roots or trunks.
-
Article 1577
The lease of a rural tenement, when its duration has not been
fixed, shall be understood as executed for all the time which is necessary
for the gathering of the fruits which the whole tenement leased might
produce in one year, or all it could produce, at one time, even when two
or more years may be required for obtaining such fruits.
That of arable lands, divided into two or more terms (hojas), shall be
considered as executed for as many years as there are terms.
-
Article 1578
The outgoing lessee shall permit the incoming one the use of the place and of all other necessary means for the preparatory labor for the following year, and, reciprocally, the latter is bound to permit the outgoing one all that may be necessary for the gathering and enjoyment of the fruits, all according to the custom of the place.
-
Article 1579
Leases for partnerships of arable lands, breeding cattle, and for industrial or manufacturing establishments, shall be governed by the provisions, relating to the contract of partnership and by the stipulations of the contracting parties, and, in default of the same, by the customs of the land.
-
Article 1575
-
Section Fourth
Special Provisions for the Lease of Urban Tenements
-
Article 1580
In default of a special stipulation for the repairs of urban tenements, which should be borne by the owner, the customs of the place shall rule. In case of doubt, said repairs shall be understood as chargeable to the owner.
-
Article 1581
When a term has not been fixed for the lease; it is understood
for years, when an annual rent has been fixed, for months, when the rent
is monthly, and for days, when it is daily.
In every case, the lease ceases without the necessity of a special notice
upon the expiration of the term.
-
Article 1582
When the lessor of a house, or of a part of the same, intended as a dwelling for a family, or for a store or storehouse or industrial establishment, leases also the furniture, the lease of the latter shall be understood as executed for a time equal to that of the house leased.
-
Article 1580
-
Section First
General Provisions
-
Chapter Third
Leases of Works and Services
-
Section First
Services of Hired Servants and Laborers
-
Article 1583
This class of services may be contracted, either without a time being specified, for a fixed time, or for a specified work. A lease made for the whole life is null.
-
Article 1584
A domestic servant, hired for a fixed time and to be employed
in the personal service of his master or of the family of the latter,
may leave the service or be dismissed before the expiration of the term;
but when the master dismisses such servant, without a just cause, he shall
indemnify him by paying him the salary due and that for fifteen additional
days. The master's (statement) shall be believed, unless there is proof
to the contrary:
-
Article 1585
Besides what is prescribed in the preceding articles, with regard to masters and servants, what is determined in the special laws and ordinances shall be observed.
-
Article 1586
Field-hands, mechanics, artisans, and other hired laborers, fora certain time and for a certain work, shall not leave nor be dismissed, without just cause, before the fulfillment of the contract.
-
Article 1587
The dismissal of servants, mechanics, artisans and other hired laborers, to which the preceding articles refer, gives the right to dispossess them of the working tools and of the buildings which they occupy by reason of their duties.
-
Article 1583
-
Section Second
Works at a Price Agreed Upon or For a Lump Sum
-
Article 1588
The execution of a work may be contracted by agreeing that the person, who is to execute the same, shall employ
only his labor or industry, or that he shall furnish the materials in
addition.
-
Article 1589
When the person, who contracted for the work, bound himself to furnish the materials, he shall bear the loss, in case of the destruction of the work before it is delivered, unless, delay has been incurred in receiving the work.
-
Article 1590
A person, who has bound himself to provide only his labor or industry, shall not claim any payment, when the work is destroyed before it is delivered, unless delay has been incurred in receiving the same, or when the destruction has been due to the bad quality of the materials, provided that he may have given due notice of this circumstance to the owner.
-
Article 1591
The contractor of a building, which has been destroyed on account
of vices of construction, shall be liable for any damages and injuries,
when said building falls down within ten years, to be counted from the
completion of the construction; and, during the same time, the same liability
shall be incurred by the architect, who directed the work, when the ruin
is on account of vices of the ground or of his directions.
When the cause is the non-compliance of the contractor with the conditions
of the contract, the action for indemnity can be enforced within fifteen
years.
-
Article 1592
A persons who binds himself to do a work, by piece or by measure, may require from the owner to receive it by parts and to pay for it in proportion. The part paid for shall be presumed approved and received.
-
Article 1593
An architect or contractor, who for a lump sum, takes charge of
the construction of a building, or of any other work by inspection of
plans agreed upon, with the owner of the ground, cannot ask for an increase
in the price, even when that of the materials or wages have increased,
but be may do so when any change which increases the work is made in the
plans, provided the owner has given his authorization.
-
Article 1594
The owner may desist, by his own will, from the construction of the work, even when it has been begun, indemnifying the contractor for all the expenses, labor, and profits which he may have obtained from the same.
-
Article 1595
When a certain work has been entrusted to a person by reason of
his personal qualities, the contract shall be rescinded upon the death
of said person.
In this case, the owner shall pay to the heirs of the constructor, in
proportion to the price agreed upon, the value of the part of the work
which has been executed, and for the prepared materials, provided he may
obtain any benefit from such materials.
The same provisions shall apply, when the person who contracted the work
cannot finish it on account of any cause independent of his will.
-
Article 1596
A contractor is responsible for the labor done by the persons he employs on the work.
-
Article 1597
Those, who furnish their labor and materials in a work agreed upon for a lump sum by a contractor, shall have no action against the owner, except for the sum which the latter may owe to the former when the claim is made.
-
Article 1598
When it is agreed that the work is to be made to the satisfaction
of the owner, in default of his acceptance, such approval shall be understood
as reserved for the proper judgment of experts.
When the person who has to approve the work is a third party, his decision
shall govern.
-
Article 1599
When there is no stipulation or custom to the contrary, the price for the work shall be paid upon delivery.
-
Article 1600
A person, who has performed a work on personal things, has the right to retain the same as a pledge until he is paid therefor.
-
Article 1588
-
Section Third
Transportation by Water and Land, Either of Persons or of Things
-
Article 1601
Carriers of goods by land or by water shall be subjected, as to
the keeping and preservation of the things entrusted to them, to the same
obligations as prescribed for inn-keepers by arts. 1783 and 1784.
The provision of this article shall be understood without prejudice to
what is prescribed by the Code of Commerce, with regard to transportation
by sea and land.
-
Article 1602
Carriers are also responsible for the losses and damages of the things which they receive, unless they prove that the loss or damage has happened on account of an unforeseen event or by main force (fuerza mayor).
-
Article 1603
The provisions of the foregoing articles are understood without conflict with what is prescribed by special laws and regulations.
-
Article 1601
-
Section First
Services of Hired Servants and Laborers
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Title VII
Rents of Land or Ground-Rents (censos)
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Article 1604
A ground- rent (censo) is constituted when any real property is subjected to the payment of a pension or annual rent in compensation, either for a capital which is received in cash, or for the full or partial ownership of the property which is conveyed.
-
Article 1605
A ground-rent is called emphyteusis (enfiteutico) when a person transfers to another the useful ownership of a tenement, reserving to himself the direct ownership and a right to receive from the emphyteuta an annual pension in recognition of such dominion.
-
Article 1606
A ground- rent is consignative (consignativo) when the owner of land imposes upon a tenement belonging to him the burden of a rent or pension which he binds himself to pay to the lender for a sum in cash which he has received from the latter.
-
Article 1607
A ground- rent is reservative (reservativo) when a person transfers to another the complete ownership of a tenement, reserving to himself the right to receive from said tenement an annual pension which is to be paid by the holder of the land.
-
Article 1608
The nature of a ground-rent requires that the transfer of the capital
or of the tenement should be perpetual or for an unlimited time; however,
the censatario (1) may redeem the ground-rent, at his will, though the contrary
is stipulated, and this provision is applicable to ground-rents actually
existing.
It may, however, be stipulated, that the redemption of the ground-rent can
not be made during the life of the ccnsnalista (2) or of a specified person,
or that it may not be redeemed within a certain number of years, which cannot
exceed twenty years, in consignative ground- rents, nor sixty years in reservative
ground-rents and in emphyteusis.
-
Article 1609
To carry into effect such redemption, the censatario must give notice thereof one year in advance to the censualista, or must pay to him, in advance, the amount of one year's pension.
-
Article 1610
Ground-rents cannot be partially redeemed, unless by virtue of an
express stiputation.
Neither can they be redeemed against the will of the censualista, unless
the payment of all the pensions due have been made.
-
Article 1611
For the redemption of all ground-rents, constituted before the promulgation
of this Code, when the capital is unknown, it shall be regulated by the
principal which may result, by computing the pension on the basis of three
per centum.
When the pension is payable in fruits, for the determination of the capital,
they shall be appraised, at the average price which such fruits may have
had during the last five years.
The provisions of this title shall not apply to local ground-rents (foros
and sub foros), rights of surface, or any other similar burdens, in which
the principles of redemption of dominion shall be regulated by a special
law.
-
Article 1612
The expenses, caused for the redemption and liberation of ground-rents, shall be borne by the censatario, except those caused by temerarious opposition which are subject to the discretion of the courts.
-
Article 1613
The pension or rent of ground-rents shall be agreed to by the parties
upon the execution of the contract.
It may consist in money or of fruits.
-
Article 1614
The pensions shall be paid at the times agreed upon, and, in default of a contract, if they consist in money, by the years, as due, to be counted from the date of the contract; and, if in fruits, at the end of the respective crops.
-
Article 1615
When the place, at which the pensions are to be paid, has not been designated in the contract, this obligation shall be complied with at the place in which the tenements, encumbered with the ground-rent, are located, provided the censualista or his attorney have their domicil in the Municipal district of the same town. When such person has not his domicil in said town, but the censatario resides there, the payment shall be made at the domicil of the latter.
-
Article 1616
The censualista, at the time of the delivery of the receipt of any pension, can oblige the censatario to give him a written notice in which it may appear that the payment has been made.
-
Article 1617
Tenements, encumbered with ground-rents, may be conveyed by virtue of an onerous or lucrative title, and the same can be done with the right to receive the pensions.
-
Article 1618
Tenements, encumbered with ground-rents, shall not be divided among
two or more persons without the express consent of the censualista, even
when acquired by a title of inheritance.
When the censualista consents to the division, the part of the ground-rent,
with which each portion remains encumbered, shall be designated with his
consent, and as many different ground-rents shall be constituted as there
apportions in which the tenement is divided.
-
Article 1619
When the tenement encumbered with aground-rent is to be adjudged
to several heirs, and the censualista does not give his consent to the division,
it shall be placed at auction among said heirs.
In default of agreement or when none of the parties in interest offers the
price of the appraisement, the tenement shall be sold with the encumbrances
and the proceeds shall be distributed among the heirs.
-
Article 1620
The principal as well as the pension of ground-rents may be prescribed, in accordance with the provisions of title 18 of this book.
-
Article 1621
Notwithstanding the provisions of art. 1100, the payment of two consecutive pensions shall be necessary to presume that all the preceding ones have been paid.
-
Article 1622
The censatario shall be bound to pay the taxes and all other imposts
which effect the tenement burdened with the ground-rent.
At the time the censatario pays the pension, he may deduct from the same
the part of the imposts which pertains to the censualista.
-
Article 1623
Ground-rents give cause for a real action against the tenement encumbered. Besides the real action, the censualista may enforce a personal action for the payment of the pensions in arrears, and when proper for damages and interests.
-
Article 1624
A censatario shall not ask for the remission or reduction of the pension on account of an accidental sterility of the tenement nor on account of the loss of its fruits.
-
Article 1625
When a tenement encumbered with a groundrent is totally destroyed
or rendered useless by main force or by an unforeseen event, the ground-rent
shall be extinguished and the payment of the pension shall also cease.
When it is partially destroyed, the censatario shall not be exempt from
the payment of the pension, unless he prefers to abandon the tenement to
the censnalista.
When there is fault on the part of the censatario, he shall be bound, in
both cases, to an indemnity for damages and injuries.
-
Article 1626
In the case of the first paragraph of the preceding article, when the tenement is insured, the amount of the insurance shall be subject to the payment of the principal of the ground-rent and of the pensions due, unless the censatario prefers to invest it in rebuilding the tenement, in which case the ground-rent shall survive with all its effects, including the payment of the unpaid pensions. The censnalista may exact from the censatario that he secure the investment of the amount of the insurance in the rebuilding of the tenement.
-
Article 1627
When a tenement, encumbered with a ground-rent, is expropriated
on account of public utility, the price of the same shall remain liable
for the payment of the principal of the ground-rent and of the pensions
due, and said ground-rent shall be extinguished.
The preceding provision is also applicable in the case in which the forced
expropriation is only of a part of the tenement when its price is sufficient
to cover the principal of the ground-rent.
When this price is not sufficient, the ground-rent shall continue to encumber
the remainder of the tenement, provided its price be sufficient to cover
the principal of the ground-rent and an additional twenty five per centum
over and above it.
In any other case the censatario shall be bound, either to substitute the
part expropriated with another security, or to redeem the ground-rent, at
his option, without prejudice to what is provided in art. 1631, in respect
to emphyteusis.
-
Article 1604
-
Chapter Second
Emphyteusis (Censo Enfiteutico)
-
Section First
Provisions Referring to Emphyteusis
-
Article 1628
Emphyteusis can only be constituted on real property and by a public deed.
-
Article 1629
At the time of the constitution of the emphyteusis, the value of the tenement and the annual pension to be paid shall be fixed in the contract, under the penalty of nullity.
-
Article 1630
When the pension consists of a fixed amount of fruits, the kind
and quality of the same shall be stated in the contract.
When it consists in an aliquot part of what the tenement may produce,
in default of an express stipulation, as to the intervention which the
direct owner may exercise, the emphyteuta shall give to said owner or
his representative previous notice of the day on which he intends to commence
the gathering of each kind of fruit, in order that he may be able, either
personally or by his representative, to inspect all the operations, until
he receives the share belonging to him.
After the notice is given, the emphyteuta may gather the crops, even when
neither the direct owner nor his representative or intervenor is present.
-
Article 1631
In case of forcible expropriation, the provisions of the first
paragraph of art. 1627 shall be applied when the whole tenement is expropriated.
When it is expropriated only in part, the price of what has been expropriated
shall be distributed between the direct owner and the emphyteuta, the
former receiving the part of the principal of the ground-rent, which proportionally
belongs to the expropriated part, according to the value given to the
whole tenement when the ground- rent was constituted, or to that which
has served as a basis for the redemption, and the remainder shall belong
to the emphyteuta.
In this case the ground-rent shall continue on the rest of the tenement,
with the proper reduction of the principal and the pension , unless the
emphyteuta elects between the total redemption or the abandonment in behalf
of the direct owner.
When, in accordance with what has been stipulated , laudemium is to be
paid, the direct owner shall receive that, which for this reason belongs
to him, only from the part of the price belonging to the emphyteuta.
-
Article 1632
To the emphyteuta belongs the products of the tenement and of
its accessions.
He has the same rights which the owner would have in the treasures and
mines which may be discovered on the tenement held in emphyteusis.
-
Article 1633
The emphyteuta may dispose of the tenement held in emphyteusis and of its accessions, by acts inter vivos, as well as by last will, leaving intact the rights of the direct owner, and subject to the provisions of the following articles.
-
Article 1634
When the pension consists of an aliquot part of the fruits of the tenement held in emphyteusis, neither an easement nor any other burden which may diminish the proceeds of the same, shall be imposed upon it, without the express consent of the direct owner.
-
Article 1635
The emphyteuta may freely donate or exchange the tenement, giving notice of it to the direct owner.
-
Article 1636
To the direct owner and to the emphyteuta reciprocally belong
the right of pre-emption and of redemption, whenever they sell or give
in payment their respective ownerships of the tenement held in emphyteusis.
These provisions shall not apply to forcible sales for causes of public
utility.
-
Article 1637
For the effects of the preceding article, the persons who intend
to alienate the ownership of a tenement, held in emphyteusis, shall give
notice of it to the other owner stating the final price which is offered
to him or the one for which he intends to alienate his ownership.
Within twenty days after the notice is given, the other owner may make
use of the right of pre-emption by paying the price indicated. When he
does not do this, he shall lose such right and the alienation may be carried
into effect.
-
Article 1638
When the direct owner or the emphyteuta, in certain cases, has
not made use of the right of pre-emption, to which the preceding article
refers, he may make use of that of redemption to acquire the tenement
for the price at which it has been sold.
In this case, the redemption shall be made use of within nine working
days next following the execution of the deed of sale. If this sale is
concealed, said term shall be counted from the inscription of the same
in the Registry of property.
Concealment is presumed when the deed is not filed in the Registry within
the nine days next following its execution.
Besides this presumption, the concealment may be proven by any other lawful
means.
-
Article 1639
When the alienation has been affected without the previous notice, which art 1637 prescribes, the direct owner, and, in certain cases, the emphyteuta may exercise the action of redemption, at any time, until the lapse of a year to be counted from the day the alienation is inscribed in the Registry of property.
-
Article 1640
In judicial sales of tenements held in emphyteusis, the direct
owner and the emphyteuta, in their respective cases, may make use of the
right of pre-emption, within the term fixed in the notices of the sale
at auction, paying the price which served as a basis for the auction,
and that of the redemption within the nine working days next following
that of the execution of the deed.
In this case, the previous notice, required by art. 1637, shall not be
necessary.
-
Article 1641
When there are several tenements alienated, subject to the same ground-rent, the right of pre-emption or that of redemption cannot be exercised with regard to some of them and to the exclusion of others.
-
Article 1642
When the direct or useful ownership undividedly belongs to several persons, each one of them may make use of the right of redemption subject to the rules set forth for that of owners in common and preference shall be given to the direct owner, if a part of the useful ownership has been alienated; or to the emphyteuta, when the alienation has been of the direct ownership.
-
Article 1643
When the emphyteuta is disturbed in his right by a third party who disputes the direct ownership or the validity of the emphyteusis, he shall not have the right to claim the corresponding indemnity from the direct owner, if he does not summon him for the eviction, in accordance with the provisions of art 1481.
-
Article 1644
In alienations under an onerous title of tenements held in emphyteusis,
laudemium shall be paid to the direct owner only, when it has been expressly
stipulated in the contract of emphyteusis.
If when it has been stipulated, a fixed sum has not been determined, this
sum shall consist of two per cent of the price of the alienation.
In emphyteusis, prior to the promulgation of this Code, subject to the
payment laudemium, even when it has not been stipulated, this prestation
shall continue in the usual manner, but it shall not exceed two per cent
of the price of the alienation, unless a higher one has been expressly
contracted.
-
Article 1645
The obligation to pay laudemium corresponds to the person who acquires the tenement, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary.
-
Article 1646
When the emphyteuta has obtained permission from the direct owner for the alienation or has given him the previous notice, prescribed in art. 1637, the direct owner shall not have the right to claim the payment of the laudemium, except within a year following the day on which the public deed is inscribed in the Registry of property. Besides said cases, this action shall be subject to ordinary prescription.
-
Article 1647
The direct owner may, every twenty nine years, exact the recognition
of his right by the person who is in possession of the tenement held in
emphyteusis.
The expenses of the recognition shall be borne by the emphyteuta and no
other prestation, whatever, for this reason, shall be required from him.
-
Article 1648
The tenement shall be forfeited and the direct owner may claim
its restitution:
-
Article 1649
In order that the direct owner may claim the confiscation in the first case of the preceding article, he shall demand payment from the emphyteuta, either judicially or through a Notary, and when said emphyteuta does not pay within thirty days next following the demand, the right of the owner may be freely exercised.
-
Article 1650
The emphyteuta may free himself from the forfeiture, in every
case, by redeeming the ground-rent and paying the pensions due, within
thirty days next following the formal demand for the payment or the summons
for the suit.
Creditors of the emphyteuta may make use of the same right, within thirty
days after the one upon which the direct owner has recovered the full
domain.
-
Article 1651
The redemption of the emphyteusis shall consist in a payment of cash in full to the direct owner for the capital which may have been fixed as the value of the tenement, at the time of the constitution of the ground-rent, and no other prestation can be exacted, unless it has been stipulated.
-
Article 1652
In case of forfeiture, or in that of rescission of the contract
of emphyteusis on account of any cause whatever, the direct owner shall
pay for the improvements which may have increased the value of the tenement,
provided such increase exists at the time of the restitution.
When the tenement has been damaged, through fault or negligence on the
part of the emphyteuta, the same shall be set off against the improvements,
and as to those which these do not cover, the emphyteuta shall remain
personally bound to pay for them, as well as for the pensions due and
not prescribed.
-
Article 1653
In default of testamentary heirs, descendants, ascendants, the surviving consort and relatives within the sixth degree of the last emphyteuta, the tenement shall revert to the direct owner in the condition in which it may exist, unless the emphyteuta did not otherwise dispose of it.
-
Article 1654
The contract of sub-emphyteusis shall not be valid in the future.
-
Article 1628
-
Section Second
Local Ground-Rents (Foros), and Other Contracts Analogous to That of Emphyteusis
-
Article 1655
Local ground-rents (foros), and any other burdens of analogous
nature which may be established after the promulgation of this Code, when
they are for an unlimited time, shall be governed by the provisions of emphyteusis, set
forth in the preceding section.
When they are temporal or for limited times, they shall be considered
as leases and shall be governed by the provisions relating to such contracts.
-
Article 1656
The contract by virtue of which the owner of land grants its use for the plantation of vines, during the time that the first root- stocks may live, the grantee paying him an annual pension or rent in fruits or in money, shall be governed by the following rules :
-
1
It shall be considered extinguished fifty years after the grant, when no other time has been expressly fixed in the same grant.
-
2
It shall also be extinguished by the death of the first root-stocks, or when two thirds of those planted have become barren.
-
3
The grantee or parcenary may make sprigs or shoots from new vines during the time of the contract.
-
4
This contract does not lose its character by the power of making other plantations on the lands granted, provided its main object is the plantation of vines.
-
5
The grantee may freely transmit his right under an onerous or gratuitous title, but the use of the tenement shall not be divided, unless the owner expressly consents to it.
-
6
In the alienations under an onerous title, the grantor and grantee shall reciprocally have the rights of pre-emption and redemption in accordance with the provisions set forth for emphyteusis, and with the obligation of giving previous notice, as prescribed in art. 1637.
-
7
A parcenary or grantee may relinquish or return the tenement to the grantor, when convenient, upon paying for the impairments caused by his fault.
-
8
The grantee shall have no right to the improvements existing on the tenement at the time of the expiration of the contract, provided they are necessary or have been made in fulfillment of what has been stipulated.
In respect to the useful and voluntary improvements, said grantee shall not have a right to be paid for the same, unless he made them with the written consent of the owner of the land, who bound himself to pay for them. In this case, said improvements shall be paid for according to the value which they may have when the tenement is returned.
-
9
A grantor may make use of the action of ejectment upon the expiration of the term of the contract.
-
10
When, after the expiration of the term of fifty years or the one expressly fixed by the persons interested, the grantee continues in the use and enjoyment of the tenement by the implied consent of the grantor, the former cannot be ejected without previous notice which the latter should give him a year in advance to determine the contract."
-
1
-
Article 1655
-
Section First
Provisions Referring to Emphyteusis
-
Chapter Third
Consignative Ground-Rents (Censo Consignativo)
-
Article 1657
When the payment of the pension for the consignative ground-rent
is stipulated in fruits, the species, quantity and quality of the same shall
be fixed, and it can not consist of an aliquot part of those which the tenement,
held in ground-rent, produces.
-
Article 1658
The redemption of the consignative ground-rent shall consist in the restitution to the censualista in cash and in full of the capital paid for the constitution of the ground-rent.
-
Article 1659
When a real action is instituted against a tenement, held under a ground- rent, for the payment of pensions, if what remains of the value of the same is not sufficient to cover the capital of the ground-rent and twenty five per cent over and above the same, the censualista may oblige the censatario, at the latter's option, either to redeem the ground-rent or to complete the guarantee or to abandon the remainder of the tenement in behalf of the former.
-
Article 1660
The censualista may also exercise the right, set forth in the preceding article, in all the other cases in which the value of the tenement is not sufficient to cover the capital of the ground-rent and twenty five per cent more, when any of the following circumstances exist:
-
1
When the value of the tenement has decreased by the fault or negligence of the censatario.
In this case the latter shall also be liable for such damages and injuries.
-
2
When the censatario has failed to pay the pensions during two consecutive years.
-
3
When the censatario may have been declared in bankruptcy, in failure (en concurso), or in insolvency."
-
1
-
Article 1657
-
Chapter Fourth
Reservative Ground-Rent (Censo Reservativo)
-
Article 1661
Reservative ground-rent cannot be validly constituted, unless preceded by an avaluation of the tenement for a sum agreed to by the parties or upon a just appraisement by experts.
-
Article 1662
The redemption of this ground-rent shall be effected by the censatario delivering to the censualista, in cash and in full, the principal which may have been fixed in accordance with the preceding article.
-
Article 1663
The provisions of art. 1657 are applicable to reservative ground-rent.
-
Article 1664
In the cases provided in arts. 1659 and 1660, the debtor of the reservative ground-rent can only be bound, either to redeem the ground-rent, or to relinquish the tenement in favor of the censualista.
-
Article 1661
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Title VIII
Partnership
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Article 1665
Partnership is a contract by which two or more persons bind themselves to place money, property, or industry, in common, with the intention of dividing the profits among themselves.
-
Article 1666
Partnerships must have licit objects, and be established for the common interests of the partners.
When the dissolution of an illicit partnership is declared, the profits
shall be destined for the institutions of beneficence of the domicil of
the partnership, and, in default of the same, to those of the province.
-
Article 1667
Civil partnerships may be constituted in any form whatever, unless when real property or real rights are brought to the same, in which case a public deed is necessary.
-
Article 1668
A contract of partnership is null and void, when real property is brought to the same, if an inventory of said property is not made and signed by the partners and annexed to the deed.
-
Article 1669
Partnerships, the stipulations of which are kept secret among the
partners, and in which each one of the partners may contract in his own
name with third parties, shall have no juridical personality.
This kind of partnership shall be governed by the provisions referring to
property held in common.
-
Article 1670
Civil partnerships, on account of the objects for which they are destined, may adopt all the forms accepted by the Code of Commerce. In this case, the provisions of the same shall be applicable, in so far as they are not in conflict with those of the present Code.
-
Article 1671
Partnerships are either general or particular.
-
Article 1672
General partnerships may consist of all the present property or of all the profits.
-
Article 1673
Partnerships which comprise all the present property are those in which the parties place all the property which actually belongs to them, in common, with the intention of dividing the same among themselves, as well as all the profits which they may acquire through said property.
-
Article 1674
In general partnerships of all the present property, what belongs
to each of the partners becomes common property of all the partners, as
well as all the profits which they may acquire through the same.
A general partnership of any other property may also be agreed upon, but
the property which the partners acquire, thereafter, by inheritance, legacy
or donations shall not be comprised in the same, though the fruits of said
property shall be included therein.
-
Article 1675
General partnerships for profits comprise all that the partners
may acquire by their industry or work, as long as the partnership lasts.
Personal or real property which each of the partners possess, at the time
of the celebration of the contract, shall continue to be their private property,
and the usufruct only passes to the partnership.
-
Article 1676
A contract of general partnership, entered into without specifying its nature, only constitutes a general partnership of profits.
-
Article 1677
Persons who are forbidden to reciprocally grant to each other donations or advantages cannot contract a general partnership.
-
Article 1678
A particular partnership has for its object only specified things, their uses or profits, or a specified undertaking, or the exercise of a profession or art.
-
Article 1665
-
Chapter Second
Obligations of Partners
-
Section First
Obligations of the Partners Among Themselves
-
Article 1679
A partnership begins from the moment of the celebration of the contract, when not otherwise stipulated.
-
Article 1680
A partnership lasts, during the time agreed upon; in default of
an agreement, for such time as the business which has been the exclusive object of the partnership may last, if by its nature, it has a limited duration; and, in any other case, during the lives of the partners, without prejudice to the rights reserved to them in art. 1700, and to the provisions of art. 1704.
-
Article 1681
Each partner is a debtor of the partnership for whatever he has
promised to bring to it.
He is also bound to eviction in regard to the specified and determined
things brought by him to the partnership, in the same cases and in the
same manner as a vendor is bound in respect to the vendee.
-
Article 1682
A partner who has bound himself to bring to the partnership a
sum of money, and fails to do so, is, at law, a debtor for the interest
thereon from the day on which he should have brought it, and may also
be bound to pay an indemnity for the damages which he may have caused
thereby.
The same thing shall be observed with regard to sums which he may have
taken from partnership funds, and interest shall be counted from the day
on which he took them for his private benefit.
-
Article 1683
An industrial partner owes to the partnership, the profits which, during its existence, he has earned in a branch of the industry which is the object of the partnership.
-
Article 1684
When a partner who is authorized as a manager collects an exigible
sum, which was owed to him in his own name, from a person who owed to
the partnership another sum, also exigible, the sum collected shall be
imputed to the two credits in proportion to their amounts, even when he
has given a receipt for his own account only, but when he has given it
on account of the partnership, it shall all be imputed to the credit of
the latter.
It shall be understood that the provisions of this article shall not prevent
the debtor using the power granted to him in art. 1 172, but only in the
case where the personal credit of the partner is more onerous to him.
-
Article 1685
A partner who has received in full his share of a partnership credit, when the other partners had not collected theirs, remains bound, when the debtor afterwards becomes insolvent, to bring to the partnership capital what he received, even when he gave the receipt for his part only.
-
Article 1686
Every partner shall be liable to the partnership for the damages and injuries caused to the same by his fault, and he can not set off against them the benefits which he may have given to the partnership by his industry.
-
Article 1687
The risk of things, certain and specified, which are not perishable,
brought to the partnership, in order that only their use and fruits be
common, shall be borne by the partner owning them.
When the things brought are perishable, or when they cannot be kept without
being impaired, or when they were brought to be sold, the risk shall be
assumed by the partnership. It shall also be assumed by the same, in default
of a special stipulation in respect to the things brought and appraised
in the inventory, and, in this case, the claim shall be limited to the
value at which they were appraised.
-
Article 1688
The partnership is liable to each partner for thesums which he may have disbursed on account of the same and for the corresponding interest; it shall also be liable to each partner for the obligations which he may have contracted in good faith on account of the partnership business, and for risks inseparable from its management.
-
Article 1689
The losses and profits shall be distributed in conformity with
what has been stipulated. When a stipulation exists only in respect to
the share of each one in the profits, his share in the losses shall be
in the same proportion.
In default of a stipulation, the share of each partner in the profits
and losses shall be in proportion to what he brought. The partner who
contributes only his industry shall have a share equal to the one who
has brought less. When besides his industry, he has brought a capital,
he shall also receive the proportional share which may belong to him for
this capital.
-
Article 1690
When the partners have agreed to entrust to a third person the
designation of the share of each one in the profits and losses, such designation
shall be contested only when it has evidently been made contrary to equity.
In no case shall the partner, who has commenced to execute the decision
of the third party or who has not contested the same within three months,
to be counted from when it was known to him, make a claim against it.
The designation of the profits and losses shall not be entrusted to one
of the partners.
-
Article 1691
A stipulation in which one or more of the partners are excluded
from any share in the profits or in the losses is void.
Only the industrial partner may be exempted from any liability in the
losses.
-
Article 1692
A partner, who has been appointed manager in a contract of partnership,
may execute all administrative acts, notwithstanding the opposition of
his partners, unless he acts in bad faith, and his power is irrevocable,
unless it be for a legitimate cause.
A power, executed after the contract, without having it stipulated therein
that it should be conferred, may be revoked at any time.
-
Article 1693
When two or more partners have been charged with the management of a partnership without their functions being specified, or when it has not been expressed that one of them shall not act without the consent of the others, each one may severally exercise all acts of administration; but any of them may oppose the acts of the others before the same has produced any legal effect.
-
Article 1694
When it has been stipulated that some of the managing partners cannot act without the consent of the others, the consent of all shall be necessary for the validity of the acts; and the absence or impossibility of any one of them to act shall not be alleged, unless there is imminent danger of a serious or irreparable damage to the partnership.
-
Article 1695
When no stipulation has been made about the form of management, the following rules shall be observed:
-
1
All the partners shall be considered agents, and whatever anyone of
them does by himself alone shall bind the partnership; but each one may
oppose the operations of the others before the same has produced any legal
effect.
-
2
Each partner may make use of the things which compose the partnership
capital, according to the customs of the land, provided he does not use
them against the interest of the partnership or in such a way as to prevent
the use of them to which his co-partners are entitled.
-
3
Every partner can bind the others to bear together with him the expenses
necessary for the preservation of the things held in common.
-
4
None of the partners shall, without the consent of the others, make
any alteration in the partnership real property, even when he alleges
that it is useful to the partnership.
-
1
-
Article 1696
Each partner may associate another person in his share; but said person shall not enter the partnership without the unanimous consent of the other partners, even when the former is the manager.
-
Article 1679
-
Section Second
Obligations of Partners in Respect to Third Persons
-
Article 1697
In order that the partnership may remain liable to a third person
for the acts of one of the partners, it is necessary :
-
Article 1698
Partners do not remain jointly bound in respect to the debts of
the partnership, and none of them can bind the others by a personal act,
if a power has not been conferred on him therefor.
A partnership does not remain liable in respect to a third person for
the acts which one of the partners has done in his own name and without
a power from the partnership therefor, but it remains liable to the partner
in so far as said acts have benefited said partnership.
The provision of this article shall be understood without prejudice to what is set forth in rule first of art. 1695.
-
Article 1699
Creditors of the partnership shall be preferred to the creditors of each partner as to the partnership property . Notwithstanding this right, the private creditors of each partner may ask for the seizure and sale at auction of the latter's share in the partnership capital.
-
Article 1697
-
Section First
Obligations of the Partners Among Themselves
-
Chapter Third
Manner of Extinguishing Partnership
-
Article 1700
Partnership is extinguished:
-
1
When the term for which it was constituted expires.
-
2
When the thing is lost, or the business for which it was constituted ends.
-
3
By the natural death, civil interdiction, or insolvency of any of the partners, and in the case provided for in art. 1699.
-
4
By the will of any of the partners, subject to the provisions of arts. 1705 and 1707.
-
1
-
Article 1701
When a specific thing, which a partner has promised to bring to
the partnership, perishes before the delivery has been effected, its loss
produces the dissolution of the partnership.
A partnership shall also be dissolved, in every case, by the loss of the
thing, when the partner who brings it reserves to himself the ownership
thereof and transfers to the partnership only the use or enjoyment of the
same.
But the partnership shall not be dissolved by the loss of the thing, when
this loss happens after the property thereof has been acquired by the partnership.
-
Article 1702
A partnership constituted for a specified time may be extended by
the consent of all the partners.
Such consent may be express or implied and it may be shown by any ordinary
means.
-
Article 1703
When the partnership is extended, after the expiration of its term, it shall be understood that a new partnership is constituted. When it is extended before the expiration of such term, the original partnership continues.
-
Article 1704
A stipulation is valid which provides that, on the death of one
of the partners, the partnership shall continue among the survivors. In
this case, the heir of the decedent shall have only the right to have a
distribution made, fixing it on the day of the death of his constituent;
and he shall not participate in the successive rights and obligations only
in so far as they are a necessary result of what has been done before said day.
When the stipulation is that the partnership shall continue with the heir,
it shall be enforced, without prejudice to the provisions of no. 4 of art. 1700.
-
Article 1705
The dissolution of the partnership by the will or renunciation of
one of the partners shall only take place when a term for its duration has
not been fixed, or this term does not appear from the nature of the business.
In order that the renunciation may be effectual, it shall be made in good
faith and timely; notice thereof shall also be given to the other partners.
-
Article 1706
A renunciation shall be considered in bad faith when the person
who makes it proposes to appropriate to himself alone the benefits which
should be common for all. In this case the person who renounces it does
not free himself from responsibility to his partners, and they shall have
the power to exclude him from the partnership.
A renunciation shall be presumed as not made in time when, the things not
being integral, the partnership is interested in delaying its dissolution.
In this case the partnership shall continue until the termination of the
pending business.
-
Article 1707
No partner can demand the dissolution of a partnership, which either
by a provision of the contract, or by the nature of the business, has been
constituted for a specified time, unless there exists a just cause, such
as when one of the co-partners fails to comply with his obligations, or
when he becomes incapacitated for the partnership business, or any other similar cause, according to the judgement of the courts.
-
Article 1708
Distribution among the partners shall be governed by the rules of inheritances, both with regard to its form and to the obligations resulting from the same. To the industrial partner shall not be given any part of the property brought to it, but only its fruits and profits, according to the. provisions of art. 1689, unless the contrary has been expressly stipulated.
-
Article 1700
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Title IX
Agency
-
Chapter First
Nature, Form and Kind of Agency
-
Article 1709
By the contract of agency, a person binds himself to render some service, or to do something in behalf of or at the request of another person.
-
Article 1710
Agency may be express or tacit.
Express agency may be given by a public or private instrument and even by
parol.
The acceptance may also be express or tacit, and the latter may be inferred
from the acts of the agent.
-
Article 1711
In default of a stipulation to the contrary, the agency is presumed
to be gratuitous.
Nevertheless, when the agent has for an occupation the performance of services
of the kind to which the agency refers, the obligation of giving him a compensation
is presumed.
-
Article 1712
Agency is general or special.
The former embraces all the business of the principal.
The latter, one or more specified businesses.
-
Article 1713
Agency stated in general terms only comprises acts of administration.
To compromise, alienate, mortgage or to execute any other act of rigorous
ownership express authority is required.
The power to compromise does not give authority to place the matter in the
hands of arbitrators or compromisers.
-
Article 1714
An agent shall not exceed the limits of the authority granted to him.
-
Article 1715
The limits of the authority shall not be presumed exceeded, when the business is complied with in a manner more advantageous for the principal than that specified.
-
Article 1716
An emancipated minor can be an agent; but the principal shall only
have an action against him in conformity with the provisions concerning
the obligations of minors.
Married women can only accept an agency with authorization of their husbands.
-
Article 1717
When an agent acts in his own name, the principal shall have no
action against the persons with whom the agent has contracted, nor the said
persons against the principal.
In this case, the agent remains directly bound to the person with whom he
has contracted, as if it were his own personal, business. The case in which
the contract refers to things belonging to the principal is excepted.
The provision of this article shall be understood without prejudice to actions
between the principal and the agent.
-
Article 1709
-
Chapter Second
Obligations of the Agent
-
Article 1718
An agent by his acceptance remains bound to comply with the agency
and shall be liable for the damages and injuries caused to the principal
for his non-compliance.
Business, which has. already been begun at the death of the principal, must
be completed by him, when there is any peril in delay.
-
Article 1719
In compliance with the agency, the agent shall observe the instructions
received from the principal.
In default of the same, he shall do all that, which according to the nature
of the business, a good father of a family would do.
-
Article 1720
Every agent is bound to render an account of his operations and to pay to the principal all that he has received by virtue of the agency, even when what he has received is not owed to the principal.
-
Article 1721
An agent may appoint a substitute , when the principal has not forbidden him to do so, but he shall be liable for the acts of the substitute:
-
Article 1722
In the cases stated in the two numbers of the preceding article, the principal shall also have the right to enforce his action against the substitute.
-
Article 1723
The liability of two or more agents, even when they have been simultaneously appointed, shall not be joint, unless it has been so stated.
-
Article 1724
An agent shall owe interest for the sums which he has applied to his own use, from the day on which he did so, and of those which he still owes, after the expiration of the agency and from the time of his default.
-
Article 1725
An agent who acts as such shall not be personally liable towards the persons with whom he contracted, except when he expressly binds himself therefor, or when he exceeds the limits of his authority without giving a sufficient notice of his powers to said person.
-
Article 1726
An agent shall be liable not only for deceit, but also for his negligence, which shall be judged with more or less severity by the courts, taking into consideration whether the agent has been paid for his services or not.
-
Article 1718
-
Chapter Third
Obligations of the Principal
-
Article 1727
A principal shall comply with all the obligations which the agent
has contracted, within the limits of his power.
A principal remains liable, in so far as the agent has exceeded his power,
only when he expressly or tacitly ratifies the same.
-
Article 1728
A principal shall advance to the agent , if the latter asks it,
such sums as may be necessary for the execution of the agency.
When the agent has advanced them, the principal shall reimburse him for
the same, even when the business has not succeeded, provided the agent be
exempt from blame.
The reimbursement shall comprise the interests on the sums advanced, counted
from the day on which the advance was made.
-
Article 1729
A principal shall also indemnify the agent for all damages and injuries caused to him in complying with the agency, when there is no fault or imprudence on the part of said agent.
-
Article 1730
An agent may retain the things, which are the objects of the agency, in pledge, until the principal pays the indemnity and reimbursement referred to in the two preceding articles.
-
Article 1731
When two or more persons have appointed an agent for a business in common, they shall remain jointly bound to the latter for all the effects of the agency.
-
Article 1727
-
Chapter Fourth
Manner of Determining the Agency
-
Article 1732
Agency is determined:
-
Article 1733
A principal may, at his will, revoke the power and compel the agent to return the document in which the authority was given.
-
Article 1734
When an agency has been granted to contract with determined persons, the revocation of the agency shall not be to the injury of said persons, unless notice was given to them.
-
Article 1735
The appointment of a new agent for the same business produces a revocation of the preceding power of attorney from the day on which notice was given to the former agent, without prejudice to the provisions of the preceding article.
-
Article 1736
An agent may renounce the agency by giving notice to the principal. When the latter suffers any injuries by the renunciation, he should be indemnified for the same by the agent, unless the latter bases his renunciation on the impossibility of continuing to act as such without serious detriment to himself.
-
Article 1737
Even when the agent has renounced the power for a just cause, he should continue acting as such until the principal shall be able to take the necessary steps to provide therefor.
-
Article 1738
What has been done by the agent, when he was not aware that the principal was dead, or of any other of the causes which terminate the agency, shall be valid and effectual with regard to third persons who have contracted with the agent in good faith.
-
Article 1739
When the agent dies, his heirs shall give notice of his death to the principal, and, meanwhile, adopt the measures which circumstances may require for the interest of the latter.
-
Article 1732
-
Chapter First
Nature, Form and Kind of Agency
-
Title X
Loans
-
General Provision
-
Article 1740
By the contract of loan, one of the parties delivers to the other,
either anything not perishable, in order that the latter may use it during
a certain time and return it to the former, in which case it is named commodatum,
or money or any other perishable thing, under the condition to return and
equal amount of the same kind and quality, in which case it is merely called
a loan.
Commodatum is essentially gratuitous.
A simple loan may be gratuitous, or made under a stipulation to pay interest.
-
Article 1740
-
Chapter First
Commodatum
-
Section First
Nature of Commodatum
-
Article 1741
A lender (comodante) retains the ownership of the thing loaned. The borrowar (comodatario) acquires the use of the same, but not its fruits; when the person who acquires the use has to pay any compensation, the agreement shall cease to be a commodatum.
-
Article 1742
The obligations and rights which grow out of the commodatum shall pass to the heirs of both contracting parties, unless the loan has been made in consideration for the person of the borrower, in which case his heirs shall not have the right to continue using the thing loaned.
-
Article 1741
-
Section Second
Obligations of the Borrower (Comodatario)
-
Article 1743
The borrower shall be bound to pay the ordinary expenses which are necessary for the use and preservation of the thing loaned.
-
Article 1744
When the borrower puts the thing to a different use than that for which it was loaned, or keeps the same in his possession for a longer time than that agreed upon, he shall be liable for its loss, even when said loss occurs by an unforeseen event.
-
Article 1745
When the thing loaned was delivered under appraisal and is lost, even if it be by an unforeseen event, the borrower shall be liable for its value> unless there is a stipulation in which he is expressly exempted from said liability.
-
Article 1746
The borrower shall not be liable for the wear and tear caused to the thing loaned only on account of its use and without fault on his part.
-
Article 1747
A borrower shall not retain the thing loaned under the pretext that the lender owes him something, even if it is on account of expenses.
-
Article 1748
All the borrowers to whom the thing is jointly loaned shall be jointly liable for the same, according to the provisions of this section.
-
Article 1743
-
Section Third
Obligations of the Lender (Comodante)
-
Article 1749
A lender cannot claim the thing loaned, except after the termination of the use for which it was loaned. Nevertheless, when, previous to such term, the lender has an urgent necessity for the same, he may claim its restitution.
-
Article 1750
When the duration of the commodatum has not been stipulated, nor
the use to which the thing loaned was to be destined, and the latter does
not appear determined by the customs of the land, the lender may claim
it at his will.
In case of doubt the burden of proof falls upon the borrower.
-
Article 1751
The lender shall pay the extraordinary expenses, caused during the contract for the preservation of the thing loaned, provided that the borrower gives notice of the same before making them, unless when they are so urgent that the answer to the notice cannot be waited for without risk.
-
Article 1752
A lender, who, knowing the vices of the thing loaned, has not given notice thereof to the borrower, shall be liable to the same for the damages which he may have suffered on that account.
-
Article 1749
-
Section First
Nature of Commodatum
-
Chapter Second
Simple Loan
-
Article 1753
A person who receives money or any other perishable thing on loan acquires its ownership, and is bound to return to the creditor an equal amount of the same kind and quality.
-
Article 1754
The obligations of a person who takes money on loan shall be governed
by the provisions of art. 1170 of this Code.
When what has been loaned is some other perishable thing, or a quantity
of metal, not in coin, the debtor owes a quantity, equal to the one received,
and of the same kind and quality, although it may have suffered a change
in its value.
-
Article 1755
Interests shall only be owed when they have been expressly stipulated.
-
Article 1756
A borrower, who has paid interests without it being stipulated, cannot claim them nor impute them to the capital.
-
Article 1757
Pawn shops shall besides be subject to the ordinances relating to them.
-
Article 1753
-
General Provision
-
Title XI
Deposit
-
Chapter First
Deposits in General and Different Kinds Thereof
-
Article 1758
A deposit is constituted when a person receives a thing belonging to another under the obligation of keeping and returning the same.
-
Article 1759
A deposit may be judicially or extra-judicially constituted.
-
Article 1758
-
Chapter Second
Deposits Properly Speaking
-
Section First
Nature and Essence of the Contract of Deposit
-
Article 1760
Deposit is a gratuitous contract, unless the contrary is stipulated.
-
Article 1761
Personal property only shall be an object of deposit.
-
Article 1762
Extrajudicial deposit is either necessary or voluntary.
-
Article 1760
-
Section Second
Voluntary Deposit
-
Article 1763
Voluntary deposit is that in which the delivery is made by the
will of the depositor. The deposit may be effected by two or more persons
who believe themselves to have a right to the thing deposited in the hands
of a third person who shall, in proper case, deliver said thing to the party to whom
it belongs.
-
Article 1764
When a person able to contract accepts the deposit made by another who is an incapable, the former remains bound to all the obligations of a depositary, and may be compelled to return it by the guardian, curator or administrator of the person who made the deposit or by the same person, if he becomes capable.
-
Article 1765
When the deposit has been made by a capable person, in the hands of another who is incapable, the depositor shall only have the action to revindicate the thing deposited as long as it remains in the hands of the depositary, or to oblige the latter to pay him the sum by which he may have profited on account of the thing or its price.
-
Article 1763
-
Section Third
Obligations of the Depositary
-
Article 1766
A depositary is bound to keep the thing, and, when required, to
return it to the depositor or person holding rights under the same, or
to the person who has been designated in the contract. His liability,
with regard to the keeping and loss of the thing, shall be governed by the provisions of
title first of this book.
-
Article 1767
A depositary shall not make use of the thing deposited without
the express permission of the depositor.
Otherwise he shall be liable for damages and injuries.
-
Article 1768
When the depositary has permission to serve himself or make use
of the thing deposited, the contract loses the character of deposit and
becomes a loan or a commodatum.
Such permission shall not be presumed, and its existence must be proven.
-
Article 1769
When the deposit is delivered closed and sealed, the depositary
shall return it in the same condition and he shall be liable for damages
and injuries when the seal or lock has been broken by his fault.
Such depositary is presumed to be culpable, unless the contrary is proven.
With regard to the value of the thing deposited, the statement of the
depositor shall be admitted, when the forcible opening is chargeable to
the depositary, unless there is proof to the contrary.
-
Article 1770
The thing deposited shall be returned with all its proceeds and
accretions.
When the deposit consists of money, the provisions in regard to agents,
set forth in art. 1724, shall be applied to the depositary.
-
Article 1771
The depositary cannot force the depositor to prove that he is
the owner of the thing deposited.
Nevertheless, if he discovers that the thing has been stolen and who is
the true owner, be shall give notice of its deposit to the latter.
When the owner, notwithstanding said notice, does not claim it within
the term of one month the depositary shall be free from any liability
by returning the thing deposited to the person from whom he received it.
-
Article 1772
When there are two or more depositors and they are not joint and
the thing can be divided, each one of them can ask for his part only.
When they are joint depositors or the thing does not admit of division,
the provisions of art. 1141 and 1142 of this Code shall rule.
-
Article 1773
When the depositor loses his capacity to contract after having made the deposit, the latter cannot be returned, except to the persons who have the management of the property and rights of the depositor.
-
Article 1774
When, on making the deposit, a place is designated for the return
of the thing deposited, the depositary should take it to such place, but
the expense caused by the conveyance shall be chargeable to the depositor.
When a place has not been designated for the return thereof, it shall
be made at the place where the thing deposited is, even when it is not
the same place where the deposit was made, provided that malice on the
part of the depositary has not intervened.
-
Article 1775
The deposit shall be restored to the depositor, when he claims
it, even though a term or specified time for such return has been fixed
in the contract.
This disposition shall not be observed when the deposit has been judicially
seized or attached in the hands of the depositary, or when the latter
has been notified of the opposition of a third party to the return or
to the transfer of the thing deposited.
-
Article 1776
The depositary, who has just motives for not keeping the deposit, may, even before the term designated, return it to the depositor, and if the latter refuses it, he may obtain its consignation from the Judge.
-
Article 1777
The depositary, who has lost the thing deposited through main force and received another in its place, shall be bound to deliver the latter thing to the depositor.
-
Article 1778
An heir of the depositor who, in good faith, has sold the thing, which he did not know was deposited, shall only be bound to return the price which he may have received or to assign his actions against the purchaser in case the price has not been paid to him.
-
Article 1766
-
Section Fourth
Obligations of the Depositor
-
Article 1779
A depositor is bound to reimburse the depositary for the expenses incurred by the latter in the preservation of the thing deposited, and to indemnity him for all the injuries which may have been caused to him on account of the deposit.
-
Article 1780
The depositary may retain the thing deposited in pledge until the total payment of what is due him on account of the deposit.
-
Article 1779
-
Section Fifth
Necessary Deposit
-
Article 1781
A deposit shall be necessary:
-
Article 1782
A deposit, comprised in the first number of the preceding article,
shall be governed by the provisions of the law which establishes it, and,
default of the same, by those of voluntary deposit.
Those comprised in the second number shall be governed by the rules of
voluntary deposit.
-
Article 1783
The deposit of effects, made by travelers, in inns or hostelries,
shall also be considered a necessary one.
The keepers of inns and hostelries shall be liable for them as such depositaries,
provided that notice thereof has been given to them or to their clerks,
and that the travelers on their part observe the precautions which said
innkeepers or their substitutes may have about the care and watchfulness
over such effects.
-
Article 1784
The liability to which the preceding article refers shall comprise damages to the goods of travelers, caused by servants or clerks of the keepers of inns or hostelries as well as by strangers, but not for those arising from robbery or which may be caused by any other case of main force.
-
Article 1781
-
Section First
Nature and Essence of the Contract of Deposit
-
Chapter Third
Sequestration
-
Article 1785
A judicial deposit or sequestration takes place when a seizure or placing in security of property in litigation is decreed.
-
Article 1786
Personal as well as real property may be subject to sequestration.
-
Article 1787
A depositary of the property or things sequestrated shall not be released from his charge, until the controversy which caused it is ended, unless the Judge orders it on account of the consent of all the persons interested, or for any other lawful cause.
-
Article 1788
A depositary of property sequestrated is bound in respect to the same to comply with all the obligations of a good father of a family.
-
Article 1789
Judicial sequestration shall be governed by the provisions of the Law of Civil Procedure in whatever is not provided for in this Code.
-
Article 1785
-
Chapter First
Deposits in General and Different Kinds Thereof
-
Title XII
Aleatory or Hazardous (Contingent) Contracts
-
Chapter First
General Provision
-
Article 1790
By an aleatory contract, one of the parties binds himself, or both reciprocally bind themselves to give or do something as an equivalent for what the other party has to give or to do, in case of the happening of an event which is uncertain or is to happen at an undetermined time.
-
Article 1790
-
Chapter Second
Contract of Insurance
-
Article 1791
A contract of insurance is one by which the insurer is liable for the fortuitous damages which may occur to the personal or real property insured, in consideration of a certain price, which may be freely fixed by the parties.
-
Article 1792
Two or more proprietors may mutually insure against fortuitous damages
which may happen to their respective properties. This contract is called
mutual insurance, and,when it has not been otherwise stipulated, it is understood
that the indemnity for such damages shall be paid by all the contracting parties in proportion to the value of the property which each one has insured.
-
Article 1793
A contract of insurance shall be made in a public or private instrument signed by the contracting parties.
-
Article 1794
Said instrument shall specify:
-
Article 1795
The contract shall not effectual as to the part in which the sum
of the insurance exceeds the value of the thing insured, and only one insurance
can be collected for the whole value of the same.
When two or more contracts of insurance exist in respect to the same object,
each insurer shall be liable for the damage, in proportion to the capital
which he has insured, until the total value of the thing insured has been
paid in full by them.
-
Article 1796
When the damage occurs, the insured must give notice of the same to the insurer and all the other persons concerned, within the term agreed to; and, in default of the same, within twenty four hours to be counted from the time the insured had knowledge of the loss. When he fails to do so, he shall have no action against them.
-
Article 1797
A contract shall be null when, at the time it was made, the insured knew that the damage, which was the object of the same, had occurred, or when the insurer knew that the property insured was already free from said danger.
-
Article 1791
-
Chapter Third
Gaming and Betting
-
Article 1798
The law does not give any action to claim what is won in a game of chance, luck or hazard, but the person who loses cannot recover what he has voluntarily paid, unless fraud has intervened, or he is a minor or incapacitated to administer his property.
-
Article 1799
The provisions of the preceding article in regard to gambling are
also applicable to betting.
Bets which have analogy with prohibited games are considered as prohibited.
-
Article 1800
Games which contribute to the exercise of the body, as those whose
object is to acquire skill in the management of arms, and races on foot
or horse back, by vehicles, ball games, and others of an analogous nature
are not considered prohibited.
-
Article 1801
A person who loses in a game or a bet which is not prohibited shall
be civilly liable therefor.
Nevertheless, judicial authority may, either not consider the claim when
the sum which was wagered in the game or bet is excessive, or such authority
may reduce the obligation to the extent it exceeds the customs of a good
father of a family.
-
Article 1798
-
Chapter Fourth
Annuities for Life
-
Article 1802
An aleatory contract of annuity binds the debtor to pay a pension or annual sum to one or more specified persons, during their lives, for a capital in personal or real property, the ownership of which is at once transferred to such debtor with the liability of paying such pension.
-
Article 1803
An annuity may be constituted on the life of the person who gives
the capital, on that of a third person, or on that of several persons.
It may also be constituted in behalf of the person or persons for whose
life it is agreed, or in behalf of another or other different persons.
-
Article 1804
An annuity constituted on the life of persons dead, at the time of making the contract, or who, at the same time, is suffering from disease which may cause his death, within twenty days next following that date, is null and void.
-
Article 1805
Default in payment of pensions due does not authorize the receiver
of the life annuity to exact the reimbursement of the capital, nor to re-enter
the possession of the tenement alienated; he shall only have the right to
judicially claim the payment of the pensions in arrears, and security for future ones.
-
Article 1806
Annuity, corresponding to the year in which the person who enjoys it dies, shall be paid in proportion to the days which he has lived; when it must be paid in installments in advance, the total amount for such a term, which began to run during his life, shall be paid.
-
Article 1807
A person, who by a gratuitous title constitutes an annuity on his property, may dispose, at the time of the execution of the contract, that said annuity shall not be subject to attachments for debts of the annuitant.
-
Article 1808
Annuity cannot be claimed without proving the existence of the person on whose life it was constituted.
-
Article 1802
-
Chapter First
General Provision
-
Title XIII
Compromises and Arbitrations
-
Chapter First
Compromises
-
Article 1809
Compromise is a contract by which each one of the parties by giving, promising, or retaining some thing avoids the provocation of a suit, or puts and end to the one that has already been instituted.
-
Article 1810
A guardian cannot compromise the right of a person who is under
guardianship, except in the manner prescribed in no. 12 of art. 269, and
in art. 274 of the present Code.
The father, and, in certain cases, the mother, may compromise in regard
to the property and rights of the child who is under their power, but if
the value of the object about which the compromise is made exceeds two thousand
pesetas, it shall not be effective without judicial approval.
-
Article 1811
Neither the husband nor the wife can compromise in regard to dotal property and rights, except in the cases and with the formalities provided for alienating or encumbering the same.
-
Article 1812
Corporations which have a juridical personality can only make compromises in the manner and with the requisites necessary for alienating their property.
-
Article 1813
A civil action arising from a crime may be compromised; but the public action for the imposition of the legal penalty shall not be extinguished thereby.
-
Article 1814
No compromises can be made in regard to the civil status of persons, neither in regard to matrimonial questions, nor about future support.
-
Article 1815
A compromise shall only embrace the objects specifically set forth
in the same, or those which by a necessary induction from its words must
be considered embraced therein.
A general renunciation of rights shall be understood as including only those
which have relation with the question about which the compromise has been
made.
-
Article 1816
A compromise has, as among the parties, the same authority as a final judgment, but summary proceedings shall not be taken, except when they are in compliance with a judicial compromise.
-
Article 1817
A compromise, in which error, deceit, violence, or forgery of documents
intervenes, shall be subject to the provisions of art. 1265 of this Code.
Nevertheless, one of the parties shall not oppose an error of fact against
the other, when, on account of a compromise, the latter has withdrawn from
a suit already begun.
-
Article 1818
The discovery of new documents is not a cause for annulling or rescinding a compromise, unless bad faith has been shown.
-
Article 1819
When a suit has been decided by a final sentence and a compromise
about the same has been made, because one of the parties interested did
not know about the existence of such a final sentence, said party may ask
that the compromise be rescinded.
Ignorance of a revocable sentence is not a cause for contesting a compromise.
-
Article 1809
-
Chapter Second
Arbitration
-
Article 1820
The same persons who can compromise may also submit their contentions to a third party for decision.
-
Article 1821
The provisions of the preceding chapter about compromises are applicable to arbitrations. With regard to the form of procedure in arbitrations and as to the extent and effects of the same, the provisions of the Law of Civil Procedure shall be observed.
-
Article 1820
-
Chapter First
Compromises
-
Title XIV
Security
-
Chapter First
Nature and Extent of Security
-
Article 1822
By security a person binds himself to pay or to comply with some
obligation for a third party in case the latter fails to do so.
When the surety binds himself jointly with the principal debtor, the provisions
of section fourth, chapter third, title first of this book shall be observed.
-
Article 1823
Security may be conventional, legal or judicial, gratuitous, or
under an onerous title.
In may also be constituted, not only in behalf of the principal debtor,
but in behalf of another surety, either with the consent, ignorance, and
even against the opposition of the latter.
-
Article 1824
Security cannot exist without a valid obligation.
-
Nevertheless, an obligation, the nullity of which may be claimed by virtue of an exception purely personal on the part of the obligee, as that of minority, may be the subject of security.
-
From the provisions of the preceding paragraph is excepted the case in which a loan is made to a minor, not emancipated."
-
-
Article 1825
Security may also be given as a guaranty for future debts, the amount of which is not yet known, but no claim shall be instituted against the surety until the debt is liquid.
-
Article 1826
A surety may bind himself to less, but not more than the principal
debtor, as to quantity as well as to the oppressiveness of the conditions.
When he binds himself for more, his obligation shall be reduced to the same
limits as that of the debtor.
-
Article 1827
Security shall not be presumed, it must be express and shall not
be extended farther than that specified therein.
When it is simple and indefinite, it shall comprise not only the principal
obligation, but all its accessories, including the expenses of the suit,
it being understood in regard to the latter that the surety shall only be
liable for those incurred, after he has been asked to pay.
-
Article 1828
A party who is bound to give security shall present a person having capacity to bind himself and with sufficient property to answer for the obligation which he guarantees. The surety shall be understood as submitting himself to the jurisdiction of the Judge of the place where this obligation is to be fulfilled.
-
Article 1829
When the surety becomes insolvent, the creditor may require another
who may have all the qualifications set forth in the preceding article.
The case is excepted where the creditor has required and stipulated that
a specified person should be the surety.
-
Article 1822
-
Chapter Second
Effects of Security
-
Section First
Effects of Security Between Surety and Creditor
-
Article 1830
A surety cannot be compelled to pay a creditor, until a levy has been previously made upon all the property of the debtor.
-
Article 1831
A levy shall not be made:
-
Article 1832
In order that the surety may avail himself of the benefit of a levy, he must set it up against the creditor, as soon as the latter summons the former for payment, and points out the property of the debtor to him, which can be sold within Spanish territory and which is sufficient to cover the amount of the debt.
-
Article 1833
When the surety has fulfilled all the conditions of the preceding article, the creditor who is negligent in making a levy upon the property, pointed out to him, shall be liable, to the extent of the value of said property, for the insolvency of the debtor, resulting from said negligence.
-
Article 1834
A creditor may summon the surety, when he institutes the claim against the principal debtor, but the benefit of a levy shall always b e effective, even when a sentence is rendered against both of them.
-
Article 1835
A compromise made by a surety with a creditor shall have no effect
in respect to the principal debtor.
That made by the latter shall neither be of any effect in respect to a
surety against his will.
-
Article 1836
A surety of a surety enjoys the benefit of a levy both with respect to the surety and to the principal debtor.
-
Article 1837
When there are several sureties but only one debtor for the same
debt, the obligation to answer for it shall be divided among them all.
The creditor can only 'claim from each surety the corresponding portion
which he has to pay, unless the solidarity has been expressly stipulated.
The benefit of division against the co-sureties ceases in the same cases
and for the same causes as that for levy against the principal debtor.
-
Article 1830
-
Section Second
Effects of Security Between the Debtor and the Surety
-
Article 1838
A surety who pays for a debtor shall be indemnified by the latter. Such indemnity comprises:
-
1
The total amount of the debt.
-
2
Legal interest on the same from the day on which the payment was made known to the debtor, even when it did not produce interest for the creditor.
-
3
The expenses caused to the surety after the latter has given notice to the debtor that he has been required to pay.
-
4
Damages and injuries, when proper.
-
1
-
Article 1839
By virtue of such payment the surety is subrogated in all the
rights which the creditor had against the debtor.
When the surety has compromised with the creditor, he shall not ask from
the debtor more than that which he has really paid.
-
Article 1840
When the surety pays without giving notice to the debtor, the latter may make use against the former of all the exceptions which he could have set up against the creditor, at the time of making the payment.
-
Article 1841
When the debt is for a term and the surety pays before the expiration, he can not require the debtor to reimburse him until such term has expired.
-
Article 1842
When the surety has paid without giving notice to the debtor, and the latter, not having knowledge of the payment, also pays it, the former has no remedy against the debtor.
-
Article 1843
The surety, even before paying, may proceed against the principal debtor:
-
1
When he is judicially sued for the payment.
-
2
In case of bankruptcy, general assignment of property, or insolvency.
-
3
When the debtor has bound himself to relieve him from the security within a specified term, and this term has expired.
-
4
When the debt has become exigible because the term in which it should have been paid has elapsed.
-
5
At the end often years, when the principal obligation has not a fixed
term for its expiration, unless it be of such a nature that it cannot
be extinguished except in a term longer than ten years.
-
1
-
Article 1838
-
Section Third
Effects of Security Amongst the Co-Sureties
-
Article 1844
When there are two or more sureties for the same debtor and for
the same debt, the one who has paid it may claim from each of the others
the portion which he or they should proportionally have paid.
If any one of them is insolvent, his portion shall be paid by all in the
same proportion.
In order that the provision of this article be applicable, the payment
must have been made by virtue of a judicial demand, or when the principal
debtor has made a general assignment, or is a bankrupt.
-
Article 1845
In the case of the preceding article, the co-sureties may set up against the one who paid, the same exceptions which would have corresponded to the principal debtor against the creditor, and which are not purely personal on the part of the same debtor.
-
Article 1846
A surety for a surety (subfiador), in case of the insolvency of the surety for whom he bound himself, remains liable to the co-sureties in the same terms as the surety was bound.
-
Article 1844
-
Section First
Effects of Security Between Surety and Creditor
-
Chapter Third
Extinguishment of Security
-
Article 1847
The obligations of a surety shall expire at the same time as that of the debtor, and for the same causes as all other obligations.
-
Article 1848
A merger which takes place in the person of the debtor and of the surety, when one of them becomes the heir of the other, does not extinguish the obligation of the surety for the surety.
-
Article 1849
A surety shall be released when the creditor voluntarily accepts a tenement, or any other things in payment of a debt, even when he afterwards loses them on account of eviction.
-
Article 1850
Liberation, made by a creditor to one of the sureties, without the consent of the others, shall avail all the others to the extent of the portion of the surety to whom it has been granted.
-
Article 1851
An extension granted to a debtor by a creditor, without the consent of the surety, extinguishes the security.
-
Article 1852
Sureties, even when they are joint, shall be released from their obligation, whenever by any act of the creditor, they cannot remain subrogated in the rights, mortgages, and privileges of the same.
-
Article 1853
A surety may set up against the creditor all the exceptions which pertain to the principal debtor and which may be inherent in the debt, but not those which are purely personal in respect to the debtor.
-
Article 1847
-
Chapter Fourth
Legal and Judicial Security
-
Article 1854
Sureties, who must give bail by provision of law or by a judicial decree, shall possess the qualifications prescribed in art. 1828.
-
Article 1855
When a person who is bound to give security, in the cases of the preceding articles, does not obtain it, a pledge or mortgage which may be considered sufficient to cover his obligation shall be accepted in place of it.
-
Article 1856
A judicial surety cannot ask for a levy on the property of the principal
debtor.
A person who offers security for a surety, in the same case, shall not ask
for either a levy on the property of the debtor nor on that of the surety.
-
Article 1854
-
Chapter First
Nature and Extent of Security
-
Title XV
Contracts of Pledge, Mortgage, and Antichresis
-
Chapter First
Provisions Common to (Contracts of) Pledge and of Mortgage
-
Article 1857
The following are essential requisites of the contracts of pledge and of mortgage:
-
1
That they be constituted to secure the fulfillment of a principal obligation.
-
2
That the ownership of the thing pledged or mortgaged belongs to the person who pledges or mortgages the same.
-
3
That the persons, who constitute the pledge or mortgage, may have the free disposition of their property, and, in case they do not have the same, it may be lawfully authorized for such purpose.
-
1
-
Article 1858
It is also essential in these contracts that when the principal obligation is due, the things of which the pledge or mortgage consists may be sold to pay the creditor.
-
Article 1859
A creditor can not appropriate to himself the things given in pledge or mortgage, nor dispose of the same.
-
Article 1860
The pledge and the mortgage are indivisible, even when the debt is divided among persons holding rights under the debtor or the creditor.
An heir of the debtor who has paid a part of the debt shall not therefore ask that the pledge or mortgage be proportionally extinguished, as long as the debt has not been paid in full, neither can an heir of the creditor, who received his part of the debt, return the pledge nor cancel the mortgage to the prejudice of other heirs who have not been paid.
From these provisions is excepted the case in which there are several things given in mortgage or pledge and each of them secures only a specified portion of the credit.
The debtor, in this case, shall be entitled to have the pledge or mortgage extinguished in proportion as the part of the debt for which each thing is particularly held liable is paid."
-
Article 1861
A contract of pledge and of mortgage can secure all kinds obligations, either pure or subject to suspensive or resolutory conditions.
-
Article 1862
A promise to constitute a pledge or mortgage gives rise only to
a personal action among the contracting parties, without prejudice to the
criminal responsibility which a person incurs who defrauds another in offering
in pledge or mortgage, as not encumbered, things which he knew were encumbered,
or pretending to be the owner of things which do not belong to him.
-
Article 1857
-
Chapter Second
Pledge
-
Article 1863
Besides the requisites, specified in art. 1857, it is necessary, to constitute the contract of pledge, that the or of a pledged should be placed in possession of the creditor thing third person by common agreement.
-
Article 1864
All personal things which are in commerce may be given in a pledge, provided they be susceptible of possession.
-
Article 1865
A pledge shall not be effective against a third person, when evidence of its date does not appear in a public instrument.
-
Article 1866
A contract of pledge gives a right to the creditor to retain the
thing in his possession or in that of the third person to whom it was delivered,
until his credit is paid.
If, while the creditor retains the pledge, the debtor contract with him
another debt to be paid before the first one has been paid, the creditor
may extend the retention until both credits are paid to him, even when it
has not been stipulated that the pledge should be subject to the security
for the second debt.
-
Article 1867
A creditor shall take care of the thing given in pledge with the diligence of a good father of a family; he has the right to recover the expenses incurred for the preservation of the same, and is liable for its loss or impairment, in accordance with the provisions of this Code.
-
Article 1868
When the pledge produces interest, the creditor shall set off that collected by him against that due him; and if none is due to him , or to the extent that it exceeds that legally due, he shall impute it to the principal.
-
Article 1869
As long as the case of ex-propriation of the thing given in pledge
does not happen, the debtor shall continue as owner of the same.
Nevertheless, the creditor may exercise the actions which belong to the
owner of the thing pledged in order to reclaim or defend it against a thing
person.
-
Article 1870
A creditor shall not make use of a thing given in pledge without the authorization of the owner, and when he does so or misuses said thing, in any other manner, the latter may ask it to be placed in deposit.
-
Article 1871
The debtor cannot ask for the restitution of the thing pledged, against the will of the creditor, until he has paid the debt and its interest with the expenses, when proper.
-
Article 1872
A creditor, to whom the debt has not been paid in due time, may
proceed, before a Notary, to sell the pledge. This sale shall in every case
be made at public auction and with due notice, in proper cases, to the debtor
and to the owner of the thing pledged. When the pledge has not been sold,
at the first sale, a second auction with the same formalities may be held,
and when no sale is made, the creditor may become owner of the pledge. In
this case he shall be bound to give a discharge for the full amount of his
credit.
When the pledge consists of stocks, listed on exchange, they shall be sold
in the manner provided for in the Code of Commerce.
-
Article 1873
Government pawnshops (Monies de Piedad) and other public institutions, which by their character or special purpose loan money on pledge, shall be governed by the special laws and regulations in respect thereto, and subsidiarily by the provisions of this title.
-
Article 1863
-
Chapter Third
Mortgage
-
Article 1874
Only the following property may be the object of the contract or mortgage:
-
Article 1875
Besides the requisites, specified in art 1857, it ls indispensable,
in order that the mortgage be validly constituted, that the instrument in
which it is constituted be inscribed in the Registry of property.
The persons, in behalf of whom the law establishes a mortgage, shall have
no other right than to exact the execution and inscription of the instrument
in which the mortgage is formally drawn, without prejudice to what the Law
of Mortgage provides in favor of the State, provinces, and towns for the
amount of the last year's taxes, and in favor of the insurers for the premium
of the insurance.
-
Article 1876
A mortgage directly and immediately binds the property on which it is imposed, whoever its possessor may be, for the fulfillment of the obligation for the security of which it was given.
-
Article 1877
A mortgage is extensive to the natural accessions, to the improvements,
to the fruits pending and rents uncollected, when the obligation is due,
and to the amount of the indemnities granted or owed to the owner by the
insurers of the property mortgaged, or by virtue of ex-propriation or on account of public
utility, with the declarations, amplifications and limitations established
by law, whether in the case in which the tenement continues in the power
of the person who mortgaged it, or when it passes to the hands of a third
party.
-
Article 1878
A hypothecary credit may be alienated or assigned to a third party, wholly or partially, under the formalities required by law.
-
Article 1879
A creditor may claim from a third possessor of the property mortgaged the payment of the portion of the credit secured with what the latter possesses, according to the terms and with the formalities established by law.
-
Article 1880
The form, extension and effects of the mortgage, and also whatever relates to its constitution, modification, and extinction, and all that has not been comprised in this chapter, shall remain subject to the provisions of the Law of Mortgage which continues in force.
-
Article 1874
-
Chapter Fourth
Antichresis
-
Article 1881
By antichresis a creditor acquires a right to receive the fruits of certain real property of his debtor, with the obligation to apply them to the payment of interest, when due, and then to the principal of his credit.
-
Article 1882
A creditor is bound to pay the taxes and charges which burden the
tenement, unless there is a stipulation to the contrary.
He shall also be bound to meet the expenses necessary for its preservation
and repair.
From the fruits shall be deducted the sums which may be employed for both
purposes.
-
Article 1883
A debtor cannot recover the enjoyment of the real property, unless
he has previously paid in full what he owes to his creditor.
But in order to free himself from the obligations imposed on him by the
preceding article, the creditor may always oblige the debtor to re-enter
upon the enjoyment of the tenement, unless there be a stipulation to the
contrary.
-
Article 1884
A creditor does not acquire ownership of the real property by default
in payment of the debt within the term agreed upon.
Any stipulation to the contrary shall be void. But in this case, the creditor
may ask, in the manner provided for in the Code of Civil Procedure, either
for the payment of the debt, or for the sale of the real property.
-
Article 1885
The contracting parties may stipulate that the interest of the debt be set off against the fruits of the tenement given in antichresis.
-
Article 1886
The last paragraph of art. 1857, paragraph second of art. 1866, and arts. 1860, and 1861 shall be applicable to this contract.
-
Article 1881
-
Chapter First
Provisions Common to (Contracts of) Pledge and of Mortgage
-
Title XVI
Obligations Contracted Without Agreement
-
Chapter First
Quasi-Contracts
-
Article 1887
Quasi-contracts are those lawful and purely voluntary acts by which the author thereof becomes obligated in regard to a third person, and, sometimes, by which there results a reciprocal obligation amongst the parties concerned.
-
Section First
Management of Stranger's Business
-
Article 1888
A person who voluntarily takes change of the agency or administration of the business of another, without authorization, is bound to continue managing the same until the end of the business and its incidents, or to notify the interested person in order that the latter may come to substitute him in his management, if such a one is in condition to personally do it.
-
Article 1889
An officious manager must discharge his duties with all the diligence
of a good father of a family and make an indemnity for injuries which,
through his fault or negligence, may be caused to the owner of the property
or business which he is managing.
Notwithstanding, the courts may moderate the amount of the indemnity,
according to the circumstances of the case.
-
Article 1890
When the manager delegates all or some of the duties of his charge
to another person, he shall answer for the acts of the delegate, without
prejudice to the direct obligation of the latter towards the proprietor
of the business.
The responsibility of the managers, when they are two or more, shall be
joint.
-
Article 1891
A manager of a business shall be liable for unforeseen events, when he undertakes venturesome operations, which the proprietor was not in the habit of doing, or when he has postponed the interests of the latter in favor of his own business.
-
Article 1892
Ratification of such management by the proprietor of the business produces the effect of an express authorization.
-
Article 1893
The owner of property or a business who avails himself of the
advantages of the administration of another, even when he has not expressly
ratified the same, shall be liable for the obligations contracted for
his benefit, and he shall indemnify the administrator for the necessary
and useful expenses which he may have incurred and for the injuries which
he may have suffered in the discharge of his duties.
The same obligations shall be incumbent on said owner, when the object
of said administration was to avoid any imminent or manifest damage, even
when no profit results therefrom.
-
Article 1894
When, without knowledge of the person who is bound to give support,
a stranger supplies it, the latter shall have the right to claim the same
from the former, unless it appears that he gave it out of charity, and
without the intention of recovering it.
Funeral expenses, suitable to the status of the person and to the customs
of the locality, shall be paid by those who during their life would have
had the obligation to support him, even when the deceased has left no
property.
-
Article 1888
-
Section Second
Collection of What is Not Due
-
Article 1895
When there was no right to claim a thing which was received and which, through an error, has been unduly delivered, there arises an obligation to restore the same.
-
Article 1896
A person who accepts an undue payment, when he has acted in bad
faith, shall pay the legal interest, when a sum of money has been received,
or shall pay for the fruits collected or which ought to have been collected,
if the thing received produces them.
He shall also be liable for the impairments which the thing may have suffered
on account of any cause whatever and for the damages caused to the person
who delivered it, until the latter recovers it. He shall not be liable
for unforeseen events, when such events may have affected the things,
in the same manner, had they been in the possession of the person who
delivered them.
-
Article 1897
A person, who in good faith has accepted an undue payment of a certain and specified thing, shall only be liable for the impairment or loss of the same and its accessories, in so far as he may have enriched himself from it. When he has alienated it, he shall return the price or assign the action to make the same effective.
-
Article 1898
With regard to the payment for improvements and expenses, made by the person who unduly received the thing, the provision of title fifth of book second shall rule.
-
Article 1899
A person shall be exempted from the obligation of restitution,
who, believing in good faith that the payment was made on the account
of a legitimate and subsistent credit, destroys the title or has allowed
the action to be prescribed, or has abandoned the pledge or cancelled
the warranties of his right. A person who has unduly made a payment can
only address himself to the true debtor or to the sureties with regard to whom
the action may yet be enforced.
-
Article 1900
The proof of payment is incumbent upon the person who pretends
to have made the same. He shall all also be obliged to prove the error
under which he made it, unless the defendant denies having received the
thing claimed from him. In this case, when the plaintiff has proven the
delivery, he shall be released from any further proof.
This does not limit the right of the defendant to justify that (the thing)
which he is supposed to have received was due him.
-
Article 1901
It is presumed that there has been an error in the payment, when a thing which was never owed or which was already paid for has been delivered, but the person from whom the return is asked may prove that the delivery was made through liberality or for any other just cause.
-
Article 1895
-
Article 1887
-
Chapter Second
Obligations Which Arise From Fault or Negligence
-
Article 1902
A person who by an act or omission causes damage to another, when blame or negligence intervenes, shall be bound to make an indemnity for the damage so done.
-
Article 1903
The obligation imposed by the preceding article is exigible, not
only for personal acts and omissions, but also for those of the persons
for whom they should be responsible.
The father, and when he is dead or has been incapacitated, the mother is
liable for the injuries caused by the minors who live with them.
Guardians are liable for the injuries caused by minors or incapacitated
persons who are under their authority and live with them.
Owners or directors of an establishment or enterprise are equally liable
for the damages, caused by their clerks in the service of the branches in
which the latter are employed, or on account of their duties.
The State is liable, in this sense, when it acts through a special agent,
but not when the damage has been caused by the official to whom properly
it pertains to do the act already done, in which case the provision of the
preceding article shall apply.
Finally, masters or directors of arts and trades are liable for the damages
caused by their pupils or apprentices, while they are under their custody.
The responsibility, to which this article refers, shall cease, when the
persons mentioned in the same prove that they employed all the diligence
of a good father of a family to avoid the danger.
-
Article 1904
A person who pays the damage caused by his subordinates may recover from the latter what he has paid.
-
Article 1905
The possessor of an animal, or a person who uses the same, shall
be liable for the damages which it may cause, even when said animal escaped
or becomes strayed.
This liability shall only cease in case that the damage proceeds from main
force or from the blame of the person who has suffered the damage.
-
Article 1906
The proprietor of a game-preserve shall be liable for the damage caused by the game to the neighboring tenements, when what is necessary to avoid the increase of the same has not been done, or when the efforts of the owners of said tenements to preserve the game has been hindered.
-
Article 1907
The proprietor of a building is liable for the damages which may result from the ruin of the whole or a part thereof, when this happens through default of the necessary repairs.
-
Article 1908
The owners shall also be liable for the damages caused:
-
1
By the explosion of machines of which care has not been taken with due diligence, and for inflammation of explosive substances which were not placed in a safe and proper place.
-
2
By excessive smoke, which may be injurious to persons or properties.
-
3
Through the fall of trees, located in places of transit, when it has not been caused by main force.
-
4
By the emanations of sewers or deposits of infectious matters, when constructed without precautions proper for the place where they are located.
-
1
-
Article 1909
When the damages considered in the two preceding articles occur by defects in the construction, a third person who suffers it may claim damages against the architect, or, in proper cases, against the constructor, only within the term prescribed by law.
-
Article 1910
The head of a family who dwells in a house or in a part of the same is liable for the damages caused by the things which may be thrown or may fall from the same.
-
Article 1902
-
Chapter First
Quasi-Contracts
-
Title XVII
Concurrence and Preference of Credits
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Article 1911
A debtor is liable for the fulfillment of his obligations to the extent of all his present and future property.
-
Article 1912
A debtor may judicially ask from his creditors a reduction in the amount and an extension of time in the payment of his debts, or either of the two things, but the exercise of this right shall not produce juridical effects, except in the cases and in the manner set forth in the Code of Civil Procedure.
-
Article 1913
A debtor, whose liabilities are greater than his assets, and who has failed to meet his current obligations, shall file a petition of bankrupcty (concurso) in a competent court, as soon as he is aware of being in such condition.
-
Article 1914
A declaration in bankrupcty, incapacitates the bankrupt (concursado) from administering his property and any other, which by law pertains to him.
He shall be reinstated in his rights, upon the termination of the bankruptcy when no cause preventing it appears in the qualification of bankruptcy.
-
Article 1915
By the declaration in bankruptcy, all the immature debts of the bankrupt become due.
Should they be paid before the time fixed in the obligation, they shall suffer the discount corresponding to the amount of the legal interest of the money.
-
Article 1916
From the date of the declaration in bankruptcy, all the debts of
the bankrupt shall no longer bear interest, with the exception of mortgage
and pledge credits to the amount of their respective guarantees.
When, after the principal of the debt is paid, any sum remains, interest,
reduced to the legal rate, unless the one stipulated is less, shall be paid.
-
Article 1917
Agreements, which the debtor and his creditors judicially enter
into, under the formalities of law about reduction of the amount and extension
of time, or in bankruptcy, shall be binding on all the concurrent parties
and on those who, having been summoned and notified in due form, did not
protest in time. Those creditors who, having the right to abstain, have
duly made use of such right, shall be excepted.
Creditors comprised in arts. 1922, 1923, and 1924 have the right to so abstain.
-
Article 1918
When an agreement for reduction of amount and extension of time is entered into with creditors of the same class, the lawful agreement of the majority shall be binding on all, without prejudice to the respective preference of creditors.
-
Article 1919
When the debtor complies with the agreement, his obligations shall be extinguished in accordance with the conditions stipulated in the same; but, when he fails to comply with the whole or a part of said agreement, the right of the creditors shall revive for the sums of their original credits which they have not received, and any of said creditors may ask for a declaration in or continuance of bankruptcy.
-
Article 1920
When there is no express stipulation to the contrary, between the debtor and the creditors, the latter shall preserve their rights, after the termination of the bankruptcy, to collect from the property, which the debtor may afterwards acquire, that portion of their credits, which they have not received.
-
Article 1911
-
Chapter Second
Classification of Credits
-
Article 1921
Credits shall be classified for their graduation and payment according to the order and terms set forth in this chapter.
-
Article 1922
In respect to the specified personal property of the debtor, the following are preferred:
-
1
Credits for the construction, repair, preservation or for the amount
of the sale of personal property which may be in the possession of the debtor
to the extent of the value of such property.
-
2
Those secured by a pledge which is in the possession of the creditor, in respect to the thing pledged and to the extent of its value.
-
3
Those guaranteed by a security of goods or negotiable paper, constituted
in a public or mercantile establishment in respect to security and for the
value of the same.
-
4
Credits for transportation, in respect to the goods transported, for
the amount of said transportation, expenses and rates of carriage and preservation,
until the time of die delivery and for a period of thirty days afterwards.
-
5
Expenses of boarding in respect to the personal property of the debtor remaining in inns.
-
6
Credits for seeds and expenses of cultivation and harvesting, advanced to the debtor in respect to fruits of the crops for which they were applied.
-
7
Credits for rents and leases for one year in respect to the personal
property of the lessee existing on the tenement leased and on the fruits
thereof.
-
1
-
Article 1923
In respect to determined real property and real rights of the debtor,
the following are preferred:
-
1
The credits in favor of the State, in respect to property of tax payers for the amounts of the last annual assessments, due and not paid, of the taxes which burden the same.
-
2
The credit of insurers, in respect to the property insured, for the premiums of insurance for two years, and when the insurance is mutual, for the last two assessments declared.
-
3
Mortgage, and statutory and agricultural (refaccionarios) credits, noted and inscribed in the Registry of property, in respect to property mortgaged, or which has been the object of the advance (refaction).
-
4
Credits, preventively noted in the Registry of property by virtue of a judicial order, for attachments, seizures, or execution of sentences, in respect to the property noted therein and only in regard to subsequent credits.
-
5
Statutory agricultural credits, neither annotated nor inscribed, in respect to the real estate to which the advance (refaction) refers, and only with regard to other credits different from those stated in the four preceding numbers.
-
1
-
Article 1924
In respect to the other personal and real property of the debtor, the following credits are preferred:
-
1
Credits in favor of the province or municipality for the taxes of the last year, due and unpaid, not comprised in number one of art. 1923.
-
2
Those incurred:
-
A
For judicial expenses and those of administration of the bankruptcy for the common interest of the creditors, made with due authorization or approval.
-
B
For the funeral expenses of the debtor, according to the customs of the place, and also those for his wife and for his children, under parental power, when they have no property of their own.
-
C
For expenses of the last illness of the same persons, caused during the last year, counted up to the day of their death.
-
D
For daily wages and salaries of the clerks and domestic servants, corresponding to the last year.
-
E
For advances made to the debtor for himself and his family, constituted under his authority, in provisions, clothing or shoes, during the same period of time.
-
F
For pensions for support during the proceedings in bankruptcy, unless they are based on a title of liberality only.
-
A
-
3
Credits which without a special privilege appear:
-
1
-
Article 1925
Credits of any other kind or by any other title, not comprised in the preceding article, shall have no preference.
-
Article 1921
-
Chapter Third
Priority of Payment of Credits
-
Article 1926
Credits, which enjoy preference in respect to certain personal property,
exclude all others to the extent of the value of the personal property to
which the preference refers. When two or more creditors claim preference
in respect to certain personal property, the following rules shall be observed,
as to priority of payment:
-
1
Credits secured by a pledge exclude all others, to the extent of the value of the thing given in pledge.
-
2
In case there is a security , and if it is lawfully constituted in behalf of more than one creditor, the priority amongst them shall be determined by the order of the dates of the execution of the guarantee.
-
3
Credits for advances for seeds, expenses of cultivation and gathering, shall be preferred over those for rents and leases, in regard to the fruits of the crop for which they were incurred.
-
4
In all other cases, the value of the personal property shall be distributed pro rata among the credits which enjoy special preference in regard to the same property.
-
1
-
Article 1927
Credits, which enjoy preference in regard to certain real property
or real rights, exclude all others for their full amounts to the extent
of the value of the real estate or real rights to which the preference refers.
When two or more credits affecting certain real property or real rights
concur, the following rules shall be observed in respect to their priority:
-
1
Those set forth in nos. 1 and 2 of art. 1923 shall be preferred, according to the order, to those comprised in the other numbers of the same article.
-
2
Mortgages and statutory agricultural credits, annotated or inscribed
and specified in no. 3 of said article, and those comprised in no. 4 of
the same, shall enjoy priority among themselves, according to the order
of the dates of the respective inscriptions or annotations in the Registry
of property.
-
3
Statutory agricultural credits not annotated or inscribed in the Registry,
to which no. 5 of art. 1923 refers, shall enjoy preference among themselves
in the inverse order of their dates.
-
1
-
Article 1928
The residue of the estate of a debtor, after the credits which enjoy
preference in regard to certain property, personal or real, have been paid,
shall become part of the free property which the latter may possess for
the payment of the other credits.
Those which enjoy preference in regard to certain property, personal or
real, and which have not been totally paid in full with the amount of such
property, shall be paid as to the deficit in the order and place pertaining
to the same, according to their respective natures.
-
Article 1929
Credits which have no preference in regard to certain property;
those which have preference for the amount not collected; and those which,
by prescription, have lost the right of preference, shall be paid according
to the following rules:
-
Article 1926
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Title XVIII
Prescription
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Article 1930
Ownership and other real rights are acquired by prescription in the manner and under the conditions specified by law. Rights and actions, of whatever kind, also become extinguished by prescription in the same manner.
-
Article 1931
Persons able to acquire property or rights by other lawful means can also acquire the same by prescription.
-
Article 1932
Rights and actions shall be extinguished by prescription to the
prejudice of all classes of persons, including juridical ones, according
to the terms provided by law.
Persons incapacitated to administer their property shall always retain the
right to make claim against their lawful representatives whose negligence
may have been the cause of the prescription.
-
Article 1933
Prescription gained by a co-proprietor or owner in common shall be for the benefit of all the others.
-
Article 1934
Prescription produces its juridical effects in behalf and against the estate of inheritance, before the latter has been accepted, and during the time granted to make an inventory and for deliberation.
-
Article 1935
Persons with the capacity to alienate may renounce the prescription
gained, but not the right to prescription in the future.
Prescription shall be understood as tacitly renounced when the renunciation
results from facts which lead to the supposition that the right acquired
has been abandoned.
-
Article 1936
All things which are in commerce are susceptible of prescription.
-
Article 1937
Creditors and all other persons, interested in making a prescription valid may profit by the same, notwithstanding the express or tacit renunciation of the debtor or owner.
-
Article 1938
The provisions of the present title shall be understood without prejudice to what may be established in this Code or in special laws in respect to specified cases of prescription.
-
Article 1939
Prescription, which began to run before the publication of this Code, shall be governed by the laws then prevailing; but if, after this Code is in force, all the time required in the same for prescription has elapsed, such prescription shall be effectual, even when according to the former laws a longer period of time was required.
-
Article 1930
-
Chapter Second
Prescription of Ownership and Other Real Rights
-
Article 1940
For ordinary prescription of ownership and other real rights, it is necessary to possess things in good faith and under a just title, during the time specified by law.
-
Article 1941
Possession must be held under belief of ownership, and be public, peaceful, and uninterrupted.
-
Article 1942
Acts of a possessory character, executed by virtue of permission, or by mere tolerance of the owner, are of no effect for establishing possession.
-
Article 1943
For the effects of prescription, possession is interrupted either naturally or civilly.
-
Article 1944
Possession is interrupted naturally, when, for any cause, it ceases for more than one year.
-
Article 1945
Civil interruption is caused by a judicial summons on the possessor, even when made by order of an incompetent judge.
-
Article 1946
A judicial summons shall be considered not made and shall fail to cause interruption:
-
Article 1947
Civil interruption shall also be caused by a judgment of peace (acto de conciliation), provided that within two months from its celebration, the complaint as to possession or ownership of the thing contested be presented in court.
-
Article 1948
An express or tacit acknowledgement which the possessor may make in respect to the right of the owner also interrupts possession.
-
Article 1949
Against the title recorded in the Registry of property, the ordinary prescription of ownership or of real rights shall not obtain against a third person, except by virtue of another title similarly recorded, and the time shall begin to run from the date of the inscription of the second.
-
Article 1950
Good faith of the possessor consists in his belief that the person from whom he received the thing was the owner of the same, and could convey the ownership thereof.
-
Article 1951
The conditions of good faith, required for possession in arts. 433, 434, 435, and 436 of this Code, are equally necessary for the determination of said requirement in the prescription of ownership and of other real rights.
-
Article 1952
By a just title is understood that which legally suffices to transfer the ownership or real rights, the prescription of which is in question.
-
Article 1953
Title for prescription must be true and valid.
-
Article 1954
A just title must be proven; it never can be presumed.
-
Article 1955
Ownership of personal property is prescribed by an uninterrupted possession in good faith for a period of three years. Ownership of personal property is also prescribed by an uninterrupted possession of six years, without the necessity of any other condition.
The provisions of art. 464 of this Code shall be observed in respect to the rights of the owner to revindicate the personal things lost or of which he has been unlawfully deprived, and also in regard to those acquired at an auction, on exchanges, at fairs or markets, or from a merchant lawfully established or habitually engaged in the traffic of similar objects.
-
Article 1956
Personal property stolen or robbed can not be prescribed by the persons who stole or robbed the same, nor by their accomplices, or harborers, unless the crime or misdemeanor or their penalities and the actions to exact the civil responsibility, arising from the crime or misdemeanor, have been prescribed.
-
Article 1957
Ownership and other real rights in respect to real property shall be prescribed by possession for ten years as to persons present, and by twenty years in respect to those absent, when held in good faith and under a just title.
-
Article 1958
For the effects of prescription, a person, who resides in a foreign country or beyond the seas, shall be considered as absent.
When said person has been present during part of the time, and absent during another part , every two year of absence shall be considered as one year to complete the ten years of the time required to be present.
Absence which is not for a whole and continuous year shall not be considered in the computation.
-
Article 1959
Ownership and other real rights in respect to real property shall also be prescribed by the uninterrupted possession of the same for thirty years, without the necessity of title or good faith, and without distinction of persons, absent or present, save the exception set forth in art. 539.
-
Article 1960
In the computation of the time necessary for prescription, the following
rules shall be observed:
-
1
The actual possessor may complete the time necessary for prescription by adding to his time that of the person under whom he holds rights.
-
2
It is presumed that the actual possessor, who has been a possessor in former a time, has continued to be such possessor during the time intervening, unless there is proof to the contrary.
-
3
The day on which the time begins to run is considered as a whole day but the last day should be wholly completed.
-
1
-
Article 1940
-
Chapter Third
Prescription of Actions
-
Article 1961
Actions are prescribed by the mere lapse of the time specified by law.
-
Article 1962
Real actions in respect to personal property are prescribed by the lapse of six years after the loss of possession, unless the possessor has, during a shorter term, gained the ownership in accordance with art. 1955, and with the exception of the cases of loss and public sale, and those of theft and robbery, in which cases the provision of paragraph third of said article shall rule.
-
Article 1963
Real actions in respect to real property are prescribed after thirty
years.
This provision is understood without prejudice to what is provided in respect
to the acquisition of ownership or of real rights by prescription.
-
Article 1964
Hypothecary actions are prescribed after twenty years, and those which are personal and which have no special term of prescription fixed, after fifteen years.
-
Article 1965
Among co-heirs , co-owners or proprietors of adjacent tenements, the action to ask partition of the inheritance, the division of the thing held in common or of the demarkation of the adjacent properties shall not be prescribed.
-
Article 1966
Actions to exact the fulfillment of the following obligations are prescribed by the lapse of five years:
-
Article 1967
Actions for the fulfillment of the following obligations shall be prescribed after the lapse of three years:
-
1
For the payment of judges, lawyers, registrars, notaries, with and without
records, (notaries escribanos), experts, agents and clerks for their honoraries
and fees and the charges and disbursements made by them in the discharge
of their duties or offices in the matters to which the obligations refer.
-
2
For payments to apothecaries for medicines which they have supplied;
to professors and teachers for their salaries and stipends for the instruction
which they have given, or for the exercise of their profession, art or avocation.
-
3
For the payment of mechanics, servants, and laborers the amounts due
for their services, and for the supplies or disbursements which they may
have made concerning the same.
-
4
For the payment of board and habitation to innkeepers and to traders for the value of goods, sold to others who are not traders, or who being traders are engaged in a different trade.
-
1
-
Article 1968
By the lapse of one year, are prescribed:
-
Article 1969
The time for the prescription of all kinds of actions, when there i? no special disposition providing otherwise, shall be counted from the day on which they could have been exercised.
-
Article 1970
The time for the prescription of actions, the object of which is
to claim the fulfillment of obligations in respect to principal with interest
or rent shall run from the last payment of rent or interest.
The same shall be understood in regard to the principal of the consignative
ground-rent, In the emphyteusis, and reservative ground-rent, the time for the running
of the prescription shall be counted from the last payment of the pension
or rent.
-
Article 1971
The period for the prescription of actions to exact the fulfillment of obligations, declared in a final judgment, shall begin from the day the judgement became final.
-
Article 1972
The term for the prescription of actions to exact the rendering
of accounts shall run from the day on which those who should have rendered
them ceased in the discharge of their duties.
That pertaining to the action for the balance of accounts, from the date
on which the latter was acknowledged by agreement of the parties interested.
-
Article 1973
Prescription of actions is interrupted by the exercise of the same before the courts, by extrajudicial claim of the creditor, and by any other act of acknowledgement of the debt by the debtor.
-
Article 1974
Interruption of prescription of actions in joint obligations shall
equally benefit or injure all the creditors or debtors.
This provision shall equally rule with regard to the heirs of the debtor
in all kinds of obligations.
In obligations in severalty, when the creditor does not claim from one of
the debtors more than the portion corresponding to him, the prescription
shall not be interrupted for that reason, in respect to the other co-debtors.
-
Article 1975
Interruption of the prescription, against the principal debtor by judicial claim of the debt, shall also be effective against his surety; but that produced by extrajudicial claims of the creditor, or private acknowledgements of the debtor, shall not injure said surety.
-
Article 1961
-
Chapter First
General Provisions
-
Title I
Obligations
-
Final Provision
-
Article 1976
All the legal compilations, uses, and customs which constitute the
common civil law in all matters which are the object of this Code are hereby
abrogated and they shall remain without force or effect, either as direct obligatory laws, or as supplementary law. This provision shall not apply
to the laws which have been declared in force by this Code.
-
Transient Provisions
Changes introduced in this Code to the injury of rights, acquired under preceding civil legislation, shall have no retroactive effect.
-
To apply the corresponding legislation in cases not expressly specified in this Code, the following rules shall be observed:
-
1
Rights arising under the legislation preceding this Code, from acts realized under its rules, shall be governed by said preceding legislation, even when this Code regulates them in another manner, or does not recognize the same. But when such rights appear declared for the first time in this Code, they shall at once be effective, even when the facts which originated them have been accomplished under the preceding legislation, provided that they do not injure other acquired rights having the same origin.
-
2
Acts and contracts entered into under the regime of the preceding legislation, and which are valid according to the same, shall produce all their effects according to the same legislation, with the limitations set forth in these rules. Therefore, last wills, even when jointly executed; powers of attorney to execute wills and testamentary notes, executed or written before this Code was in force, shall be valid; and the clause ad cantelam, the trusts (fideicomisos) for applying the estate in accordance with the secret instructions of the testator, and any other acts, prescribed by the preceding legislation, shall be effective; but the revocation or modification of these acts or of any of the clauses contained in the same, shall not be effective, after this Code has been enforced, except by making the testament according to the same.
-
3
The provisions of this Code which sanction, with a civil penalty or deprivation of rights, acts or omissions which had no sanction in the preceding legislation, shall not be applicable to the person who, when the latter was in force, had incurred the omission or committed the act forbidden by this Code.
-
4
Actions and rights arising before this Code was in force, and not exercised, shall subsist with the extension and according to the terms acknowledged by the preceding legislation, but shall be subject, in regard to the exercise, duration, and proceedings for enforcing them, to the provisions of this Code.
-
5
Children who have attained the age of twenty three years, when this Code becomes effective, are emancipated and not subject to the parental power, but when they continue living in the house and at the expense of their parents, the latter may retain the usufruct, the administration, and other rights which they are enjoying in respect to the private property of their children, up to the time when the children should be freed from the parental power according to the preceding legislation.
-
6
A father who may have voluntarily emancipated a child, reserving to himself some rights out of his adventitious property, may continue enjoying the same up to 'the time when the son should be freed from the parental power according to the preceding legislation.
-
7
Fathers, mothers, and grandparents, who are exercising guardianship of their descendants, shall not withdraw the securities which they have constituted, nor be obliged to constitute them, when said sureties have not been given, nor to complete the same, when those given appear to be insufficient.
-
8
Guardians and curators, named under the provisions of the preceding legislation, and with subjection to the same, shall preserve their charges, subject as to the exercise of the same to the provisions of this Code.
-
9
Guardianships and curatorships, the definite constitution of whichispendingthedecision of thecourts, at the time this Code becomes effective, shall be constituted according to the preceding legislation, without prejudice to the preceding rule.
-
10
Judges and municipal attorneys shall not of their own accord proceed to name family councils, except in regard to minors whose guardianship may not be definitely constituted, when this Code becomes effective. When the guardian or curator has already begun to exercise his charge, the family council shall not be named until one of the persons who has to form a part of the same, or the same guardian or curator existing petitions for the constitution of said council, and meanwhile the appointment of a protutor shall remain in suspense.
-
11
Proceedings for adoption, those for voluntary emancipation, those for dispensation of law, pending before the Government or the courts, shall be continued in accordance with preceding legislation, unless the fathers or petitioners for such grace desist from these proceedings and prefer those established in this Code.
-
Rights to the inheritance of persons who have died, with or without a will, before this Code is in force, shall be ruled by the preceding legislation. The inheritances of those who die after that time, with or without a testement, shall be adjudicated and distributed according to this Code, but complying, in so far as the latter permits it, with the testamentary provisions. Therefore, the legitimes t advantages, and legacies shall be respected; but their amounts shall be reduced, when it is not possible, in any other manner, to give to each participant in the inheritance, the portion corresponding to him, according to this Code.
-
-
12
Cases, not directly comprised in the preceding provisions, shall be determined by applying the principles on which they are founded.
-
1
-
-
Additional Provisions
-
1
The President of the Supreme Court and those of the Territorial
Audiencias shall transmit to the Secretary of Grace and Justice, at the
end of each year, a report in which, referring to the affairs of which 'the
civil branches have taken cognizance during the same year, they may point
out the deficiencies and doubts which they have met in applying this Code.
They shall state, in detail in the same, the questions and points of law
controverted, and the articles or omissions of the Code which have given
cause for doubts to the Court.
-
2
The Secretary of Grace and Justice shall transmit these reports and a
copy of the civil statistics of the same year to the General Commission
on Codification.
-
3
In view of this data, of the progress made in other countries, which
may be utilized in our country, and of the jurisprudence of the Supreme
Court, the Commission on Codification shall formulate and transmit to the
Government, every ten years, such reforms as it may be convenient to introduce.
-
1
-
Article 1976